Category: General

  • Mosaic is a work of art, see the history and method of making it

    Mozaik is – Hello Sinaumed’s, have you ever heard of the word Mozaik? Yes, it’s
    like something put together by sticking together the pieces to make a beautiful new visual
    masterpiece.

    But really, what is Mosaic? How found? And so forth. This time we
    will discuss all things related to Mosaic.
    What exactly is a mosaic? Let’s ask the
    experts.

    Definition of Mosaic according to experts

    1. According to Hajar Pamadhi and Sukardi
    (2008:56)

    Pamadhi and Sukardi argue that Mosaic is the creation of two or three dimensional works of art using materials or
    materials from pieces that are deliberately made by cutting them into pieces or in the form of pieces and then
    arranging them by sticking them on a flat surface by gluing them.

    2. According to Soemardji (1992)

    Soemardji argues that mosaic is a work of art which contains elements that are arranged and glued together in
    such a way on a plane surface so as to form an image or design.

    3. Sumanto (2005)

    Sumanto believes that mosaic is a way of creating images, paintings or decorations by gluing small pieces of
    certain materials.

    That means according to the experts. In general, mosaic can be interpreted as a two- or
    three-dimensional work of art that uses materials such as glass, ceramics, colored paper or other media that
    are cut into pieces, and can even use materials that are no longer used because they are broken or torn.
    These materials are then arranged and affixed to the patterned areas, so that they become a new
    work of aesthetic value.

    History of Mosaic

    That said, this work of art was introduced by the Sumerians in Mesopotamia around 4000 or 5000 years ago.
    At that time, mosaics were made using clay plates on the walls, so that they formed the desired
    pattern of images.

    Then it developed, the Egyptians made mosaics using materials such as gemstones which were used to decorate walls
    and furniture.

    The Greeks also developed using colored natural stones, the stone materials used are the materials of choice, in
    order to produce natural and permanent colors.

    The Romans began to use the material to make mosaics in the form of chips. Usually the motifs
    of these works depict something, ranging from simple motifs, to everyday stories and heroic myths.
    The materials used usually use ceramics, glass, and clay to produce special effects.

    The Difference between Mosaic and Similar Works

    Mosaics, collages, and montages are two or three-dimensional works of art that apply the art of pasting
    pieces of material and arranging them to form an image.
    But who would have thought, even though
    they were similar, in fact the three of them had differences.
    Where does the difference
    lie?

    For montage, montage is a work of art that uses an image from magazines, books, newspapers, etc. to be
    arranged into a new work of art.
    For example cutting a picture of a car in a newspaper or
    magazine, then putting it together in a new field.

    A collage is a work of art by attaching several types of materials such as newspapers, seeds, and beads to
    a patterned area.
    Meanwhile, mosaic is gluing one type of material into a new shape.

    It is clear now the difference? Then, what exactly is the function of this mosaic?
    Let’s try to see one by one!

    Mosaic function

    1. Aesthetic practical function

    Aesthetics has the meaning of everything related to the appreciation of beauty. The aesthetic
    practical function here is a work of art with a decorative function to beautify or beautify a room.

    2. Expression function

    As a function of expression, this work will exist based on the expressions that appear from the maker.
    Usually, mosaic artists have a myriad of creative ideas, which are then expressed in their mosaic
    works.

    3. Educational function

    Creativity in making this work will involve motor functions, intellect, absorption, emotion, and aesthetic
    taste.
    So by itself, each of these functions will increase with the frequency of making this
    work.

    4. Psychological function

    In terms of psychological functions, mosaics act as a medium for channeling various kinds of emotions that
    a person experiences.
    Now many people refer to it as healing media .

    5. Social function

    As a social function, mosaics function as a means of preserving cultural values ​​that are strong in society, so
    that they can be entertainment, present beauty, and as part of education in society.

    Materials Used

    More curious about this work? You can, you know, make this work by utilizing the materials
    around you.
    What materials can be used to make mosaics?

    The following are materials that can be used in making mosaic art:

    1. Ceramics

    Works of art that use ceramic materials, usually use ceramic pieces consisting of various colors that match
    certain motifs or according to patterns that have been designed.

    2. Glass

    This artwork usually uses pieces of glass in various shapes and sizes according to the desired pattern.

    3. Paper

    In making it, usually use colored paper or paper that is commonly used for origami, then cut according to needs.

    4. Seeds

    Seeds of plant origin can also be used to make mosaics, such as green bean seeds, black soybean seeds, saga
    seeds, and so on.

    5. Stone

    The types of stone that are often used to make mosaics are usually natural stone chips, marble, brick chips,
    gravel, or flagstone.

    6. Leaves

    Leaves are also a material that can be used to make mosaics. From a variety of shapes and
    characteristics, leaves can be arranged into an interesting pattern in a mosaic artwork.

    7. Rubber

    In mosaic works, processed rubber is usually used, such as used tires which are cut into small pieces or made
    into pieces to match the required shape and size.

    8. Metal

    There are several types of metals that can be used as mosaic materials, including brass, zinc, and
    aluminum.
    It is also possible that precious metals such as gold can also be used to make
    mosaics.

    Of course, according to the funds you have, Sinaumed’s. Even though it is cut into small pieces
    according to the desired needs, gold is still of high value.

    9. Mika

    Mica is a kind of mineral. The word mica comes from the Latin word micare
    which means sparkling.
    So, the mica used in this mosaic art is a mineral such as aluminum
    silicate or glass magnesium, when used for mosaics, it will look sparkling.
    In addition,
    mica also serves as electrical insulation.

    10. Skin

    The skin is the outermost part of living things. The skin that is often used as a mosaic
    material is the skin of fruits or plants, often even shells or eggshells are used.

    Of course, apart from the materials mentioned above, we also need other supporting materials to make a mosaic
    work of art, such as mats, glue or adhesive, pencils, cutting tools, as well as erasers.

    Mosaic Making Method

    In making mosaic art, there are several methods that must be considered. Methods in making
    mosaic works of art are needed so that the resulting work has aesthetic value and is full of beauty.

    Several methods are often used in making mosaic artwork, including:

    1. The direct method

    The direct method uses the technique of sticking one by one the pieces of material used on the surface of another
    three-dimensional object.

    2. Indirect method

    This indirect method is based on first arranging the mosaic pieces on another medium, then transferring them to
    the surface of a three-dimensional object.

    3. The indirect method twice

    This method is the same as the indirect method, but the process is carried out twice. So,
    after the first method is done, it is done by repeating the same method.

    How to Make a Mosaic

    After the materials and methods, you know. Now is the time for you to try to make it, Sinaumed’s.
    Here’s how to make it:

    1. Prepare the necessary materials

    This is the first thing you have to prepare. As stated above, the materials that need to be
    prepared include mats, glue, pencils, cutting tools, erasers, the desired material can be paper, leather,
    leaves, rubber, and so on.

    2. Determine the base to be used

    Selection of base, related to the material to be used. It is recommended to choose a base that
    is sturdy and thick, so that the material used can stick perfectly.
    Several base materials can
    be selected, such as cardboard, board, canvas,
    duplex paper, and cardboard.

    3. Make a pattern on the base plane

    After determining the base to be used. The next step is to make a pattern or sketch on the
    base area to be used.
    Patterns are made, according to what is desired by using a pencil, so
    that they can be easily erased if a drawing error occurs.

    The patterns can be animals, plants, landscapes, humans, and so on. Make sure the pattern
    drawn is of sufficient size to attach the pieces of material properly.

    4. Apply adhesive

    After the base plane and pattern image are ready, apply glue to the area where the pieces of material will
    be attached.
    So that the material is easy to set, don’t give too much adhesive.
    Paste the material on the wider area first, then stick on the small parts.

    5. Wait for it to dry completely

    After all the materials are glued to the base plane, wait until the adhesive dries and sticks perfectly.
    To make it look prettier, put a frame on the finished mosaic work.

    Examples of Extraordinary Mosaic Works

    Here are some examples of famous mosaic works made by world-class artists.

    1. Secret Between You and Me

    The mosaic work above is called Secret between you and me, made by Atsuko Laskaris, a Japanese-born
    artist who is now working in California.
    This work depicts a little girl who has wings like
    a butterfly playing with a butterfly.
    This work includes intricate work and has amazing
    detail.

    2. Autumn Landscape

    This mosaic artwork entitled Autumn Landscape was created by an artist named Sandra Bryant.
    Sandra and her husband, Carl Bryant, are artists who create works of art such as large murals
    for the public, mosaics for housing, and many other works.

    Sandra uses small pieces of glass and ceramic to create very intricate mosaic works. Autumn Landscape uses
    a material in the form of glass which was made in 2006.

    3. Secret Mosaic Staircase

    This time, it’s not a series of glass or ceramic pieces arranged for wall hangings or indoor decorative
    ornaments. Secret Mosaic Staircase is a work on the 163 steps that lead to the top.

    This work was created by Irish ceramics Aileen Barr involving 300 workers. Over two and
    a half years of work, the work involved 2000 handcrafted fontanels and 75000 mirror fragments, stained
    glass and tiles to complete the sea to sky design, incorporating the names of more than 220
    sponsors.

    How about it, Sinaumed’s? Interesting right? If you have an interest in making
    mosaic art, you can start learning from now on.
    If you don’t understand the methods and
    techniques, you can use the following book as a guide for learning to make mosaic art.

    Related Book Recommendations

    1. Mosaic Skills

    This book by Silvana Solichah contains 108 pages containing various examples of handicrafts from mosaic
    paper.
    In making crafts or handicrafts, it takes patience, touch, and creativity.

    Every effort to produce beautiful works of art, must have various kinds of challenges. This
    book will show you how, step by step, to produce beautiful work.
    This book guides the process
    from start to finish in producing works.

    Many tips are given to make it easier to be creative, so that it has artistic value. More
    curious?
    Get this book soon, and have fun practicing.

    2. The Most Beautiful Mosaics

    An Andrea Hirata makes mosaic works in another form. Andrea Hirata is a novelist with his
    famous work, namely Laskar Pelangi.
    Laskar Pelangi is a novel by Andrea Hirata which has been
    adapted to the big screen.

    The Most Beautiful Mozaik-Mozaik Novel is a book that contains a collection of editor-chosen chapters that
    are considered the best of all the books by Andrea Hirata.
    In each chapter, we will be
    presented with feelings of conflicts that are raging in our hearts.

    Tells about the feelings full of memories of a beautiful childhood, playing with friends, respect for teachers,
    beautiful surroundings, not burdened with piled workloads, the struggles of Belitung village children who are
    trying to stay able to go to school, even though it is full of struggles against the inevitability and all the
    turmoil of other feelings, which can make sad and touched.

    Even though this book contains a collection of many books, it does not diminish your reading experience in
    following the storyline.
    More curious about this book? Please visit
    www.sinaumedia.com to propose this book by Andrea Hirata.

    That’s a brief review of mosaics, Sinaumed’s. Have fun creating works of art. Always
    remember, sinaumedia will accompany you with quality readings that can be found at
    sinaumedia.com so that you can #MoreWithReading.

    It turns out that you don’t always have to use new materials to make mosaics, you know, Sinaumed’s. You can
    also use existing materials, including those that have been thrown away.
    Wouldn’t it be
    interesting if it could become a new and valuable work?

  • Morning Day Night Diet Menu

    Day and Night Diet Menu – Everyone wants a healthy body with ideal body posture.
    This of course can be realized in various ways, one of which is by going on a diet.

    Through this diet program, it is believed that we can lose weight by adjusting our diet to be healthier.
    The success of the diet is not only in the way we manage our diet, but also must be balanced with
    exercise.

    In managing the diet should not be arbitrary. The types of food included in the morning and
    evening diet must contain balanced nutrition, from carbohydrates, vitamins, proteins, healthy fats, to
    minerals.

    When you’re on a diet, it doesn’t mean you eat small portions right away. However, we still
    eat as usual with a menu that is not excessive.
    In this morning and evening diet, there are
    prearranged meal times, namely

    • Breakfast (06.00 – 08.00)
    • Morning snack (09.30 – 10.00)
    • Lunch (12.00 – 14.00)
    • Afternoon snack (16.00 – 17.00)
    • Dinner (18.00 – 19.00)

    Then, what are the recommendations for the morning and evening diet menu? Come on, look
    at the following reviews so that
    Sinaumed’s can follow the example for dieting
    activities!

    Morning Day and Night Diet Menu Recommendations

    First day

    Breakfast

    (06.00 – 08.00)

    • Two slices of whole wheat toast with butter
    • Tea or coffee with sugar. It’s best not to add milk.
    Morning snack

    (09.30 – 10.00)

    An apple
    Have lunch

    (12.00 – 14.00)

    • Grilled chicken breast with butter or olive oil
    • Boiled vegetables (can be carrots, corn, and broccoli)
    • Glass of water
    Afternoon snack

    (16.00 – 17.00)

    An apple
    Dinner

    (18.00 – 19.00)

    • Lean beef steak
    • Mashed potatoes (mashed potatoes)
    • Glass of water

    The second day

    Breakfast

    (06.00 – 08.00)

    • A glass of low fat milk
    • One banana
    • Glass of water
    Morning snack

    (09.30 – 10.00)

    1 medium piece of papaya fruit
    Have lunch

    (12.00 – 14.00)

    • Vegetable salad with macaroni cooked in olive oil or low-fat oil
    • Glass of water
    Afternoon snack

    (16.00 – 17.00)

    1 banana
    Dinner

    (18.00 – 19.00)

    • Skinless boiled chicken breast
    • Boiled vegetables (can be carrots, corn, or broccoli)
    • Glass of water

    The third day

    Breakfast

    (06.00 – 08.00)

    • Boiled eggs added with cheese
    • Glass of water
    Morning snack

    (09.30 – 10.00)

    Fruit juices without added sugar
    Have lunch

    (12.00 – 14.00)

    • Red rice
    • Pepes fish
    • Boiled tofu or tempeh
    • Glass of water
    Afternoon snack

    (16.00 – 17.00)

    1 apple
    Dinner

    (18.00 – 19.00)

    • Vegetable and mushroom salad cooked in olive oil or low-fat oil (chicken breast or prawns
      can be added)
    • Glass of water

    The fourth day

    Breakfast

    (06.00 – 08.00)

    • 2 slices of whole wheat bread with jam
    • Fruit salad
    • A glass of low fat milk
    Morning snack

    (09.30 – 10.00)

    1 apple
    Have lunch

    (12.00 – 14.00)

    • 6 tablespoons of rice
    • A bowl of vegetables
    • 1 piece of skinless grilled chicken
    Afternoon snack

    (16.00 – 17.00)

    Fruit salad
    Dinner

    (18.00 – 19.00)

    • Steamed chicken
    • Mashed potatoes (mashed potatoes)
    • Glass of water

    Fifth day

    Breakfast

    (06.00 – 08.00)

    • Vegetable omelette (2 egg whites with 1 yolk. vegetables can be tomatoes)
    • A glass of green tea without sugar
    Morning snack

    (09.30 – 10.00)

    Fruit juice without added sugar
    Have lunch

    (12.00 – 14.00)

    • A portion of gado-gado without lontong (more boiled vegetables)
    • Glass of water
    Afternoon snack

    (16.00 – 17.00)

    Fruit salad
    Dinner

    (18.00 – 19.00)

    • Vegetable salad
    • Mashed potatoes (mashed potatoes)
    • Glass of water

    Sixth Day

    Breakfast

    (06.00 – 08.00)

    • 2 scrambled eggs
    • Cutlets
    • A glass of green tea without sugar
    Morning snack

    (09.30 – 10.00)

    3 pieces of pineapple
    Have lunch

    (12.00 – 14.00)

    • 4 tablespoons of brown rice
    • Grilled fish
    • fresh vegetables
    • Glass of water
    Afternoon snack

    (16.00 – 17.00)

    Fruit salad
    Dinner

    (18.00 – 19.00)

    • Vegetable and mushroom salad cooked in olive oil or low-fat oil (chicken breast or prawns
      can be added)
    • Glass of water

    Seventh day

    Breakfast

    (06.00 – 08.00)

    • 2 whole wheat toast with jam
    • A glass of low fat milk
    Morning snack

    (09.30 – 10.00)

    A glass of red guava juice
    Have lunch

    (12.00 – 14.00)

    • 4 tablespoons of brown rice
    • Boiled chicken breast
    • Glass of water
    Afternoon snack

    (16.00 – 17.00)

    Fruit salad
    Dinner

    (18.00 – 19.00)

    • Boiled vegetables
    • A glass of low fat milk

    Nutritional Content in the Morning Afternoon
    and Evening Diet Menu

    In the morning and evening diet menu, even though the portion is relatively small, it must still contain
    balanced nutrition for the body.
    The nutritional content is carbohydrates, protein, minerals,
    vitamins, and healthy fats.

    1. Carbohydrates

    The content of carbohydrates will always be needed by the body because it functions as a source of energy.
    Even so, in this morning and evening diet, you only need to reduce the amount of carbohydrates that
    enter our bodies.

    a. Rice

    Eating rice is important for health. However, in this diet program, you can replace it with
    brown rice.
    Why does it have to be brown rice? Because red rice has a lower
    calorie content, but is rich in vitamins and minerals which are good for weight loss.

    b. Bananas

    Bananas are one of the fruits that contain carbohydrates. Apart from bananas, there are also
    dates, mangoes, oranges, and beets that you can make recommendations if you are bored with bananas.

    c. Boiled potato

    Another way to enjoy carbohydrates is to eat boiled potatoes. Boiled potatoes have been used
    as a dietary food recommendation by health experts.
    This is because boiled potatoes contain
    vitamins and minerals, especially potassium, B vitamins to vitamin C.

    In fact, in 100 grams of boiled potatoes it has about 87 calories! Therefore, boiled potatoes
    are suitable as food for the diet because they have high fiber content and are low in fat.

    d. Sweet potato

    Don’t think that sweet potatoes are an ancient food. In fact, sweet potatoes have a lot of
    carbohydrate content and can be an option to replace rice.
    Various types of sweet potatoes are
    suitable
    for consumption in diet programs, especially purple sweet potatoes and sweet
    potatoes.

    Sweet potatoes are said to have low calories, so don’t hesitate to make sweet potatoes one of your diet menus!

    e. Wheat bread

    In the previous diet menu recommendations, there is a breakfast menu in the form of 2 slices of whole wheat
    bread.
    This is because two slices of wheat bread contain about 190 calories. In
    contrast to two slices of plain white bread which contains about 200 calories.

    Apart from that, wheat bread has ingredients that are beneficial to the body such as fiber, vitamin K, and
    anti-oxidants which can function to reduce stroke triggers.

    By making whole wheat bread a part of the diet menu at breakfast or lunch, it will make your stomach feel full so
    you don’t constantly want to eat again.

    2. Protein and Fat

    In order for your body to stay healthy, you don’t only need carbohydrates, but you also have to eat foods
    that contain protein and fat.
    In this case, you need an energy source in the form of side
    dishes so that your diet program is successful.

    a. Steamed Tofu and Tempeh

    Tofu and tempeh are types of side dishes that are easy to find at low prices. Even though it’s
    cheap, the protein content in tofu and tempeh is no less high than meat,
    you know…

    Tofu contains low calories so it is suitable for those of you who want to run a low calorie diet program.
    However, tofu and tempeh are not suitable for those who are on the DEBM diet because the protein
    must be of animal origin, such as meat.

    b. Boiled eggs

    Eggs are considered to have many health benefits, therefore in the recommendation for the morning and evening
    diet menu the night before, there is a boiled egg menu for breakfast.

    This means that eggs contain high nutrition and low calories and amino acids which function to facilitate
    our body’s metabolic system.
    From the low calories that boiled eggs have, this can be a simple
    way to lose weight.

    c. Boiled or Steamed Chicken Breast

    Besides having an affordable price, chicken breast also contains high protein. However, in
    order to consume this chicken breast, it must be prepared by boiling or steaming,
    right… of
    course without the skin.

    d. Fish

    Sinaumed’s must have known that fish contains good nutrition for the body. Therefore, fish can be
    a recommendation in your diet menu.
    However, to process this fish, you can’t mix it with oil
    and limit the use of sugar and salt, ok?

    Fish is suitable to be used as a diet menu if it is processed by burning, boiling, or pepes.
    Don’t eat fried fish if you want your diet to be successful, because fried fish contains a lot of
    oil.

    3. Vitamins

    The content of vitamins is also a complement to the diet menu, you know…

    Foods that contain this vitamin can be vegetables and fruits. Vegetables contain lots of
    nutrients and are low in calories, so they are suitable for your diet menu.

    a. Urap

    Did Sinaumed’s know about vegetables that are processed with ointment? This food is
    in the form of boiled vegetables and mixed with grated coconut sauce.
    This ointment preparation
    can be a diet menu option because it contains boiled vegetables so it is good for the body.

    b. Soup

    For Sinaumed’s who want to process vegetables in a fast and simple way, they can choose this vegetable soup.
    However, for a diet menu, it’s best if the vegetable soup doesn’t need to be put in broth, right?
    Just add enough salt to taste.

    c. Vegetable Salad

    Vegetable salad is a contemporary and practical way of preparing vegetables. Salads generally
    contain a mixture of mayonnaise and cheese, for this vegetable salad you shouldn’t …

    You can process it by boiling vegetables and then mixing it with olive oil to make it taste better, so you will
    like it when you eat it!

    So, those are the recommendations for the morning and evening diet menu along with the
    nutritional content that must be contained in the food menu.
    Sinaumed’s can create your own style
    of menu variation with a dose that is not excessive
    . In carrying out this diet program, you
    also have to continue to exercise regularly
    so that you get maximum results.

  • Morning call to prayer, Arabic, Latin and their meanings, complete with how to determine the time

    Reading the Morning Adhan – The companions of the Prophet in his time often gathered in the mosque to wait for the prayer time to come. However, because of the distance and busyness, the markers for prayer times were proposed by his friends. Some suggest using a bell, sounding a trumpet, or lighting a fire.

    For this reason, the Prophet Muhammad informed his revelation regarding the call to prayer. By order of the Prophet, Bilal bin Rabbah became a muezzin. Bilal was chosen because he has a loud and melodious voice. So since then, the call to prayer has become a marker of prayer for Muslims.

    Meaning of Adhan

    In language, the call to prayer means notification or call. As Allah has said in the letter At Tawbah Verse 3:

     وَأَذَانٌ مِنَ اللَّهِ وَرَسُولِهِ إِلَى النَّاسِ

    Meaning: “and this is a call from Allah and His Messenger to mankind”

    There is a meaning of the call to prayer in terms of a call or invitation that marks the entry of the five daily prayer hours and is pronounced with certain words and readings.

     

    You can learn about the Miracle of Carambola Antioxidants
    by the Editors of Health Secret

    Azan law

    Scholars have many disagreements about the law of the call to prayer. Most of the scholars say that the law on the call to prayer is sunnah muakkad, but another opinion that is stronger on this issue is the opinion that the law on the call to prayer is fardu kifayah. But keep in mind, this law only applies to men. Women are neither obligated nor sunnah to carry out the call to prayer.

     

    Adhan terms

    The following are the conditions for making the call to prayer, the conditions are:

    1. Has Entered Prayer Times

    The valid condition for the call to prayer is when the time for prayer begins, so that the call to prayer made before the time for prayer starts is invalid. However, there are exceptions for the dawn call to prayer. The morning call to prayer is only permitted to be carried out twice, namely before dawn arrives and when dawn arrives which is when the sadiq dawn rises.

    2. Intend to call to prayer

    For someone who is going to call to prayer, it is necessary to intend first in his heart (not with a certain lafazh), that he will carry out the call to prayer with a sincere feeling for Allah alone.

    3. Pronounced using Arabic

    According to some scholars, it is invalid for a call to prayer to use a language other than using Arabic. Among the scholars there are those who think so, namely scholars from Hambali, Hanafiah, and Shafi’i schools.

    4. There is no mention in the pronunciation of the call to prayer that changes the meaning

    The point is that the call to prayer should be free from pronunciation errors which in this case can change the meaning and meaning of the call to prayer. The adzan lafadz-lafadz must be pronounced clearly and correctly.

    5. The lafadz are pronounced in order

    The lafadz-lafadz adhan should be pronounced according to the sequence as explained in the authentic hadiths. As for how the order will be discussed below.

    6. The lafadz are pronounced in succession

    The point is that with the recitation of the call to prayer that exists one with another, it can be said in succession and not separated by a word or an action outside the order in which the call to prayer is performed. However, it is still permissible to say or do something light in nature, such as sneezing.

    7. The call to prayer is heard for people who are not at the muezzin’s place

    The call to prayer echoed by the muezzin must be heard by people who are not at the muezzin’s place when giving the call to prayer. This can be done by raising the volume or using a loudspeaker.

    How to Determine the Time of Fajr Adhan

    So what is the right way to determine the time of the dawn call to prayer?

    Based on the explanation from  the Ministry of Religion of the Republic of Indonesia,  the determination of the time for the dawn call to prayer is carried out based on the paradigm of the dawn to occur. More specifically, fingerprint dawn occurs when the sun is at an altitude of -20° or around 3.52 in the morning. Meanwhile, the Tarjih Council assessed the point at -18° or 4.00.

    The Ministry of Religion claims that the time for determining the dawn call to prayer which they explained is clear. In determining the time for the dawn call to prayer, the Ministry of Religion of the Republic of Indonesia was supported by experts from BMKG, LAPAN, PBNU, PERSIS, BIG, Islamic universities throughout Indonesia, PUI, and Al-Irsyad.

    Even so, the timing of the dawn call to prayer could be less or more, this is due to the movement of the earth and also the sun.

    While the determination of the time for the dawn call to prayer still leaves little room for debate, the determination of the final time for dawn is relatively simpler, namely at sunrise. As mentioned in the following hadith.

    God bless you

    Meaning: From Abdullah bin Umar radhiyallahuanhu that Rasulullah SAW said, “And the time for the dawn prayer is from the rising of dawn (sadiq) until before the rising of the sun.” ( HR . Muslim )

    The nature of a muezzin

    There are several things that must be considered to become a muezzin, which are as follows:

    1. Muslims

    It is required that to become a muezzin a Muslim is required. The call to prayer is not valid if it comes from a non-believer.

    2. Sincere only hope for the face of Allah

    It is fitting for a muezzin to make the call to prayer with sincere intentions and hope for the face of Allah. Rasulullah shallallahu ‘alaihi wa sallam said: “Stipulate a muezzin not to take the wages of the call to prayer.”

    3. Fair and trustworthy

    The point is that a muezzin should be fair and trustworthy at prayer times.

    4. Has a good voice

    The Prophet sallallaahu ‘alaihi wa sallam once said to his friend, Abdullah bin Zaid: “go and teach what you see (in a dream) to Bilal, because he has a better voice than yours”

    5. Knowing when prayer time comes

    It is desirable for a muezzin to know when the prayer time will come so that he can call the call to prayer at the start of the time and avoid mistakes.

     

    You can learn about Peeling Complete Adhan and Iqamat
    by Yusni A Ghazali, Yusni A. Ghazali

    Lafadz Reading the Morning Azan

    Azan is a call for Muslims to notify when the obligatory prayer is entered by a muezzin every five daily prayers. When the sound of the call to prayer is heard, it is sunnah to answer the call to prayer. In accordance with what has been said by the muezzin, unless the muezzin says: “Hayya alash-sholah”, “Hayya alal-falah”, and “Assalatu khairum minan-naum” (in the morning call to prayer).

    When the muezzin says “Hayya alash-shalah” or “Hayya alal-falah”, it is sunnah for us to answer it with the pronunciation “La haula wa la quwwata illa billahil ‘aliyyil ‘azhim” which means “There is no power and no strength except with Allah’s help” .

    When a muezzin says “Assalatu khairum minan-naum” in the dawn call to prayer, it is sunnah by answering with the pronunciation “Shadaqta wa bararta wa ana ‘ala dzalika minasy shahidin” which means “You are right and your words are good and I am one of those who have witnessed the truth.”

    And below is the complete recitation of the morning call to prayer in Arabic, Latin and the meaning of Indonesian.

    Lafadz reading the morning call to prayer

     

    Allah

    Allahu Akbar, Allahu Akbar, Allahu Akbar, Allahu Akbar

    Meaning: Allah is the Greatest, Allah is the Greatest

     

    أَشْهَدُ اَنْ لاَ اِلَهَ إِلاَّاللهُ ، أَشْهَدُ اَنْ لاَ اِلَهَ إِلاَّاللهُ

    Ashhadu La Ilaha Illallah, Ashhadu La Ilaha Illallah

    Meaning: I testify that there is no god but Allah, and I testify that there is no god but Allah

     

    O Allah

    Ash Dudunamuhammadarosuulullah, Ash Dudunamuhammadarosuulullah

    Meaning: I bear witness that Muhammad is the Messenger of Allah, I testify that Muhammad is the Messenger of Allah

     

    حَيَّ عَلَى الصَّلاَةِ ، حَيَّ عَلَى الصَّلاَةِ

    Hayya is lazy, Hayya is lazy

    Meaning: Come on, let’s pray

     

    حَيَّ عَلَى الْفَلاَحِ ، حَيَّ عَلَى الْفَلاَحِ

    Hayya alphalah, Hayya alphalah

    Meaning: Come to victory, Come to victory

     

    ???

    Assolatuhoiruminannaum, Assolatuhoiruminannaum

    Meaning: Prayer is better than sleeping, Prayer is better than sleeping

     

    Allah

    Allahu Akbar, Allahu Akbar la ilaha illallah

    Meaning: Allah is the Greatest, Allah is the Greatest, There is no god but Allah

     

    The way to answer the call to prayer is to answer the same lafadz as what has been mentioned in the sentence reading the call to prayer except for the call to prayer which reads “Hayya ‘alal falah” and “Hayya ‘alal falah”, then the way to answer it is by reading:

     

    لاحول ولاقوّة الاّ بالله

     

    “Laa haula walaa quwwata illa billahi.”

    Meaning: There is no effort and strength, except with the help of Allah.

     

    However, when we have heard the voice at the dawn call to prayer, then by answering the dawn call to prayer when the muezzin recites the sentence:

     

    الصّلاة خير من النّو

    “As shalaatu khairum minan naum.” 2x

     

    So, those of us who heard it answered with the following reading:

     

    صدقت وبررت وانا على ذلك من الشّاهدين

     

    “Shadaqta wabararta wa anaa ‘alaa dzaalika minasy syaahidiina.”

    Meaning: it is also true that what you say is good and I am also for that, including those who witnessed it.

     

    When the sound of iqamah is echoed by a muezzin, it is sunnah for us to answer the iqamah with the sentences that have been heard answered exactly the same as those said by a muezzin, except for the sentence:

     

    “Qad Qamatis Wrong”, then answered with reading or lafadz as follows:

     

    أقامها الله وأدامها وجعلني من صالحي أهلها

     

    “Aqaamahallahu wa adamaha ja’alna min shaalihi AKH.”

    Meaning: “May Allah will establish the prayer eternally, and may Allah make me one of the best people to pray.”

     

    Then, after hearing the sound of iqamah, we answer it by reading a prayer after iqamah, which is as follows:

    الّلهمّ ربّ هذه الدّعوة التّامّة والصّلاة القائمة صلّ وسلّم على سيّدنا محمّد وآته سؤله يوم القيامة

    Allaahumma rabba hadzihid da’watit taammati wash-shalaatil qaa-imati, shalli wasallim ‘alaa sayyidinaa muhammadin, wa aatihi su’lahu yaumal qiyaamati.

    Meaning: “O Allah, who has the most perfect calling, and has upheld prayers, pour out all the grace of greetings on our lord the Prophet Muhammad, and grant all his requests on the last day.”

    • Understanding Fasting: Types, Terms, Pillars, and Conditions
    • Prayers Ask for Matchmaking and Practice to Accelerate Matchmaking
    • Types of Compulsory Fasting: Definition, Intentions, Time and Conditions
    • 10 Benefits of Reading Al-Quran, Lots of Fadhilah!
    • Prayers Before and After Studying with Adab and Benefits

     

    You can learn about the Mystery of the Fajr Prayer
    by Badrul Munir

  • Moral Hazard: Definition, History, Ways to Overcome, and Impact

    Moral hazard is an action that often occurs in a company. The initial use of
    the term itself had a negative connotation, implying fraud
    or immoral behavior.

    A number of bankers then proposed that the credit restructuring period affected by Covid-19 could be
    extended again for at least one year.
    The current economic pressures have left concerns for
    the debtor’s performance prospects.

    Until now, the Financial Services Authority (OJK) is currently studying this possibility. In
    fact, a number of observers have also asked banks to be aware of the potential moral hazard from debtors if
    the credit restructuring period affected by Covid-19 is extended again.

    What is meant by moral hazard? What are the causes and effects of moral hazard?
    How to overcome and prevent moral hazard? You can find all these questions in this
    article, Sinaumed’s.

    Definition of Moral Hazard

    Moral hazard is a risk that a party has not signed a contract in good faith or has provided misleading
    information regarding assets, liabilities or regarding their credit capacity.
    Kotowitz in
    The New Palgrave Dictionary of Economics then states that moral hazard is the
    action of agents in maximizing their utility by previously sacrificing others and in situations where they
    do not bear all the consequences or do not fully enjoy the benefits of these actions.

    Moral hazard itself is often used in terms of the insurance business. Moral hazard is the
    possibility that the insurer deliberately takes actions that can harm the insured goods in the hope of
    getting a replacement claim from the insurance company.
    The word moral hazard itself is then
    often used in a banking perspective which refers to the behavior of interested parties
    (stakeholders) .

    Paul Krugman himself stated that the concept of moral hazard has been widely used in explaining various behaviors
    of debtors (borrowers) and lenders (creditors/banks) who dared to take high risks during the financial
    crisis that occurred in Southeast Asia in 1997-1998.

    Luiz A. Pereira, Silva & Masaru Yoshitomi stated that moral hazard is a behavior of interested parties
    (stakeholders) , for example the bank (shareholders and management) or banking debtors which then creates
    incentives to have hidden agendas and actions that are contrary to business ethics and laws that apply to
    his advantage.

    These interested parties are on behalf of the corporation, or for the benefit of the corporation, based on a work
    relationship or based on other relationships, within the scope of corporate business, either individually or
    jointly.

    History of Moral Hazards

    The term moral hazard itself originated in the 17th century and was widely used by British insurance
    companies in the late 19th century by Dembe and Boden.
    The concept of moral hazard was the
    subject of new research by economists in the 1960s and later implied immoral or fraudulent behavior.

    Economists use the term moral hazard to describe the inefficiencies that can occur when risks are
    transferred or cannot be fully evaluated, rather than descriptions of the ethics or morals of the parties
    involved.
    Until now, moral hazard is often identified with a behavior in the form of fraud
    committed by individuals or groups.
    The fraud tends to lead to the economic sector, such as
    insurance, banking, and the like.

    How to Overcome Moral Hazard

    Basically, moral hazard can be overcome. The following are ways to overcome moral hazard cited
    from various sources:

    Build Motivation or Incentives

    This can be seen in insurance, to avoid moral hazard, insurance companies will design contracts to provide
    incentives for customers to insure a product.
    They also will not insure the full amount, where
    there is also a process for paying the first down payment of an insurance claim.
    Insurance
    companies will also complicate the process of obtaining money, so insurance users will be more reluctant to
    file claims.

    Punishing Bad Behavior

    The government can then provide bank guarantees and punish those responsible for making reckless decisions,
    such as in performance-paying decisions on the part of individuals.
    That means, in order to
    avoid moral hazard in the labor market, some form of performance evaluation is carried out and there is no
    guarantee of lifetime employment.

    In simple terms, giving punishment to those who intend to commit moral hazard. That way, moral
    hazard actions can be handled optimally.

    Preventing Moral Hazard in Banking

    Taswin Ibrahim and Ragimun in a journal entitled Moral Hazard and its Prevention in the Banking Industry in
    Indonesia then wrote about efforts to prevent moral hazard, namely

    1. Strengthening the regulation on the implementation of risk-based guarantee premiums.
    2. There needs to be restrictions on bank ownership.
    3. Discipline levy so that the market can be carried out through transparency of information and reduction of
      deposit guarantee values.
    4. Implementation of risk-based management or supervision.

    The application of risk management in banking itself needs to comply with the principles of:

    1. Transparency, or a
    Risk Management Policy that Must Be Transparent

    By doing so, all potential risks must be disclosed openly. This hidden risk will then become a
    source of big problems in the future.

    2. Appropriate Assessment

    The point is that it must be based on an accurate assessment methodology. The
    company then needs to make continuous investments to be able to develop various concepts, methodologies, and
    tools and techniques continuously to then build strong risk management.

    3. Quality and timely information

    This needs to be done because it will support assessment accuracy and quality measurements for decision making.

    4. Diversification

    By doing this, the dangerous risk for the bank can be overcome.

    5. Independence

    The point is that risk management must be based on independence in a relationship between each unit in the
    organization.

    6. Disciplined Decision Patterns

    The point is that no matter how good the concepts, methodologies and tools and techniques are used, the
    quality of decisions at risk depends on how management decides the best way to use the available concepts,
    methodologies, tools and techniques.
    Therefore, the decision-making process must then refer to
    a standard pattern followed by high discipline.

    7. Determination of Banking Risk Limits and
    Tolerances

    Setting limits will then provide maximum certainty in taking risks and narrowing down opportunities to commit
    moral hazard.

    8. Implementation of Internal Control on
    Every Transaction

    With proper control of each transaction, moral hazard can be prevented.

    Moral Hazard Causes and Impact

    Moral hazard in banking can occur due to weaknesses in regulations and legislation, ownership structure factors,
    aspects of deposit insurance and credit lending aspects, as well as weakened market discipline.

    Therefore, good and stable regulations should be found or created, be able to regulate properly, not lead to a
    concentration of economic power, then have the flexibility to grow the banking industry, and have the ability to
    distinguish which banks are healthy and which are not.

    The following below are the factors that cause moral hazard:

    1. Low income: It is believed that the reason why individuals will later participate in moral hazard is due to
      lack of income or sufficient resources to control future costs.
    2. Lack of personal or moral values
    3. Lack of personal values ​​that uphold honesty is sometimes a factor that encourages someone to do moral
      hazard.
    4. Information discrepancies between principals and agents which then lead to what is commonly referred to as a
      conflict of interest where each party then tries its best to maximize the benefits of the other.

    Impact of Moral Hazard

    Moral hazard also refers to a situation that then arises when an individual has the opportunity to take
    advantage of various financial agreements or situations, knowing that all risks and impacts will then fall
    on other parties.
    This means that one party is open to options – and therefore tempted – to
    take advantage of the other party.

    The second party itself as the party that bears all the consequences of every risk that is then taken in a
    moral hazard situation, allows the first party to be free to do whatever they want, without fear of
    responsibility.
    They are able to ignore all moral implications and act in the way that is most
    beneficial to them.
    The impact of moral hazard includes:

    1. Cost overruns

    Expense overruns that are not in accordance with the budget Individuals who bear the burden of risk will spend
    more than budgeted for the same risk due to moral hazard.

    2. Conflicts of Interest and Legal Cases

    Moral hazard also results in conflicts of interest and legal cases when both parties later become aware of
    various missing information.

    3. Triggering Corruption

    One of the main impacts of moral hazard is corruption. Individuals who are willing to maximize
    their profits from activities that don’t cost a penny.

    Moral Hazards and Their
    Prevention in the Banking Industry in Indonesia

    The banking industry is a unique industry when compared to other industries. In this case,
    other industries, such as profit-oriented industries, this industry also carries out its supervisory role or
    monitors debtors, on the other hand this industry is also monitored by depositors, including regulators and
    deposit insurance agencies. .

    Depositors do not directly monitor the use of funds which are then placed with debtors, but banking
    institutions that monitor debtors have a role as a mandate for depositors or depositors of funds at the
    bank.
    This monitoring or control will work properly when they have aligned interests.

    If there is no alignment of incentives and interests between them, a conflict of interest will occur.
    In fact, it will complicate various monitoring functions, whereby shareholders can then take high
    risks at the expense of other shareholders, depositors, and deposit insurance institutions.

    Therefore, the role of regulation regarding moral hazard is managed properly and wisely. This
    needs to be done because it really functions as a public representation related to monitoring in the banking
    industry.

    The case of the burglary of Citibank customer funds which was then carried out by certain individuals either on
    their own behalf or on certain conspiracies is a clear example of moral hazard in the banking world in
    Indonesia.

    Related Books

    Managing Banking Service Quality

    Excellent service is closely related to banking business services. This is important to
    provide a sense of satisfaction and foster trust in customers so that they feel that they are being cared
    for or cared for properly and correctly as they should.
    One of the competency certification
    programs in the banking sector in Indonesia that is still very much needed in the banking industry is
    funding and services .

    This Funding and Services module is a continuation of the previously published modules. This
    module is a minimum reference that must be owned by prospective
    tellers , or customer
    service , or bank funding o cers . The main source of this module is from
    SKKNI (Indonesian National Work Competency Standards), various modules or training materials implemented
    by various banks, as well as existing practices in the Indonesian banking industry.
    By
    mastering this module, prospective participants will have the minimum ability to become
    a
    teller , customer service and bank funding officer.

    Banking Law Responsibilities of Shareholders

    In the implementation of shareholder responsibility based on the principle of Piercing the Corporate
    Veil in the context of banking law in Indonesia, there are still weaknesses related to juridical and
    sociological aspects.
    As a result, the legal responsibility of bank shareholders cannot be
    fully prosecuted as it should be.
    Especially when it is related to the clause in Law Number
    40 of 2007 concerning Banking, which simultaneously accommodates
    the doctrine of separate
    legal personality of a company and piercing the corporate veil , so that in certain
    circumstances the legal responsibilities of shareholders have limitations and even do not apply.

    Automatically, when the bank company is unable to fulfill its obligations, the shareholders are only
    responsible for the amount of capital included.
    This book seeks to discuss and examine these
    issues through legal approaches and comparisons as well as examples of national and international banking
    cases.

    Banking Accounting Edition 3
    Transactions in Rupiah Currency

    Transparency of bank financial reports is a necessity for every party with an interest in banking matters.
    Bank Indonesia as the monetary authority has responded to this through regulatory changes related
    to the financial information of a bank.
    This book has integrated banking regulations, concepts
    and banking accounting standards.

    In addition to discussing and presenting in full both the concepts of bank accounting, product accounting,
    deposit insurance and bank services as well as the preparation of branch and joint financial reports,
    examples and cases are also given that are easy to understand.
    Thus this book deserves to be
    owned and becomes one of the references for students, academics, banking practitioners, as well as parties
    interested in this field and concerned with the development of banking in Indonesia.

    Financial Services
    Marketing: Targeting Indonesian Banking Consumers

    This book describes in detail the development of Indonesia’s financial services sector, which has been up
    and down since the colonial period to the present.
    The following discussion focuses on
    consumers, because consumers play an important role in the development of a financial service provider.
    In this discussion about consumers, readers can see the problems that often occur in the Indonesian
    financial services sector.

    The writing of this book uses a combination of academic and popular approaches, by presenting the results of
    empirical research and the practice of marketing financial products in the banking world.

    Banking Accounting Theory and Application

    This book is prepared based on the 2016 Curriculum Standards which place students more as owners of
    theoretical and practical or technical abilities.
    This book is also equipped with a summary to
    make it easier to use and practice questions to test students’ understanding of the material contained in
    the book.
    In this book, the theory and application of Banking Accounting will discuss
    “basic material for banking and practice of accounting records in the banking
    sector”
    .

    Closing

    Moral hazard is an action that should not be taken because it can harm other people or can
    even bankrupt a company.
    Therefore, we do our best to prevent moral hazard from occurring, so
    that criminal acts of corruption can be avoided.
    This is a review of Moral Hazard, starting
    from its definition, history, steps to overcome it, its causes and effects.
    Hope it is
    useful!

    Talking about banking, actually it’s not just about law, but also talking about banking. If
    you want to find books about banking, you can get them at
    sinaumedia.com .
    To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so
    that Sinaumed’s has
    #MoreWithReading information .

  • Monopolistic Market: Definition, Characteristics, and Examples

    Monopolistic Market – Monopolistic competition market is a type of imperfect competition market. This monopolistic market system was developed due to the lack of satisfaction in the analysis of the perfect market competition model or monopoly market. However, if we look at it from a monopolistic market structure, the system is closer to a perfectly competitive market. However, producers will participate more in this type of market to produce a product that is different and has its own characteristics.

    A monopolistic market is a market that has many consumers who can produce a different commodity. This type of market is also often referred to as a market that has many sellers who only offer one type of product but with different quality, shape and product size. In a monopolistic market, consumers will feel a difference from the characteristics of each product offered by one producer with other producers.

    With the difference in each product offered, it will reflect the real difference between the products to be purchased. But it is also possible that the difference that is created is only the perception of each consumer. Where the products offered by various manufacturers in the market are indeed different. For example, we can see the difference in a product from its packaging or physical form. Starting from differences in shape, size, function, and also product quality. In addition, we can see the differences between each product from the brand, logo, and also the packaging.

    Then to see more clearly regarding product differences, we can look at the product sales credit period, ease of access, commodity availability, location to get community, after sales service, and so on. As for examples of products sold in monopolistic markets that we can encounter in everyday life, namely cosmetics, clothing, medicines, places to eat, and many more.

    Definition of Monopolistic Market

    In a monopolistic market, there are many sellers offering homogeneous or similar merchandise. But the products sold are distinguished by their quality, shape, and size, and all existing sellers must compete optimally. Products sold in this market have different qualities, prices and sizes even in one type of product. Fixed price determination will usually be determined directly by the seller. So it does not use market mechanisms.

    A monopolistic market is basically a market that exists between two extreme types of markets, namely perfect competition markets and monopoly markets. Therefore, each of these types of markets contains elements or characteristics derived from monopoly competition markets and perfect competition markets. In other words, a monopolistic competition market can be interpreted as a market which has many sellers or producers who produce a variety of products.

    Characteristics of a Monopolistic Market

    The following are some of the characteristics of a monopolistic market that you need to understand:

    1. Having a very large number of producers or sellers

    There are many producers in a monopolistic market. So that each seller or producer must be satisfied with a relatively small market share or market share. Not only that, sellers in a monopolistic market do not have full power to determine prices in the market.

    This is related to the number of sellers who are quite a lot. So that various difficulties arise related to coordination between producers or sellers. So price collusion is almost impossible. Every business owner must always actively seek their own target market.

    2. Product Differentiation

    The product differentiation referred to here is a similar product having different characteristics. We can see the difference from the shape, size, pattern, quality, and others. Each manufacturer will give characteristics and a special touch to the products they produce. Like apparel manufacturers and also sports equipment such as Nike, Adidas, Fila, Skechers, and also Puma have similar products. Where all these companies issue the same type of shoes. But the products they produce have their own characteristics and characteristics.

    Therefore, every company or producer cannot arbitrarily determine market prices, be it lowering or increasing prices. If one producer tries to undermine the market price, other producers will automatically follow suit. However, producers still cannot increase product prices. This is because if someone is determined to raise their price but their competitors maintain their previous price, then the company will incur a loss.

    3. Manufacturer Competition Not Based on Price

    In a monopolistic competition market, producers or sellers tend not to be able to play with prices in the market. Unless there is a consensus that is carried out simultaneously with other manufacturers. Therefore, the competition that occurs in this market system is more directed to the design, quality, marketing, and advantages of each product.

    Even if someone wants to play with the price, for example there are manufacturers who want to set high prices for the products they offer, then these producers must be able to convince consumers regarding the quality and also the advantages of these products compared to similar products owned by competitors.

    4. Freedom for New Producers to Exit and Enter the Market

    All producers in this market system have the freedom to enter and leave the market. This is because the products they offer can be replaced by similar products from other manufacturers that still survive in the market. This certainly will not cause product scarcity and inconvenience consumers who want to find these products.

    Meanwhile for new producers, they do not need to have a large amount of capital to be able to join and compete for market share. Provided that the product offered has an affordable price and is of good quality and can be accounted for. That way, consumers in the market will accept the presence of the new producer.

    5. Development of Technology and Innovation

    Because there is intense competition and there are many competitors in it. So every producer or seller is required to be able to continue to provide innovation to the products they offer. This also causes technology to develop rapidly to keep up with the innovations desired by manufacturers.

    When a manufacturer innovates, it will bring more profit than the normal profit when using old products. With increased income or profits, it will be easier to attract other producers to carry out similar or better innovations. Therefore, the concept of innovation and technology will never end as long as there is intense competition between one manufacturer and another.

    Advantages In Monopolistic Competition Markets

    The demand graph that will be faced by producers in a monopolistic competition market is more elastic than in a monopoly market. However, the level of demand does not reach perfectly elastic properties like the demand curve in a perfectly competitive market. However, in a monopolistic competition market, you will get some advantages that you cannot get in other types of markets. Here is the full explanation:

    a. Maximizing Profits In The Short Term

    The demand that is faced by all producers in a monopolistic competitive market is the majority of which comes from the overall consumer or market demand. The maximum profit can be obtained if the producer continues to produce the goods provided until the level of MC equals MR is reached. In that case, the company or producer will earn profits above the average in a short period of time.

    b. Maximizing Long Term Profits

    The existence of profits that exceed the average limit will cause the development of producers in the market. So that every producer in the market must be prepared to face less demand at various price levels. So, the profit that will be obtained also decreases to normal levels.

    There Are Inefficiencies in Monopolistic Competition Markets

    There are two reasons why inefficiencies arise in this monopolistic competition market. The first is because the selling price is greater than the marginal cost. Then the second is excessive capacity. If the company experiences a minimum loss, then they will exit the market.

    So that the number of producers or sellers in the market will decrease and the number of requests obtained by producers who are still there will increase. With the exit of these producers from the market, it will continue until the producers get a normal profit.

    In this situation, there will be no more producers entering the market and no more companies leaving the market. That is what is called the long-run equilibrium of the company in a monopolistic competition market.

    Advantages and Disadvantages of Monopolistic Competition

    The following are some of the advantages and disadvantages of monopolistic competition markets that you need to understand.

    The advantages of Monopolistic Competition Market are:

    a. The number of companies in the market will provide distinct advantages for consumers in choosing the best goods or products for them.
    b. There is freedom to go in and out for the producers. So that it will encourage producers to always innovate in every product they offer.
    c. There is product differentiation that can encourage consumers to be more careful in choosing the product to be purchased and can make each consumer more selective about the product to be chosen.
    d. This market is relatively easy to find because most of our daily needs are in a monopolistic market.

    Disadvantages of a Monopolistic Market

    a. Monopolistic competition market has a fairly high level of competition, both in terms of price, quality and service. So that producers who do not have sufficient capital and experience, will leave the market more quickly.
    b. It takes a large enough capital to be able to enter the market. This is because the business owners in it have high economies of scale.
    c. This market can encourage various companies to always provide innovation. So that it will increase production costs which will impact on product prices that must be paid by consumers.

    Monopoly Market Factors

    The following are several factors that cause a monopoly market, including:

    1. Have Resources

    Source companies can monopolize the market because the ownership of unique and special resources is not owned by other companies. To trigger a monopoly economy, namely the existence of a powerful company, be it all of the raw materials that are available or most of them.

    2. Economies of Scale

    The company will get the maximum profit if the production level in the company is large enough. Because, when a company reaches a situation where production costs are minimum, the amount of production is almost equal to the demand in the market.

    This can have an impact on reducing product prices if production is higher and at high production levels as well. Then for the price to be made as low as possible, so that companies that have just joined will not be able to enter and compete with other companies that have developed first. That is what can trigger the emergence of a monopoly market.

    3. Monopoly Rights Revenue from the Government

    Regulations made by the government can also create monopoly power. For example regarding copyright regulations and also patents.

    Copyrights and patents are useful legal guarantees to prevent plagiarism. An effort to develop a type of technology to be able to create new products will provide benefits for the company itself. So that the technology is prohibited and the government gives sanctions or penalties to companies that commit plagiarism or plagiarism.

    Example of a Monopolistic Market

    The following are examples of monopolistic competition markets that are important to know:

    a. Cigarette factory

    Cigarette factories such as Djarum, Gudang Garam, Dji Sam Soe, and others, both produce cigarettes. But each company has its own characteristics. In fact, the price set by each company is also different. There is no standard that can determine that the price of these products must be the same or uniform.

    In addition, each company has the power to influence the market using its products. However, they cannot influence the overall market price or the prices set by their competitors. The other differences that we can see from all the examples of products from the manufacturers above are regarding the cigarette mix, the appearance of the packaging design, and also the flavor variants provided. Then, the number of cigarettes in the package also depends on each manufacturer.

    b. Motorcycle Factory

    Another example of monopolistic competition in Indonesia is the Honda or Yamaha motorcycle factory. Where Honda’s motorbikes are always considered more economical compared to other motorcycle brands. Meanwhile, the Yamaha output motorbike is considered to have superior power compared to other motorbikes.

    This is an example of a monopolistic competition market. Where the two brands both produce motorcycles. However, both have quite different characteristics.

    Thus the discussion of monopolistic markets along with their characteristics and examples. Where from the explanation above we can draw the conclusion that a monopolistic market is a market that is developed because there is no satisfaction in perfect competition markets and monopoly markets. In other words, a monopolistic market is a combination of perfect competition and monopoly markets.

    Book Recommendations & Related Articles

     

  • Monologue: Definition, Aspects, Characteristics, Types, and Recommended Books

    Monologue – Talking about performing arts, there are indeed many kinds, especially since every performing art always displays beauty every time it appears. Usually this performing arts is performed on an indoor stage or an outdoor stage. Apart from that, some performing arts are free to be exhibited by the public and some are paid.

    Performing arts that are held in this room are usually carried out in an arts theater building. However, there are also those that are carried out in a hotel room which has quite a large room. Meanwhile, performing arts held outdoors are usually carried out in a large area, such as a field or parking lot. Performing arts that are held indoors or outdoors certainly have their own pleasure when watching them.

    The performing arts themselves are usually played or performed by people who are experts in the performing arts. For example, singing shows will certainly be performed by someone who is good at singing, as well as other performances. Someone who is going to do a performance will definitely do some practice beforehand in order to be able to show the maximum appearance to the audience.

    Some prefer to watch performing arts alone, some prefer with friends or with family, and some prefer to watch shows with their loved ones. So, do you prefer to watch shows alone or accompanied by other people?

    Each performing arts certainly has its own uniqueness and characteristics. In addition, connoisseurs or observers of the performing arts also vary. One of the performing arts that many people like is theatrical art. When it comes to theatrical art, it is bound to be attached to drama and monologues. Even though these two things are in the theater arts, they are fundamentally different.

    On this occasion, we will discuss more about the art of performing monologues. It could be that after knowing what a monologue is, you will become more interested in participating in monologue performances. So, take a look at this review, it’s trash, Sinaumed’s.

    Definition of Monologue

    Monologue comes from the Greek word mono and legein. Mono means one while legein means to speak. So, a monologue is just one person speaking. As previously explained, this monologue is part of theatrical art. Therefore, monologue can be said as a role art that is performed alone.

    In short, monologue can be said as someone who speaks alone. Monologue means the study of acting. So, a monologue is a scene that is played by only one person. Apart from that, some monologues are only in the form of movements and some are combined with a script that has been made.

    The communication process that occurs in the monologue is carried out in stages where each stage is in the form of an event that is played out by himself so that he can present a story that can be understood by the audience. Therefore, some people say that doing a monologue must consist of an element of communication. This element must exist so that the monologue actor can convey the meaning of a story through acting performed by himself.

    In simple terms, it can be said that a monologue is a way to convey a message with just one speaker in a motion that is adapted to the contents of the statement. This is in line with the meaning of monologue based on the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), monologue is a play scene with a single actor who carries a conversation alone.

    Aspects of Assessment Monologue

    If you want to act out a monologue, you should pay attention to several aspects of the monologue. This needs to be done so that the meaning and message of the monologue can be conveyed while the audience feels amazed at the way the story is told. The following are aspects of monologue assessment, including:

    1. Theme Appropriateness

    The first aspect of conducting a monologue is the suitability of the theme. Every performing arts organization must have a predetermined theme. Therefore, the story to be conveyed by a monologue must be in accordance with a predetermined theme. For example, when you want to bring up the theme of independence, the story that is told must be related to independence, such as struggle.

    Monologues that match the theme make it easier for the audience to understand the storyline and take meaning from the monologue stage. So, don’t always remember to adjust the theme when you want to act out a monologue.

    2. Character Mastery

    The second aspect of the monologue is character mastery. As previously explained, monologue is part of acting, so you should master the role to be played. Therefore, monologue actors will practice for weeks or even months before doing monologue theater.

    In mastering this character, some are done independently and some are done with a mentor. Both of these are equally good and should be adapted to one’s own character and abilities.

    3. Mastery of the Stage

    Monologue is an art that is played or performed on stage, so that when playing it, the actor must dominate the stage. In this case, mastery of the stage can be interpreted as an actor who understands what direction he should move when acting out a monologue.

    4. Props and Costumes

    In the arts, acting cannot be separated from props and costumes. Both aspects must exist because they can support the storyline, so that the audience understands what story the monologue actor wants to convey. Usually, these props and costumes have been determined by the director of the monologue theatrical performance, so the monologue actor only needs to wear the costume.

    5. Decoration

    In addition to props and costumes, when staging a monologue, you must pay attention to the decoration aspect. That’s right, decoration must be given great attention because it has quite an important aspect because without decoration, a monologue performance will feel normal and will reduce the audience’s awe.

    There is already a team for the decoration itself, so that the monologue actors can focus on the movements and dialogue that will be brought on stage. This decoration must also be adjusted to a predetermined theme.

    6. Vocal or Intonation

    In staging a monologue, the actor will issue a dialogue that will form a story. Therefore, in playing a monologue, you must pay attention to aspects of vocals or intonation. This is because these two things can touch the audience’s feelings and it becomes easier to understand the meaning of the monologue being played.

    Monologue Features

    1. The form of one’s opinion is collaborated with silent sentences or dialogues. Where to be able to synchronize requires careful planning. However, there are exceptions to a few people who are skilled at creating the art of monologues spontaneously without a plan.
    2. The performer of the monologue is only one person, there are no opponents or partners.
    3. Use descriptive narrative messages. Of course using a certain theme that has been set. To support this narrative, supporting documents are needed, which can be in the form of presentations, pictures or something else.
    4. Monologue is more often used for theater arts and acting. Rarely used in dramas, soap operas or FTV.
    5. Monologues can invite the audience to interact simply to give an impression of their actions.
    6. More appropriate and suitable for silent dialogue, or in general language, pantomime performances that only combine communication through movement and alone.
    7. Describe consistently but interact with each other’s messages.

    Monologue Types

    1. Biographical Narrative Monologue

    A biographical narrative monologue is a narrator who is required to retell actual events that have been experienced in the past. The thing to emphasize here is that the narrator should not highlight the characters of other characters in the story. In other words, purely just telling himself.

    2. Fictional Character-Driven Monologue

    A fictional character-driven monologue is a monologue that gives the narrator the freedom to tell based on his imaginative power. With this type of monologue, you can highlight more than one character and be free to express it.

    The imaginative intention here is not merely the narrator’s imagination. The narrator can also tell an imaginative story when he was a child. So, it’s not just the narrator’s imagination in the present, but more broadly the intended imaginative form.

    3. Topical monologue

    Topical monologue is one monologue that emphasizes everyday events. Where the monologue is not just telling the story of everyday life that is experienced. but the monologue may also tell the results of observations that have been made. Of course based on observation through observation.

    If you look at it at a glance, you could say that a topical monologue is similar to a stand-up comedy. However, the two actually have something in common, viz. the similarities between the two have a sense of humor where the sense of humor is taken from combining anecdotes.

    4. Storytelling monologue

    In accordance with its type, monologue storytelling focuses more on narrative stories. The narrator is the storyteller who tells by following the changes in the expression being told. Then, the narrator can imitate the character of the character being told.

    5. Reality Based Monologue

    Thus, the difference between a reality-based monologue and other monologues lies in the core form or presentation of the monologue itself. In this type of monologue a narrator refers to experiences, real stories that have been used.

    The form of reality-based monologue is not only conveyed in the form of a story. However, it can also be presented in the form of photo shots, text, or in video form. In fact, it can also be conveyed in the form of a story.

    6. Monologues of Biographical Characters

    The most notable difference from a biographical monologue is that it features dialogue rather than story. So, in this type of monologue, the narrator can tell more than one character. In fact, it can stage more than 10 character characters at once.

    Basically, to act out a monologue is not easy, so special skills are needed. Not only that, monologue actors also have to practice regularly so they can give performances that will impress the audience.

    Well, that’s the explanation of the monologue. So, are you getting interested in exploring the monologue role?

    If Sinaumed’s is interested in knowing more about monologues, you can learn about them by reading references on the internet or books that you can only get at sinaumedia.com . To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

    Book Recommendations Related to Monologues

    1. Political Monologue

    In this Political Monologue book , five monologues written by Putu Fajar Arcana are presented in an unusual way of looking at reality.

    Monologues are not so popular as a method of expressing various phenomena that occur around us. However, these works prove how the story and role of a character can become an anchor to slowly enter the vast jungle of the world of politics, which is a mess.

    This Political Monologue book provides evidence that the world of harsh and banal politics can also be approached in a subtle way, but still dives right down to the core of the problem, namely human morality!

    2. The Monologue of the Wind

    The Wind Monologue is a collection of Bagus Burham’s poems. For him, writing poetry is nothing. The poetry he wrote was later recorded as a pilgrimage in honor of his predecessors in the world of literature, an attempt to emulate exemplary and kindness, as well as a way of self-museum.

    Bagus Burham’s poems are soft and sometimes empty and even harsh, like an unexpected wind.

    Bagus Burham, born in Kudus 1992. Now he is listed as a PGSD student at Muria Kudus University and is active in the Jenang Literary Community. Bagus Burham’s works have appeared in various poetry anthologies of poets in Central and East Java. In fact, his poetry has also appeared in various media, both print and online media , which contain his selected works.

    3. Aldy’s Monologue: The Inspirational Story of Atistics Paintings of Persons with Autism

    Aldy or Raynaldy Halim, born in 1997, has had autism since he was 16 months old. Various ways of healing have been attempted by the father and mother, involving many doctors, psychiatrists, psychologists, religionists, traditional healers to spiritual experts from various cities and countries.

    Aldy finally got better through painting therapy, and now he is a painter. The beauty of the nuances of his work is phenomenal, thus attracting the attention of international exhibition committees. This book tells of his suffering, his struggles, his achievements, and his happiness.

    Augustine says: deus intimeor intimo meo, God is closer to me than I am to myself. Aldy, through the strokes of his paintings, has succeeded in embodying the story of the hidden presence of God’s love in his life.

    Aldy’s paintings are not only rich in color, but also decorated with messages of love, even though all of them are depicted in abstract patterns. Aldy’s paintings also often carry messages from nature, so that his works can be an inspiration for all mankind.”

    Aldy’s paintings contain many beautiful nuanced details. Aldy’s work is a form of energy and imagination that grows from purity of heart, starting from hidden talents. Everything flows and boils down to a vibrant canvas with vibrant colors.

    4. 25 Monologues by Arswendo Atmowiloto

    Arswendo Atmowiloto has one and a half months to write 25 monologue scripts. The number 25, at the same time welcoming the 25th anniversary, London School of Public Relations (LSPR), Jakarta, where he teaches Creative Writing and Directing courses.

    Since 2015, together with students from the Performing Arts Communication (PAC) concentration, he has had a program of writing scripts, training, staging, and discussing those embodied in productions with the titles “We Perform Theater” (PAC Batch 17, 2015), “Kisah Ruang Wait” (PAC Batch 18, 2016), and “Parade 25 Monologue by Arswendo Atmowiloto” (PAC Batch 19, 2017).

    Twenty-five monologue texts in this book are dedicated to LSPR Jakarta, Indonesia’s favorite communication college, which has a tradition of performing arts and performing arts festivals every semester.

    Thus the review of the monologue. Sinaumed’s can read other monologue-related books that have been recommended at sinaumedia.com. sinaumedia always provides the best products so you have #MoreWithReading information.

  • Monetary Policy Instruments: Definition, Types, Purpose, and Examples

    Monetary Policy Instruments – Every country has a central bank which has the duty to regulate the smooth circulation of money in its sovereign territory. Monetary policy is one type of central bank policy to carry out its duties. However, what exactly is meant by monetary policy? Also, what are the monetary policy instruments that Sinaumed’s must understand as a citizen? Check out the full explanation in the following article.

    Monetary Policy Instruments

    As is well known, monetary policy is an economic policy towards controlling money circulation and economic growth. The main measures as macroeconomic variables are the unemployment rate and inflation. However, not only that, there are other monetary policy instruments, including the following.

    1. Discount Policy (Discount Rate)

    Discount policy is a monetary policy instrument that is measured by bank interest rates. Conditions in which commercial banks lend funds to Bank Indonesia as the central bank with the aim of making money circulate in an orderly manner.

    Note the following:

    • If the central bank raises interest rates, it will reduce the amount of money in circulation to overcome inflation

    So, when interest rates are raised, people will be more interested in saving at banks, Grammeds. This happens because the money saved will get greater interest. Due to the high public interest in saving, the money circulating in society will also decrease.

    • If banks lower interest rates, it will have the effect of increasing the amount of money in circulation to overcome deflation

    So, when interest rates are lowered, people will be more interested in using money because if you save, you will only get interest or a small profit.

    2. Open Market Operations

    When the government controls the circulation of money through the sale or purchase of securities owned by the government, what is used as an instrument of monetary policy is open operation.

    Noteworthy:

    • If the central bank sells SBI, it will have the effect of reducing the money supply to overcome inflation

    When SBI is purchased by the public, the money will be received by the central bank, which can reduce the money supply.

    • If the central bank buys SBI again, it will increase the money supply to overcome defaluation.

    When the central bank buys SBI, the central bank will exchange them for money, so that the money circulating in the community will also increase.

    3. Statutory Reserve Ratio Policy

    Next, the monetary policy instrument is the mandatory reserve ratio. The mandatory reserve ratio is a policy of the central bank to increase or decrease commercial bank cash reserves.

    Things to watch out for, Squad:

    • If the central bank increases cash reserves, it will reduce the money supply and serve to overcome inflation.

    So, as a result, commercial banks have to hold more money in reserves so that the money supply can be reduced, Sinaumed’s .

    • If the bank reduces cash reserves, it will increase the money supply to overcome deflation.

    So, commercial banks have to spend more money on the public rather than holding that money as reserves, so the amount of money in circulation will increase in the community.

    4. Determination of Reference Interest Rates

    To achieve monetary policy objectives, Bank Indonesia has the authority to control money circulation through interest rates.

    • Tight Credit is a central bank policy that is useful for reducing the amount of money in circulation in order to overcome inflation, meaning that strict conditions for granting will reduce the number of people or entrepreneurs to obtain credit, due to difficulties in obtaining credit with increasingly difficult conditions.
    • Loose credit is a policy of the central bank to increase the amount of money in circulation to overcome deflation, meaning that looser terms of provision will be useful for increasing the number of people or entrepreneurs who can get credit because the conditions are also simplified.

    The interest rate set by Bank Indonesia will be used as a reference for commercial banks throughout Indonesia to carry out their activities. Thus, the money supply can be increased.

    5. Moral Appeal

    Finally, the monetary policy instrument is moral appeal. In this case, Bank Indonesia as the central bank urges all commercial banks to adopt a policy of reducing or increasing loan interest rates

    Definition of Monetary Policy

    Monetary policy is a decision taken by the government to support economic activity through various matters related to determining the amount of money circulating in society.

    The main objective of monetary policy is to maintain the stability of the availability of money in a country. Monetary policy must be carried out because the state’s money supply will affect various economic activities, such as inflation, bank interest rates, and so on.

    Therefore, the person in charge and implementer of monetary policy in Indonesia is Bank Indonesia as the central bank. This is based on Law no. 23 of 1999 concerning Bank Indonesia Monetary Policy.

    Definition of Monetary Policy According to Experts

    1. Soeharsono Sagir: Monetary policy demonstrates the ability of Bank Indonesia as a central bank to achieve its sole objective, namely to achieve and maintain rupiah stability (inflation and rupiah exchange rate under control).
    2. Sadono Sukirno: Monetary policy is the central bank’s steps to influence the amount of money supply and interest rates in the economy with the aim of overseeing the forms of loans and investments made by commercial banks.
    3. Suryana: Monetary policy is a government policy to influence the course of the economy by influencing the supply of money in society or by influencing interest rates.
    4. Natsir: What is meant by monetary policy is any action or effort by the central bank to influence the development of monetary variables (money supply, exchange rates, interest rates, and credit interest rates) in order to achieve the desired goals.
    5. Perry Warjiyo: Monetary policy is the policy of the monetary authority or central bank in the form of monetary aggregates in order to achieve the development of economic activities carried out by taking into account the cycle of economic activity, the nature of a country’s economy, and other fundamental economic factors.
    6. Muana Nanga: The definition of monetary policy is a policy carried out by the monetary authority by controlling the amount of money in circulation and interest rates to influence the level of aggregate demand and reduce economic instability.

    In other words, monetary policy is a process in which the government, central bank, or a country’s monetary authority controls the supply of money, the availability of money, and the cost of money or interest rates in order to achieve growth-oriented goals and economic stability.

    Monetary Policy Objectives

    Bank Indonesia has the goal of achieving and maintaining stability in the value of the rupiah. This goal is in accordance with what has been stated in Law no. 3 of 2004 article 7 concerning Bank Indonesia. What is meant by stability in the value of the rupiah includes stability in the prices of goods and services as reflected in inflation.

    To achieve this goal, since 2005 Bank Indonesia has implemented a monetary policy framework with inflation as the main target of monetary policy ( Inflation Targeting Framework ) and adheres to a free floating exchange rate system .

    The role of exchange rate stability is very important to achieve price and financial system stability. Therefore, Bank Indonesia also implements an exchange rate policy to reduce the volatility of excessive exchange rates, not to direct the exchange rate at a certain level.

    1. Ensuring Economic Stability

    The economic growth of a country must be controlled and sustainable. This can be realized by balancing the flow of goods and services with the circulation of money. Therefore, the objective of monetary policy is to maintain economic stability by means of regulations and stipulations related to the circulation of money in society.

    2. Controlling Inflation

    In order to suppress inflation, Bank Indonesia must establish policies with the aim of reducing money circulating in the community and maintaining the availability of money in banks. Thus, one of the objectives of the existence of monetary policy is to control inflation.

    3. Increasing Employment

    The next objective of monetary policy from Bank Indonesia is to increase the availability of jobs. The stability of the circulation of money makes production activities increase. With an increase in production activities, human resources are needed in its management. So that this can be useful for absorbing labor with the existence of jobs.

    4. Protecting the Stability of Goods Prices in the Market

    The next objective of monetary policy is to protect market price stability. When market prices are stable, it will foster public confidence in current and future price levels. So that the level of purchasing power that exists between periods remains the same. This price stability can be regulated through the balance of money circulation, demand for goods, and production of goods.

    5. Maintaining the balance of the international balance of payments

    Monetary policy does not only influence domestic economic activities, but also those outside the country. One of the goals of monetary policy is to maintain a balance in the international balance of payments. This can be realized through the stability of the number of exported and imported goods which are equal in size. Therefore, it is not surprising that the government often conducts devaluations in this regard.

    6. Encouraging Economic Growth

    All impacts on monetary policy are expected to be able to stimulate economic growth. Because, in order to achieve this goal requires various successes from each component. For example, such as the availability of jobs, inflation rate control, production activities and demand for goods, and others.

    Types of Monetary Policy Types

    In making decisions regarding money circulation, Bank Indonesia uses two types of monetary policy. The explanation is as follows.

    1. Expansive Monetary Policy

    Expansionary monetary policy is a type of monetary policy that manages and regulates the circulation of money in economic activities. In this case, the main objective is to increase the circulation of money in society so that the wheels of the economy can increase.

    2. Contractive Monetary Policy

    Next, contractionary monetary policy is a type of monetary policy which is a policy taken as a step to reduce the circulation of money in society when inflation occurs. This was realized by selling government bonds, increasing bank interest rates, and increasing reserve requirements for banks.

    Example of Monetary Policy in Indonesia

    In practice, a lot of regulations have been implemented as a result of monetary policy in Indonesia. The following is an example of monetary policy in Indonesia.

    1. Implementation of Direct Credit by Bank Indonesia

    First, an example of monetary policy is Bank Indonesia providing direct credit. Providing direct credit to many sectors or projects that require funds urgently. This is able to increase the amount of money in circulation because the sector or project must finance all activities as soon as possible.

    2. Provision of Overdraft Facilities

    When Bank Indonesia assists commercial banks that are experiencing short-term liquidity difficulties, this is an example of monetary policy using an overdraft facility . The assistance provided is short-term loans with high interest rates. This is done in the hope of being able to control the circulation of money so that it remains stable.

    3. Issuance of Government Bonds

    Furthermore, an example of monetary policy is by issuing government bonds. In this case, the government is trying to collect funds from the public so that the money circulating in the community decreases.

    4. Rupiah Intervention Program

    The rupiah intervention program is an example of monetary policy in Indonesia carried out by Bank Indonesia by means of a process of borrowing and borrowing funds directly on the Interbank Money Market within a 7-day period. This is done as an effort to support operating activity instruments in the open market.

    Also read:

    • Macroeconomic Theory: Definition and Key Issues
    • Types of Economic Activities and Examples
    • Populist Economic System: Definition, Characteristics, Targets
    • Understanding the Definition of the Digital Economy, Benefits
    • What is Economic Growth Theory
    • Understanding Green Economy: Origins, Goals, Principles
  • Monetary Policy: Definition, Types, Objectives and Instruments

    Definition of Monetary Policy – Monetary policy is a policy in an effort to control the country’s economy on a macro basis to achieve a better economy by regulating the amount of money in circulation. A good economy itself can be seen from price stability through a controlled inflation rate, Sinaumed’s. Check out the details below, Sinaumed’s.

    Definition of Monetary Policy

    Monetary policy is the process of regulating a country’s money supply to achieve certain goals, for example controlling inflation, achieving full employment or more prosperity. Monetary policy can involve setting loan interest standards, ” margin requirements “, capitalization for banks or even acting as last resort borrowers or through negotiated agreements with other governments.

    Monetary policy is basically a policy aimed at achieving internal balance (high economic growth, price stability, equitable development) and external balance (balance of payments) and achieving macroeconomic goals, namely maintaining economic stability as measured by employment opportunities, stability prices and a balanced international balance of payments.

    If stability in economic activity is disrupted, then monetary policy can be used to recover (stabilization measures). The influence of monetary policy will first be felt by the banking sector, which will then be transferred to the real sector. Monetary policy is an effort to achieve high levels of economic growth in a sustainable manner while maintaining price stability.

    To achieve this goal, the Central Bank or the Monetary Authority seeks to regulate the balance between the supply of money and the supply of goods so that inflation can be controlled, achieving full employment and smooth supply or distribution of goods. Monetary policy is carried out, among others, with one but not limited to the following instruments, namely interest rates, minimum reserve requirements, intervention in the foreign exchange market and as the last place for banks to borrow money when experiencing liquidity difficulties.

    Understand other popular terms such as economics, monetary, finance, and banking through the Dictionary of Popular Terms: Economics, Monetary, Finance, Banking which is below.

    Definition of Monetary Policy According to Expert Opinions

    The following is the definition of monetary policy according to experts including:

    • Muana Nanga : The definition of monetary policy is a policy carried out by the monetary authority by controlling the money supply and interest rates to influence the level of aggregate demand and reduce economic instability.
    • Boediono Monetary : What is meant by monetary policy is the action of the government through the Central Bank to influence the macro situation which is carried out by balancing the money supply with the supply of goods so that inflation can be controlled, achieving full employment opportunities and smooth supply or distribution of goods.
    • M. Natsir : What is meant by monetary policy is any action or effort by the central bank to influence the development of monetary variables (money supply, exchange rates, interest rates, and credit interest rates) to achieve the desired goals.
    • Perry Warjiyo : Monetary policy is the policy of the monetary authority or central bank in the form of monetary aggregates to achieve the development of economic activity which is carried out by taking into account the cycle of economic activity, the nature of a country’s economy and other fundamental economic factors.

    Types of Monetary Policy

    Two types of monetary policies can be taken as steps to influence the money supply. These policies are expansionary monetary policy and contractionary monetary policy, as follows:

    1. Expansive Monetary Policy

    Expansionary Monetary Policy is often called Loose money policy (easy money policy) is a policy that regulates the amount of money supplied in the economy. This is done by lowering interest rates, buying government securities by the central bank, and lowering reserve requirements for banks. Expansionary policies will also reduce the unemployment rate and stimulate business activity or consumer spending activities.

    Overall, in all countries, the objective of expansionary monetary policy is to increase economic growth with the risk that inflation will be even higher. Expansive monetary policy mainly increases the money circulating in society so that the wheels of the economy run faster. This policy is able to increase people’s purchasing power (demand) and reduce the number of unemployed when the economy is experiencing a recession or depression. Expansionary monetary policy also affects the unemployment rate in a country.

    For example, expansionary policies are usually implemented to reduce the unemployment rate because the availability of large amounts of money will stimulate business activity so that the labor market gets bigger. With fiscal authority, the central bank controls the exchange rate of the domestic currency (Rupiah) against foreign currencies. A concrete example is that the Indonesian bank increases the money supply by issuing more printed money. Rupiah currency becomes cheaper than other countries’ currencies.

    Learn other existing monetary policies in Indonesia through case studies discussed in the book Monetary Economics by Prof. Dr. Haryo Kuncoro, SE, M.SI.

    2. Contractive Monetary Policy

    Contractive Monetary Policy is a policy in order to reduce the amount of money in circulation. This policy was carried out when the economy experienced inflation. Also known as a tight money policy (tight money policy). Contractive monetary policy (monetary contractive policy) which is called tight money policy (tight money policy) is a policy of reducing the amount of money in circulation.

    The main objective of this policy is to reduce the inflation rate. The goal of contractionary monetary policy is to reduce the money supply in the economy. This goal can be achieved by increasing interest rates, selling government bonds, and increasing reserve requirements for banks.

    Examples of Monetary Policy in Indonesia Some examples of monetary policy that have been implemented in Indonesia are as follows: Bank Indonesia (BI ) conducts certificate auctions, or it could also be through purchasing securities in the capital market. UBI may lower interest rates if economic conditions match expectations. Conversely, BI can raise interest rates if it wants to limit economic activity so that the flow of money decreases.

    When the economy experiences a recession, the circulation of money will increase so that economic activity increases. An example is buying securities. When there is inflation, BI will reduce the flow of money to the public by selling securities to reduce excessive economic activity.

    Prof. Dr. Ali Wardhana as the Governor of the World Bank and International Monetary Fund expressed how hard it was for him to escape from the pressure of developed countries’ policy formulations in the global economic crisis discussed in Prof.’s book. Dr. Ali Wardhana: Monetary and Fiscal Policy Reformer in Indonesia.

    Monetary Policy Objectives

    Bank Indonesia has the goal of achieving and maintaining stability in the value of the rupiah. This objective as stated in Law no. 3 of 2004 article 7 concerning Bank Indonesia. What is meant by stability in the value of the rupiah includes stability in the prices of goods and services as reflected in inflation.

    To achieve this goal, since 2005 Bank Indonesia has implemented a monetary policy framework with inflation as the main target of monetary policy (Inflation Targeting Framework) and adheres to a free floating exchange rate system.

    The role of exchange rate stability is very important in achieving price and financial system stability. Therefore, Bank Indonesia also implements an exchange rate policy to reduce excessive exchange rate volatility, not to direct the exchange rate at a certain level.

    In practice, Bank Indonesia has the authority to conduct monetary policy by setting monetary targets (such as money supply or interest rates) with the aim of maintaining the inflation rate target set by the Government. Bank Indonesia can also implement monetary control measures based on Sharia Principles. In summary, the objectives of monetary policy include:

    1. Economic Stability

    Economic stability is a condition in which economic growth takes place in a controlled and sustainable manner. That is, the growth of the flow of goods/services and the flow of money is running in balance.

    2. Job Opportunities

    Job opportunities will increase if production increases. An increase in production is usually followed by an improvement in the fate of the employees in terms of wages and work safety. Improvements in wages and work safety will increase the standard of living of employees and ultimately prosperity can be achieved.

    3. Price Stability

    Price stability is characterized by the stability of prices of goods from time to time. Stable prices cause people to believe that buying goods at the current price level is the same as future price levels, or the purchasing power of money over time is the same.

    4. International Balance of Payments

    The balance of payments can be said to be in a balanced state if the total value of goods exported equals the value of goods imported. To get a balanced balance of payments, the government often implements monetary policy. An example is by devaluing.

    5. Maintain stability and economic growth

    Maintaining price stability from the large amount of money in circulation, Increasing employment opportunities, Improving the position of the trade balance and balance of payments, if the state devalues ​​the rupiah into foreign currencies.

    Monetary Policy Instruments

    Monetary policy is an economic policy that regulates the rate of growth and circulation of money within a country. The main macroeconomic variables that are regulated by monetary policy are inflation and unemployment.

    The ways that characterize monetary policy are the regulation of interest rates, buying and selling of government securities, and changing the amount of cash circulating in the market. The central bank or state financial regulatory agency such as the Ministry of Finance is responsible for the formulation of monetary policy. The main objectives of this policy are inflation management, unemployment management, and maintenance of currency exchange rates.

    Monetary policy can set targets regarding inflation rates, interest rates, and currency values. The Central Bank is the main actor in implementing monetary policy directly and indirectly. Examples of direct monetary policy are printing new money, freezing balances of private/state companies, overhauling the banking system, taking over banking/credit affairs, and many more.

    The central bank participates in money circulation and banking credit traffic. Meanwhile, an example of indirect monetary policy is giving influence to the provision of credit by the banking world. The regulation of money supply in society is carried out by increasing or decreasing the amount of money in circulation.

    Learn about monetary policy including economic activity cycles, policy targets, to case studies in Indonesia through the book Fiscal & Monetary Policy: Theory & Empirical.

    Monetary policy can be carried out by implementing monetary policy instruments, the aim of which is to regulate the amount of money in circulation in order to maintain price stability, both direct and indirect instruments. Some of the main instruments, including:

    1. Discount Facility (Discount Rate)

    The Discount Facility is the interest rate set by the government on commercial banks that borrow money from the central bank. When commercial banks experience conditions that require them to borrow money from the central bank, the government can use this opportunity to regulate the amount of money in circulation.

    If the government wants to increase the amount of money in circulation, then the government will lower the loan interest rate or discount. When loan interest rates decrease to become cheaper, commercial banks will be more interested in borrowing money from the central bank.

    Conversely, when the government wants to reduce the amount of money in circulation, the government will raise interest rates. The increase in interest rates will reduce the intention of commercial banks to make loans at the central bank so that the government can reduce the rate of increase in the money supply.

    2. Open Market Operations

    Open Market Operations (OMO) are one of the most important indirect monetary policy instruments due to their very flexible nature compared to other instruments. OPT is carried out by the government to control the amount of money in circulation by selling (open market selling) or buying (open market buying) government-owned securities.

    a. Open Market Selling is done when the government wants to reduce the amount of money in circulation by selling securities in circulation. When the government sells these letters to the public, the money used by the public to buy these letters will go to the monetary authority. Finally, the money circulating in society is getting less.

    b. Open Market Buying is done when the government wants to increase the amount of money in circulation by buying securities in circulation. When the government buys securities from the public, the money circulating in the community will increase.

    In Indonesia, monetary policy in the form of OMOs is carried out by selling or buying securities consisting of Bank Indonesia Certificates (SBI, Money Market Securities (SBPU) and Government Securities (SBN) which are divided into Government Securities (SUN) consisting of from State Treasury Bills (SPN) and State Bonds including Zero Coupon Bonds (ZCB) and State Retail Bonds (ORI), State Sharia Securities (SBSN) including Retail SBSN.

    When the government wants to reduce the amount of money in circulation, the government will sell various securities, conversely, when the government wants to increase the amount of money in circulation, the government will buy back various securities that have been sold previously.

    3. Reserve Requirement Ratio

    When the minimum required reserve is reduced, the bank has more money that can be circulated in society through loans. Conversely, if the government wants to reduce the amount of money in circulation, then the government can increase the minimum amount of mandatory bank reserves so that banks have less money to circulate.

    When the minimum required reserve is reduced, the bank has more money that can be circulated in society through loans. Conversely, if the government wants to reduce the amount of money in circulation, then the government can increase the minimum amount of bank mandatory reserves so that banks have less money to circulate.

    4. Moral Appeal (Moral Persuasion)

    Monetary policy instruments in the form of moral appeals can be carried out by the central bank to control the amount of money in circulation through various means. The central bank can urge commercial banks to lower or increase their lending rates.

    The central bank can also provide advice to these banks to be careful in providing credit to the public or to limit their desire to borrow money from the central bank through the Discount Facility. In addition to these 4 instruments, Bank Indonesia has several other monetary policy instruments, such as:

    • Direct Credit, namely Bank Indonesia provides credit directly to sectors, programs, projects or activities that are urgent in nature and must be prioritized. This direct credit will increase the amount of money circulating in the community because it is used to finance prioritized programs or activities.
    • Determination of Import Advances whereby importers are required to pay a certain percentage as an advance payment for the purchase of foreign exchange that they need to import goods from abroad. With the establishment of this instrument, the government can regulate the amount of money circulating from the import side and can control the country’s foreign exchange.
    • Overdraft Facility (Overdraft Window) in which Bank Indonesia will provide very short-term loan facilities to banks experiencing short-term liquidity (disbursement) difficulties. The interest rate applied to this facility is higher than other loan sources so that it can control the amount of money in circulation.
    • Rupiah intervention in which Bank Indonesia lends and borrows funds directly at the Interbank Money Market (PUAB) overnight for up to 7 days to assist instruments for Open Market Operations.
    • Bank Indonesia Wadiah Certificates (SWBI) are instruments that were originally created by Bank Indonesia as facilities for Islamic banks, but this does not rule out the possibility that these SWBIs will be used to assist Open Market Operations. The implementation of SWBI is not carried out by auction but instead opens a window so that it is similar to the central bank deposit facility. Furthermore, banks will increase the interest rates they charge their customers. Thus, the cost of borrowing in the economy will increase, and the money supply will decrease.

     

  • Moment of Inertia: Definition, Formula, and Examples of Its Embodiments in Life

    Moment of Inertia – For ordinary people, the term “moment of inertia” will sound foreign
    and they don’t even know the exact definition.
    This is only natural, because the term is
    generally found in Physics disciplines where not everyone studies it.

    But if you hear the name “Isaac Newton”, surely most people will immediately know that the name belongs to
    someone who discovered the theory of gravity in Physics.
    Well, it turns out that Isaac Newton
    not only discovered the theory of gravity which is always described by coconuts falling from the tree, you
    know
    , but also created the theory of Newton’s Laws related to inertia, aka inertia.

    A simple example of the occurrence of inertia, aka inertia, is a top game that is played, a roller
    coaster game , and a skateboard game. So, what is the moment of inertia in the study of
    physics?
    What is the formula for calculating this moment of inertia? What are
    some examples of the manifestation of the moment of inertia in everyday life?
    So, so that
    Sinaumed’s understands it, let’s immediately look at the following review!

    What is Moment of Inertia?

    Before understanding what the moment of inertia is, it’s better if Sinaumed’s slowly understands the
    definition of inertia, aka inertia, both in terms of terms and language.

    The term “inertia” comes from the Latin word “iners” which means ‘sluggish’ or ‘lazy’. In
    simple terms, this inertia, aka inertia, leads to the resistance of physical objects when they resist
    changes in motion.
    Reporting from studimipa.com , this inertia can
    also be interpreted as a force to hold objects that are initially still to remain still or objects that
    continue to move at a constant speed.

    Well, it turns out that this inertia or inertia has been mentioned by a famous philosopher, Galileo Galilei who
    stated that basically all things are in a state of rest. If the object moves,
    it means there is an influence coming from outside.

    In short, the tendency of objects to “preserve themselves” is what is known as inertia. The
    greater the inertia alias possessed by an object, then the object tends to be more difficult to accelerate
    or slow down its movement.
    Meanwhile, the word “moment” in the term “moment of inertia” refers
    to events related to inertia or inertia around us.

    Then, does this inertia or inertia have anything to do with the branch of physics? Of course
    there is, especially in Newton’s First Law which was coined by Isaac Newton, the founder of the theory of
    gravity.
    In Newton’s Law I states that ” Inertia is the basic property of an object,
    that is, the object will maintain its state” .

    This is a simple example, when we sit quietly in a moving car, then suddenly the driver brakes suddenly
    because a cat is passing by, then our bodies will immediately be pushed forward, right?
    Well,
    that’s a form of inertia or inertia.

    In general, the term “inertia” can also refer to ‘the amount of resistance to a change in velocity’, which
    is identified as mass.
    As Galileo Galilei said earlier, all objects will basically remain
    stationary, unless subjected to an external force (in the sense of net force = 0) which moves at a constant
    speed.
    So, on that basis, it can be concluded that,

    “Moment of inertia is a measure of the inertia of an object to rotate on its axis.
    The magnitude of the moment of inertia depends on the shape of the object and the position
    of the axis of rotation.”

    The existence of this matter plays a major role in rotational dynamics, such as mass in basic dynamics,
    determines the relationship between angular momentum (angular center) and angular velocity, determines the
    relationship between moment of force (torque) and angular acceleration, and so on.
    Since this
    moment of inertia is still within the scope of physics, then of course it has a special symbol, namely
    I or J .

    The Relationship Between Inertia and Mass

    Does Sinaumed’s know that inertia, aka inertia, has a relationship with the mass of an object?
    Yep, the amount of inertia, aka inertia, also depends on the mass of the object.
    The greater the mass of the object, the greater the measure of inertia alias inertia.
    Likewise, the greater the inertia value of an object, the greater the force required to stop
    the object.

    For example, there is a sedan and a cement mixer truck that are in the middle of a stop. To
    move the two vehicles at the same speed, of course, different forces are needed so that the sedan and the
    cement mixer truck can move.
    If that’s the case, Sinaumed’s will surely understand
    that the power to push a sedan is much less than the power to push a cement mixer truck.

    The Existence of the Moment of Inertia of a Point
    Body

    In the discipline of Physics, there is a term for objects that are subject to inertia, namely point objects
    and rigid bodies.
    The striking difference between a point object and a rigid body is the change
    in the distance contained in the system.
    In a point object, there are 2 types of system motion,
    namely 1) Center of Mass Motion;
    and 2) Relative Motion.

    Reporting from superprof.co.id , the moment of inertia of an object is influenced by its mass and
    distance to the point of rotation.
    That is why, the formula is actually the product of the
    mass of an object particle to the square of the distance from the pivot point.
    Well, the
    farther the mass of the object is from the axis, the greater the moment of inertia, aka the inertia, it
    will have.
    In this case, the formula used is:

    I = mr 2

    Information:

    I = moment of inertia (kg.m 2 )

    m = object mass (kg)

    r = distance of particle to the axis of rotation (m)

    Existence of Moment of Inertia in Rigid Bodies

    Generally, a rigid body is an object that does not experience any change in shape, especially after being
    subjected to a rotational force.
    During the rotation, the particles inside the rigid body will
    move in a space that has a circular trajectory, so that their positions will be relatively fixed to one
    another.
    This process also prevents rigid bodies from gaining kinetic energy when they are in
    translational motion.
    The reference to circular motion that occurs in a rigid body is called
    the moment of inertia.

    Yep, the existence of the moment of inertia is not only affected by mass and distance (as in point
    objects), it is also influenced by how the object forms.
    The shape of a solid spherical ring,
    cylinder shape, hollow ball shape, and others also has a measurement of the moment of inertia value of each.
    Even the formula is also different for each form of object.

    Formula for Calculating Moment of Inertia

    In general, the formula to calculate it is:

    I = mr 2

    Information:

    I = moment of inertia (kg.m 2 )

    m = object mass (kg)

    r = distance of particle to the axis of rotation (m)

    Moment of Inertia Formula for Rigid Bodies

    Previously, it was explained that the existence of this measure of inertia is not only influenced by mass
    and distance (as in point objects), it is also influenced by how the object is shaped.
    Yep, the
    measure of inertia in the shape of an object has its own value and the formula is different depending on how
    the shape of the object is.
    So, here are some formulas for calculating the moment of inertia
    for rigid bodies that have various shapes.

    Object Shape Axis Picture Moment of Inertia formula
    Stem Center I = (1/12) ml 2
    Stem End I = (⅓) ml 2
    Hollow Ball through diameters I = (⅔) m. r 2
    Solid Ball through diameters I = (⅖) m. R 2
    Solid Cylinder Cylinder axis I = (½) m. R 2
    Cylinder Tube Tube axis I = (½) m. (R1 2 + R2 2 )
    Thin Stem through diameters I = (1/12) m. (a 2 + b 2 )
    Thin Ring Through the center and perpendicular to the radius I = m. R 2

    For these rigid bodies, there are several things that need to be considered, especially in the formula for
    cylindrical rod-shaped objects, namely:

    • If spherical rigid objects are multiplied by the square of the radius, then for cylindrical rigid
      bodies multiplied by the length of the rod.
      The length of the cylinder rod has the symbol
      for the letter L with units of meters (m).
    • If the rigid objects are triangular or quadrilateral, multiplied by the length of the side and the unit is
      meters (m).

    Example of a moment of inertia problem

    1. An object rotates with a radius of 0.5 m around its center and the mass of the object is 10 kg.
      So, what is the moment of inertia of the object?

    ANSWER:

    Given: m = 10 kg; r = 0.5 km

    Asked: I

    Completion:

    ⇔ I = mr 2

    ⇔ I = 10.0,5 2

    ⇔ I = 2.5

    So, the moment of inertia on the object is 2.5 kg.m 2

    1. A solid ball has a radius of 0.5 m, and has a mass of 50 kg, determine the moment of inertia of the solid
      ball!

    ANSWER:

    Given: k = ⅖; m = 50 kg; r = 0.5m

    Asked: I

    Completion:

    ⇔ I = kmr 2

    ⇔ I = ⅖. 50. 0.5 2

    ⇔ I = 20. 0.25

    ⇔ I = 5

    So, the moment of inertia of the solid ball is 5 kg.m 2

    1. A cylindrical rod rotating through a shaft at the end has a length of 2 meters and has a mass of 9 kg.
      Determine the moment of inertia of the cylinder rod!

    ANSWER:

    Is known:

    k cylinder rod with shaft at end = ⅓

    m = 9 kg; L=2m;

    Asked: I

    Completion:

    ⇔ I = kmL 2

    ⇔ I = ⅓. 9. 2 2

    ⇔ I = 3.4

    ⇔ I = 12

    So, the moment of inertia in the cylinder rod is 12 kg.m 2

    The Embodiment of Moments of Inertia in
    Everyday Life

    The existence of this moment of inertia is not just theory and formula , you know , but there are
    also manifestations that we often encounter in our daily life.
    So, here are some examples
    of the embodiment of moments of inertia that occur in everyday life.

    1. The existence of satellites

    Does Sinaumed’s know that the existence of a satellite moving in outer space is a manifestation of the
    moment of inertia?
    Yep, basically a satellite is an object that is outside the swan and
    always rotates around a larger object without stopping.
    Why does the satellite move around
    a larger object without stopping?
    That’s because there is inertial motion that makes it
    move continuously in a circular manner.

    2. Fruit and Leaves Falling From Trees

    The second manifestation of the moment of inertia is the falling of fruit and leaves from a tree when the
    limb is disturbed.
    The state of the tree branch when it has not been shaken, will definitely be
    silent.
    Then, when the tree branch is shaken, it will start to move and affect the fruit and
    leaves which were originally in a still state.
    After that, the fruit and leaves will fall from
    the tree.

    3. Dust On The Carpet

    The manifestation of the third moment of inertia is the dust that falls from the carpet while it is being
    cleaned.
    When you want to clean the carpet, surely Sinaumed’s will hit or slash
    it with a broom, right?
    Well, the carpet that was initially stationary, then moved but the
    dust particles were still in a state of rest, aka in the initial state of inertia.
    After
    the carpet is slashed repeatedly using a broomstick, dust particles will fall.

    4. Pushed Forward When the Car Brakes Suddenly

    Has Sinaumed’s ever taken public transportation, whether it’s an angkot or a bus, then the body will be
    pushed forward when the driver brakes suddenly?
    Well, it can also be a manifestation of the
    existence of moments of inertia in everyday life.

    5. Stir the Milk in the Glass

    When you want to brew milk, surely Sinaumed’s will stir it first, right? So, during the
    process of stirring the milk, you will definitely see that the “current” is still rotating, even though
    we have stopped stirring.
    Well, it can also be a manifestation of the moment of inertia
    that keeps the “flow” of milk moving, even after the stirring process is complete.

    6. Athletes Running Before Long Jumping

    Did Sinaumed’s ever try the long jump when he was still in school? Usually, this practice
    is carried out to fulfill Basic Competencies in Physical Education subjects.
    So, when we
    want to do a long jump, we will definitely do a running run.
    Running square off where we
    are asked to run as hard as possible and then stop at a certain point, then just jump into the sandbox.
    The moment when we run and then stop is the embodiment of inertia.

    So, that’s a review of what is the moment of inertia along with the formula and examples of its
    manifestation in everyday life.
    Can Sinaumed’s name examples of other manifestations
    of moments of inertia?

  • Moderate is an Attitude, See Definition, Characteristics, and Examples

    Moderate is – As citizens of a country full of diversity, we have made peace with
    differences and uphold unity in the name of Indonesia.
    This is proof that we have succeeded in
    instilling moderation in our daily lives.

    The moderate attitude itself is the embodiment of the second precept of Pancasila, namely “Just and
    civilized humanity”.
    Without a moderate attitude, peace between groups in Indonesia is just a
    dream and a figment of imagination.

    But what exactly is moderation? what are the features and concepts? What benefits
    will we get from this moderate attitude?
    Let’s discuss everything together here.

    Definition of Moderate is

    Moderate, according to the Big Indonesian Dictionary, means always avoiding extreme behavior or
    disclosure;
    tend toward the middle dimension or path.

    And in some ways, moderation is indeed a condition that is not absolute, is in the middle, and is
    measurable.
    This means that we position ourselves according to the context without being
    inclined to one particular party.
    However, it is also because of that that moderation is
    conditional in nature and is heavily influenced by our estimates which are not absolute.

    On the other hand, being moderate is also evidence that a person has the ability to see things logically
    and in balance.
    In addressing a matter, moderate people will see from various sides and uphold
    justice.
    Even for some conditions, moderate is the ideal condition. Like religion
    or politics.
    This moderate explanation is in line with that explained by Albertus M. Patty in
    his book entitled Religious moderation: a moral-ethical virtue.

    Characteristics of Moderate People

    Moderate people usually tend to take a middle position, be fair, and mediate in a conflict.
    Therefore, not infrequently, moderate people can negotiate well and make wise and appropriate
    decisions when faced with various situations.

    Besides that, there are many more characteristics of moderate people. But in general, these
    characteristics can be subdivided into 4, namely being open, thinking rationally, being humble, and bringing
    benefits.

    1. Open

    A moderate usually has an open attitude and makes him able to receive input from various parties.
    And when he gets criticism, he doesn’t think of it as an “attack” but a trigger to make himself
    grow in a better direction.

    That is why, a moderate person will never feel that he is the most righteous, let alone against people who have
    views or thoughts that are different from his.

    2. Rational Thinking

    For people with a moderate attitude, all things must be accepted and reviewed by common sense.
    If not, then there is something to be questioned in order to get a clearer answer.

    Therefore, don’t be surprised if moderate people always speak based on opinions that come from science so that
    every word they say can be proven and accounted for.

    Moderate people tend to have the ability to think critically, orderly, methodically, and coherently.
    It doesn’t stop there, they are also able to think objectively, sharply, abstractly, and use
    systematic principles.

    3. Humble

    The next feature of a moderate attitude is humility. They are far from being arrogant because
    they always feel they have deficiencies in various things, especially science.
    Therefore, for
    moderate people, learning is a way to stay alive and be human.

    And most importantly, moderate people will always be humble when talking to other people and will not feel that
    they are the most righteous among their friends.

    4. Provide Benefits

    With a humble attitude that is always attached to him, a moderate person will try his best to benefit
    himself and those around him.
    For them, being a useful person is much more important than
    showing their own merits.

    Moderate in politics

    Differences, like a double-edged sword, can be the strength or weakness of this nation – depending on who
    and how to use them.
    Every time a political year enters, the parties who are dishonest and
    irresponsible take advantage of this weakness for their own interests.

    2019 was arguably one of the successful political years that left a negative effect on the people of
    Indonesia.
    The polarization and enmity between the two presidential candidates reached an
    advanced level when society no longer upholds moderation.
    Even though a democratic country like
    Indonesia is synonymous with this moderate attitude.

    Democracy is also a mediator between the extreme left (authoritarian) and the extreme right (anarchy).
    Authoritarian is a leadership style where everything depends on the leader. Decisions
    are taken by leaders absolutely and members must follow these decisions.

    Meanwhile, anarchy is a leadership style that depends on all components in the organization, so that the leader
    seems to have no existence at all.

    Democracy is in the middle of the two leadership styles, which means that not everything depends on the
    leader at the same time, not everything depends on all components in the organization.
    Democracy is about a balance between absolute leadership and the participation of all
    organizational components.

    In the context of a country, all citizens – both leaders and people – must have the ability to be people who are
    open, think rationally, humble, and at the same time try to provide benefits to the country.

    You can take a deeper look at being moderate in politics by reading the book Politics of Moderation and
    Religious Freedom written by Zainal Abidin Bagir and Jimmy Sormin.
    In this book you will find
    answers about the origins of the emergence of moderates in Jokowi’s government, why moderates emerged in the
    midst of the current socio-political upheaval, and others.

    Moderation in Religion

    In the context of religious life, especially Islam which is adhered to by around 86% of Indonesia’s
    population, moderation also plays a very important role.
    Because, moderate is the midpoint
    between the extreme left and the extreme right.

    The extreme left side tends to understand Islam in a radical textual way, while the right side has a more
    flexible context.
    On the left side, people view Islam as something exclusive so that if there
    are people who are not the same as them, then they are not considered Muslims.

    On the other hand, people on the right view Islam as very flexible and easy to interpret. In
    the end, people on the right have no boundaries between religion and tradition or culture.

    The choice of this ideology has a great influence on one’s way of thinking and everyday behavior.
    Sinaumed’s has certainly heard or read the news about how people label other parties who have
    different religious views as infidels.
    Even though Allah SWT created all things in pairs which
    mean different but complement each other.

    This is where the role of moderation is needed to mediate between the two camps. Moderate
    Islam is often defined as Islam that is rahmatan lil’alamin.
    Moderate Islam is our way of
    continuing the main task of the Prophet Muhammad SAW who was sent by Allah SWT to give to the entire
    universe (QS. Al-Anbiya’: 107).

    But of course, being a moderate person in religion is not an easy task because we must be able to act
    fairly.
    Apart from that, we must also be able to determine what is permissible and what is not,
    what is good and what is bad.

    In general, a moderate attitude in Islam has its own characteristics, namely: not blaming each other, not
    feeling self-righteous, and willing to dialogue.
    These three characters are proof that the
    difference given by Allah SWT is a gift.

    Moderate is also associated with good attitudes and behavior, friendly, not easily provoked by emotions
    (temperament), rational thinking, applying Islamic law and modern rules in a balanced way.
    Simply put, moderate Islam is about tolerance while adhering to existing laws.

    It’s not enough to stop there, moderation is also needed to build an inclusive religious environment so that
    inter-religious relations in Indonesia can become even more harmonious.

    Thus, a moderate attitude in religion is not limited to Muslims, but all adherents of religions.
    With this attitude, everyone can avoid extreme understanding and intolerance when bringing their
    beliefs into the public sphere.

    It seems utopian indeed, but actually this condition is not something that is impossible. The
    key is the ability of every religious community to be able to understand each other and realize the
    importance of tolerance in practicing their respective beliefs.

    Mutual understanding here means understanding that every religion has its own teachings which are of course
    different.
    Then an attitude of tolerance is needed so that no party blames each other because
    of these differences.
    That way, the religious atmosphere in Indonesia can run better and
    harmonious.

    Islamic moderation has a mission: to maintain a balance between two extreme poles that are difficult to
    reconcile.
    The main idea is to oppose all forms of violence, extremism, terrorism, fanaticism,
    and the like. So, how exactly are the thoughts, understandings and practices of Islam developing among
    Indonesian Muslims?
    To answer this question, Sinaumed’s can read the book Indonesian Islamic
    Moderation by Prof.
    Dr. Mujamil Qomar, M. Ag.

    This book answers and examines it in depth in various aspects. In fact, it is also accompanied
    by a radical review of the implications of Indonesian Islam for the dynamics of civilization, friendly
    Islamic diversity, and stability of peace.

    Examples of moderate attitude in religion

    a. Addressing the differences in
    Eid al-Fitr

    An example of a moderate attitude in religion can be seen by Sinaumed’s from the difference in the
    determination of Eid al-Fitr.
    As you know, in Indonesia there are two major Islamic
    organizations, namely Muhammadiyah and Nahdlatul Ulama.
    When determining Eid al-Fitr, both use
    different methods because in this country Eid al-Fitr can be “twice”.

    Muhammadiyah uses the intrinsic hilal method and is based on studies from the Tarjih Council and the Tajdid
    PP Muhammadiyah.
    While NU uses the physical moon sighting method or (rukyatul hilal bil
    fi’ly).

    We must respect these differences because differences themselves are sunnatullah that we cannot avoid.
    In addition, when viewed from the other side, the difference in setting the date of this Eid is a
    special pleasure that can only be felt by Indonesians.

    With this difference, the Eid al-Fitr holiday will be longer. For those who don’t celebrate
    Eid, they have more time to gather with family.
    For those who celebrate first, they can enjoy
    the peace of Eid al-Fitr and its series of worship.
    For those who celebrate afterwards, can
    enjoy the perfection of fasting.

    b. Say hello to non-Muslims

    Apart from addressing the differences in Eid al-Fitr, moderation can also be shown in the context of
    greeting non-Muslims.
    In Indonesia, there are people who think that greeting non-Muslims is
    something that is not necessary because it is prohibited by religion.
    But there are also those
    who consider it permissible as a form of tolerance between religious communities in Indonesia and Allah SWT
    wants Muslims to be a blessing that brings goodness to the people around them.

    A moderate attitude is needed to address this matter because even though around 86% of Indonesia’s
    population adheres to Islam, Indonesia does not make religious regulations the basis for formulating state
    regulations.
    So we need to look at this-saying greetings to non-Muslims-with caution.

    In everyday life, greeting and greeting are part of social interaction. In other words,
    prohibiting greeting non-Muslims is tantamount to destroying social interaction.
    And it can be
    concluded, this view is a wrong view because Islam is a religion that fights for humanity, justice, and
    peace.

    c. Congratulate the
    moments of other religious holidays

    In addition to greetings, congratulating the moments of other religious holidays to their adherents is
    still being debated to this day.
    In fact, if viewed objectively and carefully thought through,
    wishing merry-Christmas for example-is a good deed to fellow human beings which is commanded by Islam.
    The Prophet sallallaahu ‘alaihi wa sallam also often set an example for his people to do good to
    non-Muslims.

    However, Sinaumed’s needs to remember that congratulating does not mean agreeing with other people’s beliefs.
    Congratulating is part of the etiquette of social intercourse. So congratulations to
    non-Muslims that you say should not interfere with your faith in Allah and His Messenger and you do not
    support their beliefs.
    So just say congratulations to build solidarity, maintain relations
    between neighbors or friends.

    Moderate in a more personal context

    Beyond politics and religion, moderates can also be drawn into a more personal context. In
    this context, moderate is indicated by a certain character attitude.
    For example, such as
    courage and love of something.

    Courage, when viewed from the other side, can be seen as an attitude and action that mediates between fear
    on the left side and recklessness on the right side.
    Fear is a condition when a person does not
    have the courage to do something without a logical reason.
    While recklessness is excessive
    courage and is not based on careful calculations.

    Courage stands between the two as the ability to control fear and prevent recklessness. Or you
    can also call it a measured recklessness.

    Love, stands between hatred and fanaticism. Hate itself is a condition of antipathy towards
    something that makes a person think negatively of a subject or object.

    On the other hand, fanaticism is uncontrollable love. When someone becomes fanatic about
    something, he is unable to see objectively, so anything related to what he loves is considered as something
    positive.

    Love mediates between the two. This means that love can see something that is negative or
    positive correctly and then changed again into something positive.

    Thus the discussion about moderation, from all the discussion above it can be said that it is necessary for us to
    always maintain a moderate attitude, so that we can respect one another.

    If you want to understand more deeply about moderation, then you can find books about moderation at
    sinaumedia.com . To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always
    provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

  • Modals in English: Definition, Types, Example Sentences and Questions

    A. Definition of Modals

    In understanding more deeply about modals, you can first study tenses in English through the Tenses Smart
    Book by Drs.
    Arif Yosodipuro, MM.

    B. Types of Modals

    1. Present Modals

    a. will (will)

    Used to express:
    – means “will” in the future simple tense, and is the same as to be going
    to

    Example: I will go to Bandung tomorrow (I will go to Bandung tomorrow)

    Politely request or offer

    Example: Will you carry that bag for me? (Will
    you carry the bag for me?)

    b. Shall (will)

    Used to express:
    – it means “will” in the future tense
    Example: I shall go to Jakarta
    tomorrow (I will go to Jakarta tomorrow)

    – Offering help
    Example:
    Shall i turn on the light?
    (Should I turn on the light?)

    – Making a
    promise

    Example: I shall meet her tomorrow

    c. Must (must, must)

    Auxiliary verbs which mean must or must, are used to express:
    – Must/must
    Example: You
    must go now (You have to go now)

    – In negative sentences and making answers from
    interrogative sentences, always use need not or needn’t not must not or
    mustn’t

    Example: Must I go now? Yes you must / yes you
    need

    -Must not (musn’t) indicates a prohibition or not
    allowed

    Example: You must not smoke in the class (You must not smoke in the
    class)

    – Must = have to (she/he has to)
    Example: You must read this book =
    You have to read this book

    – Must doesn’t have a past tense. The past
    form that has the same meaning is “had to”, and the form is the same for all
    objects

    Example: I had to meet my sister yesterday (I had to meet my sister
    yesterday)

    d. May (may, may)

    The auxiliary verb which means “may/may”, is used to express:
    – Application for a
    permit

    Example: May I borrow your motorcycle? Yes, you
    may

    – Request or hope
    Example: May you both full of
    happiness

    e. Should/ought to

    Used for:
    – Auxiliary verbs which mean better or should
    Example: She ought to be here
    now (He should be here now)

    – Expressing unfinished/fulfilled or neglected
    tasks/work

    Example: The work ought to have been finished last week (The work should have
    been completed last week)

    f. can (can)

    Used to express:
    – Ability or skill of a person
    Example: I can sing (I can
    sing)

    – Ask permission
    Example: Can I borrow your book?
    (Can I borrow your book?)

    -Example
    : He can be ill
    (Maybe he is sick)

    2. Modals Past

    a. would

    Used to express:
    – Past form of will which means “will”
    Example: He would be punished
    before he escaped (He would be punished before he escaped)

    -A polite request/request
    Example: Would you please help me? (Would you like to help
    me?)

    -When combined with the word “like” then it shows desire or desire
    Example: i would like to eat (I want
    to eat)

    – Combined with the word “rather” shows the meaning of prefer (prefer)
    Example: I would rather be a
    doctor than a president (I choose to be a doctor rather than being president)

    b. Should

    Used to express:
    – Past form of shall
    Example: When he came to my house I should
    go

    – Suggestions, means “preferably”
    Example: You are ill, you should go to the doctor soon

    – Required
    Example: He should study hard (He should study hard)

    – In the past form it means to show an activity that should have been done but in reality it was not done, or it
    could also mean regrets in the past
    Example: You should have studied hard before taking an exam
    (You should have studied hard before taking an exam).
    This means that the subject does not
    study hard but still takes the exam.

    c. Must/Had to

    – Past form of Must.
    – Required (cannot not be done).
    Example: You must/had to
    study in Biology class yesterday.
    (You should have studied harder in biology class
    yesterday)

    d. Might

    – Stating news sentences in the form of Past Tense.
    Example: The newspaper said it might rain
    tomorrow.
    (Newspaper says it might rain tomorrow)

    – Use a more
    polite expression.

    Example: Joni might do the exam well. (Joni will do
    well on the exam)

    – Says a big possibility.
    Example: Ariel
    was absent yesterday.
    He might be sick. (Ariel didn’t come in yesterday. He
    might be sick)

    e. could

    is the past tense of can and the form is the same for all subjects. However, in use it does
    not always mean the past tense or the past.
    Could can be used to express:
    – The
    past form of can

    Example: Mary could sing a song when she was young (Mary could sing a song
    when she was little)

    – Request politely
    Example: Could you help me now? (Can you help me
    now?)

    -Possible
    Example: She could be at home now, but she usually plays volleyball

    3. Modals Perfect

    a. Must have + V3

    Past conclusions.
    Example: Anto passed the exam. He must have studied.
    (Anto did well in his exams. He must have studied)

    b. Might have + V3

    Possible past.
    Example: Anto was absent. He might have been sick. (Anto
    doesn’t come in. He might be sick)

    c. Should have + V3

    Obligations that were not carried out in the past.
    Example: Anto didn’t pass. He
    should have studied.
    (Anto didn’t graduate. He should have studied
    )

    Facts contradictory: he didn’t study.

    d. Could have + V3

    An ability that wasn’t used in the past.
    Example:
    Anto could have done the
    homework himself.
    (Anto should be able to finish his own
    homework)

    Facts have opposite meanings: He didn’t do the homework himself.

    Modals formula

    To make it easier to make modal sentences, you can see the modal formula below.

    1. Present Modals

    The modals present formula, namely (S + Present Modals + Verb 1)

    2. Modals Past

    The formula for modals past, namely (S + Modals Past + Verb 1)

    3. Modals Perfect

    The modals perfect formula, namely (S + Modals Perfect+ Have + Verb 3)

    Use of Modals

    Modals can also be used in everyday life. The following is the use of modals in everyday
    life.

    • Can be used to express a necessity ( expressing necessity).
    • Can be used to show about the choice ( expressing preference ).
    • Can be used as a guide to find out abilities (showing abilities).
    • Can be used to give advice to others (advisability).
    • Can be used to ask for help (polite request).

    Examples of Modals Sentences and Their Meanings

    1. I can run fast. (I could/could run)
    2. You can use my motorcycle
    3. Can I borrow your notebook? (Can I borrow your notebook?)
    4. When I was a child, I could run fast
    5. Could you help me? (Can you help me?)
    6. You could talk to your teacher about your problem
    7. I will cook dinner for my family
    8. Will you please turn the TV off? (Can you turn off the TV?)
    9. Would you please show me the way to the bus station? (Can you show me the way to the bus stop?)
    10. I would rather stay at home than go for shopping
    11. May I borrow your dictionary? (Can I borrow your dictionary?)
    12. You may leave earlier
    13. John might be at the canteen
    14. You should stay at home
    15. I must go now
    16. You must not cheat on the exam
    17. Shall I close the window? (Should I close the window?)
    18. I shall go to school at 6:30

    Examples of Modals Questions

    Discussion: The conjunction ‘but’ states that the sentence that follows contradicts the
    previous statement, that is, even though he was invited, he didn’t want to: he instead chose to stay at
    home.
    The expression of choice of tendency to take action is expressed by the pattern of
    preference: would rather/ preference.

    2. I heard Baron speak English, French, Dutch, and even Japanese to tourists, he … the best tourist guide in
    town.
    a. should
    b. must
    be

    c. had better
    be

    d. e
    . would
    rather be

    Discussion: From the fact that “Baron can speak English, French, Dutch, and even Japanese
    to tourists”, it can be concluded that he must be the best tourist guide in his area.
    To
    express the conclusion of what happened/happened, the capital “must” is used.

    3. Maria _______ sing well. All her friends like her voice.
    a.
    can’t

    b.
    can

    c. may
    not

    d. shouldn’t

    Discussion: The correct auxiliary capital is ‘can’ which expresses the meaning CAN.

    4. When you have a small child in the house, you _____ leave small objects lying around. Such
    objects ____ be swallowed, causing serious injury or even death.

    a. may ;
    may not

    b. mustn’t ;
    may

    c. can ;
    can’t

    d. must ; may not

    Discussion: The correct word to fill the sentence is ‘mustn’t;may’. “You MUST
    NOT leave small objects lying around.
    Like objects that MAY be swallowed..”

    5. Yanti looks so pale and weak, she must be sick . The italic sentence
    means:

    a. she has to be sick
    b.
    maybe she is sick

    c. it’s possible that she is
    sick

    d. she is rather
    sick

    e. i conclude that she is
    sick

    Discussion: Because sentences that use must show certainty. The answer is
    E.

    That’s a brief explanation of modals and their usage. Easy to understand right?
    So the conclusion is as an auxiliary verb to know the context being discussed. Modals
    are usually placed before the main verb.

  • Modal Auxiliary Verbs: Definition, Examples, Formulas, & Problems

    When studying English, the term modal verb is certainly familiar. Modal verbs, or what is
    sometimes called modals, are auxiliary verbs in English.

    Modal verbs or Modal Verb is a type of verb that is used to show a modality.

    These modalities are possibility, capability, request, capacity, suggestion, command, and obligation.

    This modal verb is of course always used in everyday conversation. Consider the following
    description of modal verbs along with practice questions.

    Definition of modal verbs

    Modal verbs or modal verbs are an auxiliary verb, or auxiliary verb.

    This auxiliary verb must be used with the main verb. These modal verbs are used to express
    needs, possibilities, abilities, requests, as well as commands.
    Auxiliary verbs (auxiliary
    verbs) function to help other verbs to show the tenses and also the mood of the speaker.
    The
    forms of Auxiliary verbs are, do, be and have.

    Examples of modal verbs are:

    1. must,
    2. shall,
    3. should,
    4. would,
    5. can,
    6. could,
    7. may,
    8. might,
    9. will.

    This modal verb is different from other verbs. When using modal verbs, the third person does
    not need to add the final -s in the present tense.
    For example, ‘She cans’ or ‘He cans’, that
    is the wrong form.

    In addition, in the use of modal verbs must be followed by basic verbs such as,

    1. read (read),
    2. write (write),
    3. sing (sing),
    4. walk (walk),
    5. run (running) and others.

    Modal verbs do not have infinitive forms such as I would-ing, I can-ning, that is the wrong form.

    This modal verb gives information about the base or main verb it regulates. Modal verbs have a
    variety of communicative functions, but these functions can generally be associated with a scale from
    possibility to necessity.

    In learning this modal verb to use in writing, Sinaumed’s can learn it through the book 30 Minute Essay Writing,
    Writing Is Easy which explains various important things to write a good essay.

    Types of Modalities

    The following are the types of these modalities:

    • Epistemic modality, this modality is related to the possibility of a proposition being true or not true,
      including the possibility and certainty.
    • Deontic modality, this modality is related to the possibility and necessity in terms of freedom to act,
      including permission and obligation.
    • Dynamic modality, this dynamic modality is somewhat similar to deontic modality, however, dynamic modality
      is internal, such as the ability or willingness of the subject to act.

    An example of a distinction between epistemic and deontic modalities,

    1. You must be tired ‘ (you must be tired), in other words the speaker thinks that
      ‘you’ must be tired.
    2. You must leave, now ‘ (You must leave now), in other words the speaker requires or
      orders ‘you’ to leave immediately.

    Recommended Books Related to Modal Auxiliary
    Verb

    You can read this book to make it easier to understand the material in English. This book is
    also accompanied by interesting illustrations so that learning English can be more enjoyable.

    Hello! Easy English: English is
    Easy!

    English is a language that must be mastered by all human beings because it is widely used and taught formally in
    all educational institutions in this world.

    Of course, this makes the existence of supporting books in English an absolute must for those who are
    learning English.
    Of course this book includes all the grammar, vocabulary, phrases and
    conversations that will support our English speaking skills.
    This book is just a learning
    medium, but it all comes back to all readers.

    Those who are consistent and plan to master English, surely can!

    Generic Structure Modal Verb

    Modal verb formula:

    Positive Sentences

    They, we, I you, he, she, it + modal verbs + verb 1

    1. She can attend the party

    (He can attend the party)

    2. He will propose his girlfriend this Saturday

    (He is going to propose to his girlfriend this saturday)

    Negative sentences

    They, we, I you, he, she, it + modal verbs + not + verb 1

    example:

    1. They must not walk on the grass

    (They shouldn’t walk on the grass)

    2. You shall not pass

    (You can’t pass)

    Interrogative sentences

    Modal verbs + They, we, I you, he, she, it + verb 1

    example:

    1. Can you speak Japanese?

    (can you speak Japanese)

    2. May I ask a question?

    (May I ask?)

    In order for the modal verbs you use to match the message you are trying to convey, you must first know good
    English grammar and you can learn this in the book The 1st Student’s Choice : Complete English Grammar.

    Functions of modal verbs:

    1. Will: the modal verb ‘will’ means ‘will’.

    A. Will to express will

    I will join the party if my father allows me

    (I will come to the party if my father allows me)

    I will come to your house tonight

    (I will come to your house tonight)

    Will to make predictions

    The president will join the meeting in Singapore next week

    (The President will attend the meeting in Singapore next week)

    The CEO will sign an agreement with that company

    (CEO will sign an agreement with that company)

    C. Will to ask a request

    Will you have dinner with me?

    (Would you like to have dinner with me?)

    Will you marry me?

    (Will you marry me?)

    2. Would: the modal verb
    would, has the same meaning as will.

    The difference between the modal would and will is that the modal would is a past modal. In
    addition, the modal would can also be used for more formal sentences.

    A. Would to express willingness

    We would come last night, if you had invited us.

    (We will come last night, if only you invite us)

    He was a kind person, he would always help anyone.

    (He is a good person, he will help anyone)

    B. Would to make predictions

    I believe that my team will become a winner

    (I believe that my team will be the champion)

    He would be sitting here if he had not missed his bus

    (He would have sat here if only he hadn’t missed the bus)

    C. Would to ask a request

    Would you help me to take care of my sister?

    (Will you help me to look after my little sister?)

    Would you like something to drink?

    (Would you like something to drink?)

    D. Can: the modal verb can, means ‘can’.

    Similar to the modal verb will, the modal verb can is the present modal.

    1. Can to express ability

    I can show you my project

    (I can show my project)

    My mom can make strawberry cake.

    (My mom can make strawberry shortcake)

    2. Can to ask permission

    Can we go home right now?

    (Can we go home now?)

    Can you take me to the mall?

    (Can you take me to the mall?)

    3. Can to express a possibility

    We can go to Paris in February, because we have a week off.

    (We can go to Paris in February, because we have an empty week)

    How can you be on a diet if you eat so much chocolate?

    (How can you diet if you eat so much chocolate?)

    E. Could: the modal verb
    could, has the same meaning as can.

    The difference between the modal could and can is that the modal could is a past modal. In
    addition, the modal could also be used for more formal sentences.

    1. Could to express ability

    We could have lunch early today.

    (We can have an early lunch today)

    We could drive to Bandung this Saturday.

    (We can drive to Bandung this Saturday)

    2. Could to ask permission

    Could I pay by cash?

    (Can I pay by cash)

    Could I sit here? another bench is full.

    (Can I sit here? the other benches are full)

    3. Could to express a possibility

    The snowstorm could get worse tonight.

    (blizzard could be worse tonight)

    It could be blue, or black.

    (It could be blue, or black)

    F. May: the modal verb may, means ‘maybe’.

    The modal may can also express possibility, request permission and give advice.

    1. May to state the possibility

    She may come to my house after lunch.

    (He will probably come to my house after lunch)

    I think I may go to the hospital today.

    (I think I might go to the hospital today)

    2. May to ask permission

    May I visit grandfather this Sunday?

    (Can I visit Grandpa this Sunday?)

    May I drop you at the hotel?

    (Can I take you to the hotel?)

    3. May to express a suggestion

    You may not eat this cake if you have an allergy to peanuts

    (You may not eat this cake if you are allergic to peanuts)

    You may not go to the party if it’s snowing today.

    (You might not go to the party if it snows today)

    G. Might: the modal verb
    might, has the same meaning as may.

    The difference between the modal might and may is that the modal might is a past modal. In
    addition, the modal might can also be used in more formal sentences.

    1. Might to state a possibility

    Justin Bieber might go to Indonesia this year.

    (Justin Bieber might be going to Indonesia this year)

    Her father might sell their house.

    (Her father might just sell their house)

    H. Might to express a suggestion or
    criticism

    You might have told me you weren’t coming to my wedding.

    (You probably told me that you won’t come to my wedding)

    1. Might to give you an offer

    Might I offer you to try our delicious desserts?

    (May I offer you to try our delicious dessert?)

    2. Might to ask permission

    If Blackpink comes to Indonesia, might I go to their concert?

    (If Blackpink comes to Indonesia, can I go to their concert?)

    Might I ask for your phone number?

    (May I ask your phone number?)

    I. Must: the modal verb must, means ‘must’.

    The modal verb must, is the present modal form. The modal must, can also be replaced with the
    word have to or has to.

    1. Must to express necessity

    You must tell your parents now.

    (You should tell your parents now)

    I must talk to her about my new project.

    (I have to tell him about my new project)

    2. Must to declare prohibition

    You must not come home after 9 o’clock pm

    (you are not allowed to go home after 9 pm)

    You must not leave anything here

    (you can’t leave anything here)

    3. Must to state a certainty

    This exam must be easy for her.

    (This exam must be easy for him)

    That must be wonderful.

    (That must be awesome)

    J. Ought to: the
    modal verb ought to, has the meaning ‘whichever is more appropriate’.

    The modal verb ought to is a form of present capital. The modal word ought to is a semi-modal
    because the modal verb is followed by ‘to’, unlike modal verbs in general.

    1. Ought to to express a necessity.

    You should do more exercise and drink more water.

    (You should exercise more and drink more water)

    You should eat your breakfast now before the school bus comes.

    (You should have breakfast now before the school bus comes)

    2. Oought to to state a possibility

    The concert ought to only take about three hours so we’ll be home by 1 am

    (The concert should only take about three hours, so we’ll be home by 1 p.m.)

    There ought to be some good concerts this year.

    (Should be some good concerts this year)

    3. Oought to to express suggestions

    You oughtn’t to have said that about her father.

    (You shouldn’t say that about his father)

    You should use a moisturizer to moisten your skin.

    (You should use a moisturizer to moisturize your skin)

    K. Shall: the modal verb shall, means
    ‘must’.

    The modal verb shall, is the present modal form. The modal shall comes first after the subject
    and before the other verbs.
    The modal shall is usually used with subjects I and We.

    1. Shall to submit an offer

    Shall I carry your luggage?

    (Should I carry your luggage?)

    Shall I come round to your house tonight?

    (should I come to your house tonight?)

    1. Shall to express suggestions

    Shall we meet again on Sunday?

    (Should we meet again on Sunday?)

    Shall i tell my mom about this?

    (Should I tell my mom about this?)

    2. Shall to express predictions and wishes

    We shall remember this moment forever

    (We must remember this moment forever)

    3. Shall to declare an order

    This window shall be kept closed.

    (This window must be closed)

    L. Should: the modal verb should, means
    ‘should’.

    The modal verb should can be used to give advice.

    1. Should to state about
    what is best to do

    There should be more public transportations.

    (There should be more public transportation)

    There should be more strawberries on the cake.

    (There should be more strawberries in the cake)

    2. Should to express suggestions

    You should tell your boyfriend about last night.

    (You should have told your boyfriend about last night)

    You should change your e-mail password.

    (You should change your email password)

    Modal Auxiliary Verb practice

    1. There are plenty of potatoes. You __ buy any.

    (There are lots of potatoes, you don’t have to buy them)

    2. __ you please call my mom for me?

    (Can you call my mom for me?)

    3. __ you teach me how to make brownies? You’re so good at it.

    (Can you teach me to make brownies? you are very good at it)

    4. You __ walk on grass.

    (You shouldn’t walk on the grass)

    5. __ I ask you a question?

    (May I ask you a question?)

    6. Don’t forget to take an umbrella today. It __ rain.

    (don’t forget to bring an umbrella today. It might rain)

    You can find various other English questions in the Top Module TOEFL Test book Indonesian Edition by the Smart
    Genesis Team which can help you hone your English skills.

    Answers to the Modal Auxiliary Verb exercise

    (There are lots of potatoes, you don’t have to buy them)

    2. (Could) you please call my mom for me?

    (Can you call my mom for me?)

    3. (Can) you teach me how to make brownies? You’re so good at it.

    (Can you teach me to make brownies? you are very good at it)

    4. You (must not) walk on grass.

    (You shouldn’t walk on the grass)

    5. (May) I ask you a question?

    (May I ask you a question?)

    6. Don’t forget to take an umbrella today. It (might) rain.

    (don’t forget to bring an umbrella today. It might rain)

    Articles Related to Modal Auxiliary Verb

  • Mobile Inventor and Mobile Development History

    Mobile Inventor – It is common for everyone that technological advances make it easier for us to carry out various kinds of activities. In addition, technological advances can connect someone who is far away. For example, those of us who live in city A, can contact or establish communication with someone in city B, so that communication will be well established. Therefore, with technology, it will be easy for us to find out the condition or condition of someone we love, even though they are quite far apart. The name of the technology that functions as a means of communication is the telephone.

    Usually this phone will be placed in the house or placed in a public place (public telephone). However, along with the times, technology has also developed. Previously, the telephone could only be used in one place or could not be carried anywhere, now it can be used in different places and can be put in a bag or also in a shirt or trouser pocket. A telephone that can be carried anywhere is known as a mobile phone or in Indonesian it is better known as a “mobile phone”.

    Nowadays, almost everyone has a mobile phone , maybe you also have a mobile phone . In addition, the use of mobile phones in this modern era can be considered quite important because almost all activities carried out will be connected to mobile phones , be it for taking notes, making calls, sending messages, and so on.

    The cellphones that we use today are always developing, one of the developments can be seen through its shape which is getting thinner and thinner. Therefore, in its development, mobile phones are divided into several generations. Each generation is a refinement of the previous generation. Therefore, every time a new mobile phone appears , it must have better specifications.

    The cellphone itself was first discovered by someone named Martin Cooper. Therefore, the cell phone that was first discovered by Martin Cooper can be regarded as the first generation cell phone . After the first generation of cellphones appeared , in the following years a new generation appeared.

    In this article, we will discuss more about the brief biography of Martin Cooper and the brief history of the development of mobile phones . So, happy reading, Sinaumed’s.

    Definition of Mobile

    Mobile consists of two phrases in English, namely hand which means hand or grip, and phone means cellphone or telephone, so that it can be said that a mobile phone is a mobile phone. Therefore, as the name suggests, we can hold this phone anywhere and anytime because there is no need for an antenna with a cable when using it. This is the same as the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), a mobile phone is a telephone with a wireless antenna that you can carry anywhere.

    Basically, in Indonesia there are two types of wireless mobile phones, namely GSM ( Global System for Mobile Telecommunications ) and CDMA ( Code Division Multiple Access ). Usually in Indonesia everything related to cellular telecommunications is always connected to an association called the Indonesian Cellular Telecommunications Association or abbreviated as ATSI.

    At the beginning of its emergence, mobile phones were always synonymous with luxury goods, so only certain people had these communication tools. However, along with the times and globalization, cellphones are no longer a luxury item, in fact, almost everyone has electronic devices that have these various functions. Many people already have cell phones because every activity we do is usually related to cell phones .

    Mobile phones , which are increasingly equipped with sophisticated features, allow users not only to make phone calls, but also to record sound or video, take photos of things, watch movies, and even use a mobile phone to study and do business . Therefore, many people already have their own home business and can promote it easily.

    Mobile phones that are no longer a luxury item can actually connect us with someone who is abroad. In addition, more importantly, by using a mobile phone , various kinds of work can be completed effectively and efficiently.

    Although, mobile phones have many benefits, especially making it easier for us to do something, but you should not play mobile phones too often because it can interfere with our health. It would be nice to use mobile phones wisely so that our health is not disturbed.

    Mobile Inventor: Martin Cooper

    Martin Cooper was the first person to invent a cell phone or cell phone. Even he himself never imagined that he could make a small, cordless cell phone that could be taken anywhere. Martin Cooper has the full name, namely Martin Marty Cooper and he was born in Chicago, Illinois, United States on December 26, 1928.

    In 1950, he earned his bachelor’s degree in Electrical Engineering . Martin Cooper who was very interested in electronics chose to continue his studies at the Institute of Technology and he earned a Masters degree in electronics engineering in 1957. He pursued his Masters education after leaving the United States Navy. Prior to conducting research on cell phones, Martin Cooper joined the United States Navy and he was assigned to a United States Navy destroyer.

    Martin Cooper really wanted to communicate with other people personally and freely and without using a telephone, so he thought of creating an electronic device like that. Until 1970, he began to conduct research and development of a wireless communication device. Motorola is a telecommunications company based in the United States.

    Around the 1970s, Martin Cooper was commissioned by John F. Mitchell (Chiroola’s chief portable communications project engineer) to hold the position of lead engineer in the car division ( carphone ). Then, John F. Mitchell and Martin Cooper thought about how to make a communication tool that could not only be used in the car. Until finally, Martin Cooper was entrusted with leading research on mobile devices or cellphones .

    After much thought, Martin Cooper finally came up with the idea that a wireless communication device must be small and light so that it is easy to hold and can become a portable device. In order to create the mobile phone prototype, in 1972, Martin Cooper took 90 days.

    Then, the mobile phone prototype that he had found began to be tested on April 3, 1973. Martin Cooper is believed to be the first inventor as well as the first person to make calls or communicate using a cellular cellphone prototype. It didn’t stop there, the incident of making calls with cell phones was carried out in front of journalists and people who were walking in New York City. The first call made by Martin Cooper was addressed to Dr. Joel S. Engel, he was the head of research at Bell Labs and the first sentence that came out at that time was “ Joe, I’m calling you from a “real” cellular telephone. A portable hand-held telephone .”

    It was only in 1973 or more precisely on October 17, 1973, Martin Cooper and the engineers who helped him create a mobile phone and John F. Mitchell began patenting his findings and his invention was named the Radio Telephone System . They started submitting their invention with patent number 3906166. It was only in September 1975, that the Radio Telephone System invention had a patent on their name.

    Thanks to his invention, Martin Cooper was dubbed the “Father of the Cellular Telephone (cellphone)”. Although Martin Cooper is believed to be the inventor of the cellular telephone, he has always said that his findings were thanks to teamwork.

    After the cell phone was first discovered by Martin Cooper, the cell phone continues to experience development or improvement. In the end, cellular phones were created that could not only be used to make calls, but also for other things, such as sending messages, making videos, taking photos, and so on.

    A Brief History of Cellphones

    The history of the cellphone itself is actually divided into four generations, where the first generation is a cell phone created by Martin Cooper. Therefore it can be said that Martin Cooper’s cell phone was the forerunner of the cell phones that we use today. Here are four generations of cellphones that you need to know about.

    1. Generation I (1973)

    The mobile phone or mobile phone in the first generation was discovered in 1973 and the inventor was Martin Cooper. In this first generation, mobile phones are often referred to as the 1G generation and are also known as AMPS (frequency between 825 Mhz to 894 Mhz). Therefore, this generation of mobile phones can be said to be analog. Talking about the weight or weight of the first generation mobile phone, it weighs around 2.5 pounds or 1.1 kg. Therefore, the first generation mobile phone is a fairly heavy cellular phone.

    Meanwhile, the length of the cellphone is around 10 inches or 25 cm, making it difficult to put it in a shirt or pants pocket. The battery in the first generation cellphone only lasted 20 minutes, so we couldn’t use it for too long. The mobile phone created by Martin Cooper is known as the DynaTAC ( Dynamic Adaptive Total Area Coverage ).

    2. Generation II (around 1990s)

    The next generation is the second generation (around the 1990s) from the history of the development of mobile phones or cell phones. Increasingly advanced technology makes this generation of mobile phones increasingly sophisticated. This sophistication can be seen in the use of chips on mobile phones and using 2G technology. This generation of cell phones is expected to appear around the 1990s. At that time, the United States was already using CDMA ( Code Division Multiple Access ) technology. Meanwhile, in Europe using GSM GSM ( Global System for Mobile Telecommunications ) technology.

    In addition to the use of chips in mobile phones, in this generation, the analog signal changes to a digital signal. even the features of this generation of mobile phones are not only being able to make calls, but can send messages and call waiting. We can find this generation of mobile phones in the Nokia 1011, Motorola International 3200, Motorola StarTAC, and Nokia 9000 Communicator.

    3. Generation III (around 2000s)

    Entering the 2000s meant entering the third generation of mobile phones where the use of increasingly sophisticated technology, namely 3G. With the use of 3G technology, the range of signals on cell phones is wider, so that communication is more comfortable. Basically, in the world of 3G signal telecommunication, there are 3 standards, namely EDGE ( Enhanced Data Rates for GSM Evolution ), Wideband-CDMA , and CDMA 2000.

    Not only that, the third generation of mobile phones began to include several operating systems, so they are often known as smartphones or smart phones. Therefore, the features possessed by third generation mobile phones can be said to be close to computer functions. In general, operating systems are used, such as Android, iOS, Symbian, and Windows Mobile.

    4. Generation IV (starting from the 2010s)

    The last generation of mobile phone development is generation IV or better known as Fourth Generation (4G) technology. In addition, the technology offered in this generation of mobile phones can be connected to wireless technologies, such as Wireless Broadband (WiBro), 802.16e, CDMA, wireless LAN , Bluetooth , and so on. Therefore, users who use this generation of mobile phones will get several benefits, such as users can use the operating system at any time, have high speed, signal coverage can reach globally, and so on.

    In fact, users can play online games , watch movies, and use other multimedia features. The first IV generation mobile phone or cell phone was the HTC Corporation.

    Mobile Function

    After discussing the history and brief biography of the inventor of the cellphone, Martin Cooper, now what will be discussed is the function of the cellphone .

    1. As a Communication Tool Between Humans

    The main function of a mobile phone is to be able to communicate with other people without using an airplane cable. This first function has actually existed since the first cell phone was invented by Martin Cooper. It feels incomplete, if a cellphone cannot be used to communicate or make calls to other people.

    2. Looking for Data, News, Information with Internet Services

    The technology on mobile phones is increasingly sophisticated, making mobile phones able to use internet services. In this era of globalization, internet services can be said to be quite important because they can easily search for data, news, and information, both domestically and abroad.

    3. Entertainment

    In this case, the intended entertainment function is being able to play games , being able to watch YouTube applications , being able to listen to music, and even being able to watch movies. However, the thing that needs to be underlined from all this is that internet service is needed. If there is no internet service, then the entertainment function can be said to be less than optimal. However, to do things like watch movies, watch YouTube , and so on, you can only use generation IV cellphones .

    4. Storing Data

    The more sophisticated a mobile phone , the greater the storage memory it has. Therefore, the next function of a cellphone is to store data, such as photos, videos, files, and so on.

    5. Sending Messages

    Besides functioning to make calls to other people, mobile phones also function to send messages, such as SMS ( Short Message Service ) and chatting . With the sending message feature, it will be easy for us to receive news from other people. In fact, we can send electronic messages or better known as “send email “.

    6. Create Photos and Videos

    Mobile phones that are increasingly sophisticated make their features even more sophisticated, such as features for taking photos and making videos. This is because the current mobile phone already has a camera feature that is almost similar to a real camera. In fact, it can be used to make a video recording that has a sale value.

    Conclusion

    Cellphones or cell phones are technologies that are always improving, so that they can make it easier for users to do a job. In addition, mobile phones that are increasingly sophisticated have internet services, so that users can get domestic or foreign information easily. More importantly, this cellphone is no longer a luxury item or you could say it is a must-have item.

    Source: From various sources

  • Mites are myths, these are definitions, types, characteristics and examples

    Mite is – As long as humans live in this world, they cannot be separated from the past,
    because it is with the past that humans can go to the future.
    In addition, the past can also
    coexist with the future or the time we are currently living.
    Talking about the past is always
    attached to events that happened before, whether it was in the form of events that really happened or were
    just myths.

    The myth itself is usually formed in a story that is spread by generations, from parents to children, then
    to grandchildren, and so on.
    The mythical stories that we know today are also often called myth
    stories.
    On this occasion, we will discuss more about myths, starting from the definition,
    types, characteristics, functions, and examples.
    Watch this article to the end, Sinaumed’s.

    Mites are myths

    Mites, or what we usually know as myths, are usually beliefs, supernatural objects, spirits, gods, or people who
    have supernatural abilities, and a kind of fairy tale related to past creatures.

    Mites have a historical background, or many believe that a story that is happening is a story that is
    supernatural and occult.
    According to the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), myths have a
    historical background, are believed to be stories that really happened to the community, are considered
    sacred, and contain many mysteries.

    Myth is a kind of fairy tale related to people’s beliefs. Mythological stories usually refer
    to beliefs and myths about gods and characters with supernatural abilities.

    In addition, myths or myths are also referred to as stories that are in the community or stories that
    contain animistic beliefs that resemble superstitions.
    Mythological stories are believed to
    have happened and are considered sacred in society.
    The method of telling myths is passed down
    from generation to generation, so it is not known who the author is and people who often tell myths are
    often called storytellers.

    Storytellers have heard this from generations before, such as from their parents’ generation, and even from
    their grandfather’s generation.
    Mythical characters consist of people who are holy or have
    supernatural powers, and those who come from or have a connection with the upper world, namely the gods or
    heaven.

    So, there is an actor who came down from heaven and was given by God to make a group of people do good to
    the angels.
    In addition, mythical figures, celestial bodies that can fly, players who can
    achieve extraordinary feats that humans cannot do.

    Mites or myths are always characterized by gods or demigods. What happened in another world,
    or what happened in a world that was never imagined.
    The world’s tradition setting in myth,
    usually in the form of earth where angels and humans live, and a nameless setting.

    In an environment where gods and heavens live, angels are considered holy places, but when they live on
    earth they are not so described.
    However, these places are not considered as random places,
    such as holy places, with respect to events experienced or unusual by our ancestors.

    Myths generally talk about the origin of the universe, the world, the first humans, the occurrence of
    death, the characteristics of animal forms, terrain, natural phenomena, and so on.
    However,
    myths also tell about the adventures of the gods, their love stories, the stories of their relatives, the
    stories of their wars, and much more.

    Definition of Mites According to Experts

    1. KBBI

    According to the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI) a myth is a story and has a historical background, is believed
    by the community to be a story that really happened, is considered sacred, contains many miraculous things, and
    is generally characterized by gods.

    2. Wikipedia

    Furthermore, according to Wikipedia, a myth or myth is part of a folklore in the form of a story set in the past,
    contains an interpretation of the universe (such as the creation of the world and the existence of creatures in
    it), and is considered to have really happened by the owner of the story or its adherents.

    3. According to Harsojo (1988)

    According to Harsojo, myth or myth is a belief system of a group of people, which stands on a foundation that
    explains sacred stories related to the past.

    4. According to Bascom (Danandjaja, 1986)

    According to Bascom, the notion of myth or myth is folk prose stories characterized by gods or demigods that
    occurred in another world (heaven) in the past and were considered to have really happened by story masters or
    their adherents and related to the occurrence of places, the universe. , gods, customs and sacred tales.

    5. J. van Baal (Minsarwati, 2002)

    J.van Baal states that myths or myths are stories within the framework of a religious system which in the past or
    present have been or are currently valid as religious truths.

    Types of Mites

    Mite has several types, including:

    1. Mites of Creation

    The creation myth is a story that talks about an event that tells how something happened.

    2. Cosmogenic Mites

    The cosmogenic myth is a story that exists among the people that tells about the creation of the universe.
    However, this creation can occur because of an intermediary.

    3. Myth of Origins

    Origin myths are mythical stories that tell about the origins of living things, such as animals or plant
    species.
    Apart from that, this type of myth also tells about the beginning of an institution
    standing.

    4. Mite Transformation

    Transformation myths are myths or myths that tell about changes in human or world conditions in the future.

    5. Theogonic Myth

    Theogonic myths are myths or myths that tell about gods and supernatural beings. It is a myth
    about gods and supernatural beings.

    6. Anthropogenic myths

    Anthropogenic myth is a myth that tells about a process of human occurrence in this world.

    Mites Features

    To make it easier to understand what a myth is, we also need to know the characteristics of a myth.
    The following are the characteristics of myths that need to be known.

    1. The story in the myth is believed to have really happened by his followers.
    2. The story sounds strange and difficult to understand with logic, but it is very important for society.
    3. The story is simple and consists of a few simple motives and actions.
    4. The storyline involves certain rituals. The stories contained in it are considered as
      something sacred, so it should not be done carelessly.
    5. The background of a myth story is usually the past.
    6. One type of personality that must be included in mythology is related to local culture and society.

    Mites function

    Mite itself has several functions that you need to know, namely:

    1. Mite serves as the most effective educational tool to reinforce and communicate certain cultural values,
      social norms and beliefs.
    2. Mites serve as the development of meaningful and functional symbols to explain environmental phenomena.
    3. Mites serve as guidelines for people who believe in promoting social solidarity among members, so that they
      can distinguish one community from another.
    4. In general, myths will be developed to convey and enhance certain cultural values, ideas and knowledge, and
      help stimulate the development of creative thinking.

    Mite Story Example

    In Indonesia itself, actually there are lots of myths or myths, for example, in almost one area there will
    be a myth that is inherent in the community.
    Here is an example of a myth story.

    1. The story of Dani Jaka Tarub and Nawan Uran

    This story begins when a young man named Jaka Tarub enters the forest and happens to see seven fairies
    bathing in the river.
    Fascinated by the beauty of an angel, Jaka Tarub hid one of his
    shawls.

    Even though the stolen shawl is one of the conditions for them (the angels) to return to heaven.
    The owner of the stolen angel shawl is named Nawan Uran.

    After that, the angel could not return until finally the shawl thief and the angel got married and had a
    daughter named Nawang Sih.
    After a long time after the marriage had passed, it turned out that
    Jaka Tarub’s lie was exposed, and Nawan Uran’s angel scarf was found, which made him angry and left Nawan
    Uran permanently from Jaka Tarub.

    2. Mythological History of Nyi Roro Kidul

    There are several examples of legendary myths that are believed to still exist in Java, namely the story of Nyi
    Roro Kidul which tells us that in ancient times there was a kingdom called Pakuan Pajajaran, which was ruled by
    a wise and wise king, King Siliwangi.

    The king had many children, but one with the same beautiful face and gentleness as his father.
    The princess was named Putri Kandita, because of these advantages, the king wanted to crown the
    princess as the heir to the kingdom.

    However, the children of the other mistresses were jealous and did not want Princess Kandita to be crowned
    Queen.
    Then, they conspired to thwart the plan by suffering from stomach ulcers that would not
    heal for Her Royal Highness Princess Kandita and the Empress.

    The disease cost her the loss of her mother, and what saddens her even more is her father’s plan to banish
    the princess to the forest for fear of spreading the disease.
    This made the princess sad and
    ran away to the South Beach where she bathed, and all her ailments disappeared.
    It turned out
    that last night’s dream became the inspiration that made the princess heal and strengthen.

    When the king heard that the princess had recovered, he wanted to get his daughter back. Many
    princes wanted to propose to her, but could not match the magic of the princess.
    So the men
    just became loyal followers of the princess’ bodyguards.
    Since then, Putri Kandita has been
    known as the ruler of the southern seas of Java, Ratu Nyi Roro Kidul, and this legend is still accepted
    today.

    3. The Mythical Story of Aji Saka

    The following myth example is the story of Aji Saka. The legend of Aji Saka tells of a young
    man who becomes a hero and brings civilization and order to the land of Java.
    Because he
    managed to defeat the evil man-eating giant who used to be the ruler of the island.

    Thanks to his success, Aji Saka was later crowned the King of Medan Chamran. He brought his
    family to the palace.
    Then, because of his just and wise reign, he was able to lead the Medan
    Chamran Kingdom to the Golden Age, so that people lived in peace, peace, prosperity and prosperity.

    4. Sundanese mythological stories about King
    Siliwangi

    Prabu Siliwangi is one of the most respected Sundanese people and has even become an important icon.
    Prabu Siliwangi is the king of the Kingdom of Pajajaran. According to the story, King
    Siliwangi had extraordinary powers.
    Until one day, King Siliwangi fought his son Kian Santang
    because he was asked to convert to Islam.

    Unfortunately, Prabu Siliwangi persisted in his belief. He was born in a forest south of
    Garut.
    There he turned into a white tiger with the soldiers. History is still
    associated with the people of Garut.
    If you go to the South Garut (Sung Kang) area, ask the
    people there.
    There must be an interesting story about King Siliwangi and his myths that
    developed there.
    Until now, the name of Prabu Siliwangi is considered sacred there.

    5. Wishing Tree (Indian Mythology)

    The wanderer walks erratically in the scorching desert. He looks very tired. He
    is also thirsty and hungry.
    After walking a long way, he found a fairly shady resting place.
    When I was resting, I could see the shadow of a tree in the distance.

    He was delighted to see her and said, ” I wish I could drink some water .” Suddenly he
    found a pitcher of cold water in front of him.
    The traveler was overjoyed and started
    drinking cold water from the pitcher.
    After drinking and quenching his thirst, the traveler
    again asked, ”
    Do I have anything to eat now ?”

    As soon as he equipped, dozens of delicacies appeared in front of him. Tourists immediately
    eat deliciously.
    After eating, he started to think about how this all happened.

    After careful consideration, he found out that the tree he saw before was a Kalpa Vriksha. It
    is a magic tree.
    If you look at a tree and ask, your wish will come true. Tourists
    do not waste this opportunity.

    He immediately asked for a soft bed and was immediately allowed. A bed appeared in front of
    him.
    The traveler lay down his weary body and rested. The traveler feels pain in
    his leg.

    Then he asked someone to massage his feet. In fact, a young woman appeared and started
    massaging the travelers’ feet.
    Finally the traveler fell asleep. The traveler fell
    asleep for a long time.

    When I woke up, the young lady who was massaging him was still by his side. Tourists have
    started to think differently.
    How could this happen? Can I
    get a lot of things just by begging without working?
    Or just a trick of the devil?
    he muttered.
    Suddenly, a demon appeared on a young woman after the
    traveler thought about it.
    The demon laughed from the bottom of his heart.
    Then the wanderer said, “
    Oh, is this demon eating me?

    The demon began to open its mouth wide to eat the wanderer. He was surprised when the traveler
    saw this.
    He jumped out of bed and ran as fast as he could. After walking a long
    way, the traveler turned around.
    Apparently the devil didn’t follow him. He
    breathed a sigh of relief.

    6. The Myth of the Origin of Rice: Dewi Sri

    In ancient times, there was an encounter with a god. Dewa Guru and Dewa Narada attended the
    meeting as advisors to Dewa Guru.
    Lord Narada has a very powerful gem called Retno Gemilang.
    Anyone who uses the Magic Stone will be stronger, will not need to eat or sleep, and will not burn
    when exposed to fire.

    Guru Dewa became interested in gems and started trying to save them. When he was held, his
    hand was not strong enough to lift Mustika any further, so Mustika collapsed and no one could hold it except
    Dewa Antaboga.
    java dragon. Mustica is in the mouth of Dewa Anantaboga.

    Dewa Antaboga put it on the Butterfly. not long after, Dewa Guru came to Dewa Antaboga to get
    his Gem back, but the Butterfly could not be opened.
    The angry Lord then threw the Butterfly
    away.
    After the destruction of
    Kupu, the character Les Tonneaux appeared
    in the form of a baby, who was later named Niken Tisnawati.
    As she grew up, Niken Tisnawati
    grew into a beautiful girl until Dewa Guru fell in love with her and proposed to her.

    Niken Tisnawati agreed to the proposal, provided that all of her food will fill you (Dewa Guru) for the rest of
    her life and her clothes will never wear out.
    Dewa Guru accepted the request and asked Dewa Kala
    to look for Niken as requested.
    During his search, Dewa Kara met Dewi Sri who was taking a
    bath.

    Dewa Kala fell in love with Dewi Sri and chased her to Earth. Sir Vishnu saw this and shot him
    in the leg until he fainted.
    However, Dewa Kala wanted to reach Dewi Sri until she
    crawled.

    Dewi Sri was surprised to read the mantra and turned Dewa Kala into a pig. As a result, Dewa
    Kala could not return to heaven and Dewa Guru could not meet the requirements to marry Niken Tisnawati.
    Hearing this, Dewa Guru came to Niken Tisnawati and forced her to marry him. Niken
    Tisnawati kept refusing until finally Dewa Guru killed her.

    Sir Narada heard this and buried Niken Tisnawati, and suddenly various plants appeared on her grave.
    Coconuts grow from the head, banana trees grow from the hands, corn trees grow from the teeth, and
    rice grows from the hair.
    Not only that, on Earth, Dewi Sri is still being hunted by Kala, who
    transforms into a pig.
    Then, Dewi Sri decided to stay in the rice field.

    That is the meaning of myth , the characteristics, functions, types, and examples of
    myth stories that have been explained.
    After knowing more about myths, does Sinaumed’s want to
    do research on myth stories in Indonesia?
    Together with sinaumedia, you can get
    #MoreWithReading information.

  • Minimalist Koi Pond Design

    Minimalist Koi Pond Design – The presence of a minimalist koi pond in the yard of the house can not only add to the impression of being beautiful and beautiful. But it can also add to the coolness and peace of mind of the occupants of the house. Hearing the gurgling sound of running water and seeing koi fish swimming beautifully can make an upset heart instantly happy. However, before Sinaumed’s started making minimalist koi ponds. We recommend that Sinaumed’s need to pay attention to several important things. Starting from the floor plan and the desired pool design and other important components.

    As previously explained, the presence of a koi pond can make a house seem more beautiful and beautiful. Especially if the koi pond is added with green plant ornaments planted around the pond area. Then to add to the natural impression, we can add a fountain ornament which makes the eye even more interested in looking at the koi pond. That’s what makes some people prefer to make a pond instead of just using an aquarium.

    Things to Look For When Making a Koi Pond

    It should be understood that keeping koi fish has many advantages. However, it is not easy to care for this fish which is said to have come from Japan. Therefore, the quality of this ornamental fish must always be maintained. This is closely related to the design and also how to make a good and correct koi pond. Koi fish need to be placed in a large pond. As for the water requirement, every inch of fish, compared to 10 gallons of water. This is not without reason, koi fish can live longer if they are in a place where the water is always clean and the quality is always maintained.

    Apart from having to pay attention to the volume of water, in making a minimalist koi pond you also need to pay attention to the pH of the water in the pond. Try to check the pH of the water before and after the fish are put in the pond. Especially for koi fish, the pH of the water needed is around 7. This amount is an ideal pH. However, if the pH of the water is too high or more than 7, it is feared that it has the potential to spread ammonia poison to koi fish. Meanwhile, the pH of the water can also decrease to 5.5 due to the activity of fish, bacteria and plants. Of course this will also be dangerous for koi fish if not paid close attention.

    The size of the koi pond should be adjusted to the number of koi fish to be kept. In addition, making the manufacturing channel is also one of the things that must be considered. Normally koi ponds should be cleaned every 6 months or 2 times a year.

    Koi Pond Site Selection

    The next thing to consider when you want to build a minimalist koi pond is to determine the land you want to use. Will the fish pond be built in the yard or in the house. This will later affect the intake of sunlight received by the fish. Because, koi fish pond should get enough sunlight. Not too hot and not too humid or not exposed to sunlight. A good lighting system will trigger maximum fish development. However, there will also be side effects that can arise, one of which is the development of moss or algae in the pond. So that the koi pond water will quickly change color.

    Koi ponds that are built inside the house must also be endeavored to get enough sunlight. This is because koi fish need natural warmth from sunlight for at least three hours per day. If too little sun enters, this will make the koi fish color fade. Therefore, try to make the pool well-lit. If the koi pond is in the house. So Sinaumed’s could shine it using an incandescent lamp instead of sunlight.

     

    Koi Pond Design Draft

    There are three basic forms of koi ponds, namely circles or ellipses, squares, and freeforms. For Sinaumed’s who want to make koi fish with a formal concept, they can apply a square koi pond. This style is perfect as a minimalist koi pond design made indoors for official purposes. Meanwhile, elliptical or circular koi ponds are perfect for homes that are luxurious, elegant, and also traditional.

    Then finally, for the free form of koi ponds, it is suitable for application in tourist attractions and lodging such as hotels or villas. Free-form fish ponds can also add to the natural impression of the countryside in the yard.

    Filtration System Design

    The purpose of having a filter system is to strive for oxygen in the pond water to be sufficient for the life of koi fish. Because, oxygen is needed for the digestive process of koi fish. Meanwhile, the results of koi digestion will certainly emit a lot of dirt every day. Where the dirt contains ammonia which is toxic to koi fish. Therefore, a filtering system is needed. Besides being useful for producing oxygen continuously, it is also useful for making toxic substances from the digestion of koi fish.

    There are two types of filters that can be selected and used to apply to minimalist koi ponds. The first is a mechanical filter and the second is a biological filter. A mechanical filter will work by flowing water into a filtered container such as gravel, sand, sieve filter, foam, brush material, cotton, or jap-matt. Meanwhile, the biological filter will work through other living things that decompose the dirt in the pond. Living things that can act as filters are water hyacinth, water jasmine, aquatic plants, and umbrella plants.

    Determining Koi Pond Size

    This one stage does require accuracy and precise calculations. So that the koi pond that is made can be in accordance with the design plan. Ideally, koi fish that are 30 cm in size should be kept in a pond that is 1 meter deep. Meanwhile, for koi fish that are about 30 to 40 cm in size, it is necessary to make a pond with a depth of 1 to 1.5 meters. However, for koi that are larger than 40 cm, the pond depth should be 1.5 meters. In addition, the steps to determine the size of the pond also need to pay attention to the fish population that will be kept in the pond. If the number of koi is too small, it will cause the koi to have difficulty determining food.

    Vice versa, if there are too many koi, the fish will fight for food and oxygen. Now, the ideal number of koi fish in a pond is calculated by a koi that can occupy three times their body size. To make it easier for us to build a koi pond, we can make a floor plan first. Write down detailed descriptions of sizes that have been adjusted to the calculations that have been done before. In addition, also consider the desired minimalist koi pond design. This is done to avoid discrepancies in the size of the pond in the manufacturing process.

    Koi Pond Development Process

    The process of building a koi pond will go through three stages. First is digging the ground, then casting, and finally laying the bricks and plastering or plastering the koi pond. In the first stage, the excavation process is carried out based on the size of the pond that has been determined beforehand. The thing that needs to be considered is not to let the ground water wet and spray the dug hole. If water has soaked into the hole even though the excavation has not reached the size it should be, then the water needs to be sucked up first using a pump. This aims to keep the pond excavation dry, thus facilitating the next process.

    Then the next process is casting and laying bricks. This process can only be done if the excavation hole is completely dry. Casting must be done quickly to prevent seepage of water from the ground. After the casting process is complete, we will enter the last process, namely pool plastering. The purpose of this process is to smooth the surface of the pond. So that the koi fish are not injured when they rub against the walls or surface of the pond.

    Minimalist Koi Pond Design

    1. Minimalist Garden-style Koi Pond Design

    The appearance of the koi pond design above looks very beautiful. Because, in the pool area will be filled with various plants and also green trees. As the name implies, this minimalist koi pond can be applied in the home or yard garden area. Sinaumed’s can make the pond with a small size. However, the depth of the pond must still be adjusted so that the koi fish can move freely. In addition, try to choose shrubs that have a large size. So that the appearance of the edge of the pool will look together with the plants.

    2. Japanese Minimalist Koi Pond

    Many people like the appearance of this Japanese-style pond. Because, the pool looks more aesthetically pleasing and also beautiful. It should be understood that the design of this pool focuses on the edge of the pool. Where we are obliged to add natural stone ornaments, ornamental plants, and also garden lights. Apart from that, we can also add a mini waterfall decoration that is placed at the end of the pool. So that the appearance of the pool will look more beautiful.

    3. Middle Eastern Style Koi Pond

    This Middle Eastern-style koi pond also looks attractive because of its unique appearance. The hallmark of the pond is the combination of attractive colors. Sinaumed’s can use pale brown or cream colored natural stones as the basic material for making koi ponds. Unlike the previous types of ponds, this one doesn’t need to add ornamental plants around it. Because, this type of pond does not require a view that is too shady. However, Sinaumed’s can still add mini waterfall ornaments to add to the beautiful and cool impression of this pool.

    4. Koi Pond With Transparent Glass

    Koi fish ponds can also be made by adding glass accents on the top and sides. The purpose of using this glass is so that the owner can see the koi fish freely. Sinaumed’s can make a simple and mini glass koi pond design. That way, we can take advantage of empty land in the corner of the house or room. Make a koi pond design that is in the shape of a box, then the walls of the pond are designed from natural stone. Then on the front side of the pool is installed glass to beautify the appearance of the pool. The size of the glass used can be adjusted to the size of the pool. It is intended that the appearance of the pond becomes more beautiful. Sinaumed’s can also add natural stone decorations around the pool.

    5. Koi Pond Design Blends With the Garden

    This one design will combine the pool and the existing garden in the home page. How to make this pond design is not complicated. Sinaumed’s only needs to make a pond with a wide center. Then coat one part with transparent glass. While all over the bottom side of the pond can be given the desired plants. That way, the fish pond area will look more natural and beautiful. If there is still free space in the pond area, Sinaumed’s can add lounge chairs next to the pool that can be used to relax and enjoy the beauty of the koi pond.

    6. Minimalist Koi Pond

     

    For Sinaumed’s who have a house with a modern minimalist concept, Sinaumed’s can make a koi pond next to the living room and dining room. Enough to limit it with a glass door or wall so that it is still visible even from inside the house. Sinaumed’s and his family can still enjoy the beauty of the pond and koi fish swimming around while eating or having family gatherings. The use of glass doors in the room will also give the impression of a pool that blends in with the house. So the house will look more spacious.

    7. Indoor Koi Ponds

    If Sinaumed’s still has vacant land in the house. Sinaumed’s can use it to build a minimalist koi pond. No need for complicated designs, koi ponds that are built in the house can be made simple but still look luxurious. The things that need to be considered in making an indoor pool are the washing of the pool walls and also the pool floor. This is so as not to harm the koi fish. Because, koi fish really like to swim and rub their bodies against the pool walls.

    8. Koi Pond on the Back Terrace

    The terrace behind the house is an alternative open play area for children and families. Where behind the house we can unwind while watching the children play and feed the fish in the pond. Of course that would be great fun. However, if the back terrace of the house is not too large, Sinaumed’s can make a mini pond. However, Sinaumed’s must also pay attention to the number of koi fish that will be put into the pond. Make sure the size of the pond remains the maximum to accommodate the number of koi fish, so the fish will still be able to swim freely.

    9. Traditional Koi Ponds

    With the traditional minimalist koi pond design, your home will feel more beautiful and natural. Sinaumed’s can add traditional accents to the pond using traditional ornaments such as jugs, bamboo fountains, traditional statues, and other ornaments. This traditional minimalist koi pond is very suitable to be placed inside or outside the house.

    10. Modern Minimalist Koi Pond

    Usually the koi pond design looks simpler, but all the equipment used is modern. In addition, modern koi ponds have a combination of designs such as glass, wood and stone accessories. This type of pool is perfect for use in homes that have a modern minimalist concept.

     

  • Minimalist Japanese House Design Ideas and Concepts

    Minimalist Japanese Home Design Ideas – The Japanese House Concept has an interior design style concept that uses a completely minimalist appearance. The architectural form of this house will look distinctive and have character.

    The thing that will become a form of distinctiveness in this part of the home design concept is the use of a consistent type of material and a fairly simple shape.

    The interior design concept that is applied to Japanese homes is to maintain traditions, order, values, and balance that are united in nature. By utilizing various levels of angles, floors, and contrasts in open spaces and comfortable corners, this form of house tends to be small in size and places a high priority on privacy. Natural lighting is the basis for the aesthetics of Japanese interiors, emphasizing that this design is closely related to the outdoors.

    Japanese Shades Home Concept Idea

    Those of us who want to give the feel and atmosphere of a Japanese-style interior in the house, we can start from the gate. More than an ordinary door, this house-style roof gate is generally a separation between the street and the residence. This gate will give a more quiet, private, and comfortable feel.

    A concept form by Christopher Robertson on Concrete Box Boston using a minimalist Japanese home design concept. He presents with a high concrete fence and a roofless gate with a pivot door model.

    The gate in this model is an adaptation of the Japanese residential design concept, namely a design idea that provides elements of vertical or horizontal lines in most of the gate designs.

     

    You can learn about Japanese Language & Culture For Beginners Traveling Edition
    by GENGOYA

     

    Japanese House Paint Colors

    The form of the color palette group used in this type of dwelling usually adapts elements of wood and stone. A little touch of the brown color and the combination of white, black, gray and a little red, gives a very sweet and minimalist visualization.

    The Japanese home interior concept is synonymous with something bright. The white shape is a basic color choice that is widely used.

    White is a color that shows serenity in a Japanese-style house. Combined with the choice of colors and the natural touch of wood, it will create a very perfect comfort.

    Japanese Home Furniture

    Associated with the minimalist form of the idea, furniture that has a small size is a standard that is commonly used in the concept of Japanese homes. This is intended to give a feeling of relief in the room, because the Japanese design philosophy is very concerned about the circulation of the room.

    The form of the Lesehan concept for the sitting room is the most common and commonly found. Tatami mats and a few pillows are signature pieces of furniture and accessories that will always be used.

    With the allocation of a large table with a low height as a center for gathering, the interior of the living room and family room of Japanese houses is very comfortable for all family members. Anyone who will visit a Japanese-style house will feel comfortable and at home.

    Lighting and Decoration

    For the form of lighting installations, this house focuses on concentrated lighting types or what is called task lighting . This type of lighting is often encountered and functions as general lighting. Decorative lights such as lanterns will also enhance the Japanese feel.

    With other decorative elements, panels on the walls become a barrier between rooms and room dividers which are also common. The material, which is a combination of vertical-horizontal wood without any ornamentation, gives the room a more unique feel without exaggerating it.

    Elements of Nature

    The design of the Japanese house form has a main value in the form of closeness and attachment to nature. Therefore, it is not surprising that the concept of this house presents a lot of natural elements in the room.

    Water is one of the important elements to highlight. A fish pond in an indoor garden area will be enough to show the strong nuances of natural elements.

    Apart from that, the natural elements in the interior will also show up in the form of interior plant decorations. Plants that are usually displayed are types of bonsai plants which are easier to care for. The presence of plants in this type of decoration will be considered to represent a natural principle, simplicity and green.

    Windows and Open Space

    The Japanese house concept is also widely known for its large window sizes and open spaces. We can easily see the view from all over with this window.

    Large sliding doors will also become a feature, especially in the concept of traditional Japanese houses.

    The shape of the open space house is very synonymous with a minimalist Japanese residential principle. This concept has the goal of being able to get maximum lighting and fresh natural air. Large windows and ceiling openings such as skylights are a powerful way to get them.

    Things that can be considered rare or even non-existent in the concept of Japanese houses are thick curtains or screens. In this element increase can block the way to enter natural light.

     

    You can learn about Design Inspiration for the Development of Type 21,36,45 Houses
    by Adnan Tojoeng

     

    7 Characteristics of a Comfortable & Relaxing Japanese Modern Home

    Japanese homes are known for their design principles that focus on simple shapes and serenity. This characteristic will be in accordance with the philosophy of Zen, Japanese life which aims to bring focus and peace in modern interiors.

    The concept of a Japanese house with a modern form of design emphasizes a life that is clean, simple, maintains balance, is free from clutter, and is close to nature.

    Even though they have used modern concepts, the concept of a Japanese house will never be separated from its traditional elements. However, the concept of a successful Japanese home will spread its influence throughout the world. Check out these features and inspiration.

     

    1. There is an Element of Wabi Sabi

    Have you occasionally heard the term wabi sabi philosophy from Japan? Perfect and happy even in imperfection is the meaning of the term. This Japanese philosophy of life is widely known. Not only in everyday life, this principle is also reflected in the shape and concept of the building.

    The Japanese-style concept house is famous for its simplicity. Even though it is simple and seems minimalist, the concept of a Japanese house can still make its occupants comfortable and feel homey . The concept of Japanese houses tends to lead to the concept of simplicity in everyday life in a comfortable building form.

     

    2. Defended Genkan Area

    This is one of the characteristics that must be in the concept of a Japanese house. Not knowing a building type, even in an apartment, the genkan area will definitely be maintained.

    The genkan is a transitional area between an outside and an inside house. This area is used to receive visitors as well as a place to change shoes using house slippers that have been removed before stepping on the tatami floor.

    With the function of a genkan which is similar to a foyer , genkan is generally equipped with a cabinet or shelf called a getabako to store shoes and other decorative objects.

     

    3. Wide Roof

    The shape of the construction of the roof on the Japanese house concept will also be considered carefully. The shape of the roof of the house is generally designed to be able to drain heavy rainwater from the roof of the house. The shape on the roof is made wide with a wide cantilever shape, so that when the occupants of the house open the door they will still prevent rainwater from entering the house.

     

    4. The verandah is wide

    Another characteristic form of the Japanese house concept is the existence of a large verandah. In addition to functioning as a liaison between each room, the verandah which is usually in the form of a wide and long hallway will be a divider for inside and outside spaces.

    The veranda is a place to relax to enjoy fresh air. The existence of the veranda can also make the house feel cooler, because it functions as a place for air circulation and allows light to enter the house.

     

    5. Thick with Natural Elements

    Japanese culture really shows love and respect for nature. Therefore, so that the elements in the house will also be very thick with nature. Starting from furniture and building materials that use materials from nature such as wood or bamboo, so as to incorporate elements of plants and water into the house. Water is one of the strongest elements to accentuate the characteristics of a Japanese home architecture. We can also add a fish pond to the house.

    Elements of nature in the concept of Japanese homes can also be achieved by adding wide and large windows that can view nature from the outside into the house

     

    6. Using the Tansu Ladder

    The concept of houses in Japanese urban areas in general has a limited area. To maximize this wide section, the concept of this Japanese house is present in the form of a tansu ladder. Tansu is a ladder as well as a cabinet that can be moved easily according to the needs of the occupants.

    Tansu ladders are also flexible in their use for various types of dwellings, from conventional houses to even modern residences such as apartments. Usually this form of tansu has a color palette that is beautiful minimalist and easy to combine with various other types of furniture in the house.

     

    7. Engawa open space concept

    The style of the shape of the Japanese house is considered ideal to be applied to various types of houses, both large-scale houses and small ones. One of the elements that is very visible in the shape of this modern Japanese-style house is minimizing walls and partitions, which is called engawa.

    This term refers to an empty space in an outdoor area with an indoor area. In addition to making the room wider, this method can also meet the natural lighting that enters the room. The house will feel spacious, bright, and also a more comfortable part.

     

    You can learn about Modern Interior Design Inspiration
    by Andie A. Wicaksono, Dimas Kharisma Y., & Suparno Sastra M

     

    8 Small Minimalist Japanese House Design Inspirations. 

    Japan is a land of a million charms with extraordinary charm that no longer needs to be doubted. Besides being famous for its unique culture, the country of Sakura is also known for its unique home design concept. A house with a minimalist Japanese design is one of the designs that many say is able to combine traditional and modern looks very well.

    If you are interested in having a stunning minimalist Japanese style house, below are some designs that you can choose as inspiration.

    Minimalist Japanese Home Design Inspiration

    1. Module Grid House, 2 Floor Japanese Minimalist House

    The form of this 2-storey Japanese minimalist house concept uses the traditional metric system which causes its appearance to look more striking compared to the houses around it or in its environment.

    Besides that, the design concept of this minimalist Japanese house also uses prefabricated materials, so that the size is adjusted to the module part.

    This method is a blend of contemporary and traditional styles that will look more efficient.

     

    1. House in Minamimachi, Concrete Shell Dwelling

    Even though it looks and seems simple, if we pay close attention, the facade of this house has a unique texture that will make it look different.

    With a part that looks modern, this residence also does not apply the shape of the walls of Japanese houses which are generally made of special paper.

    Even so, we can still feel the comfort of the Japanese house form which is based on the selection of dominant wood materials.

     

    1. A House in Midorigaoka, Stands Out with a Different Atmosphere

    The concept of a minimalist Japanese style house on this one will look a contrast when compared to the housing around it.

    Simplicity is the main key to displaying the contemporary design that is expected from this residential concept.

    Apart from that, careful selection of materials will make the concept of this house seem comfortable to live in.

     

    1. Concrete Box House, A Dream House Made Of Concrete

    Inspired by the works of Tadao Andi, a couple from Houston, Texas built their dream concrete house. The combination of traditional and modern designs can be seen from the ratio of materials made of wood to concrete.

    Even though it looks like a modern house, we can definitely still see the form of a Japanese touch in this residence.

     

    1. Slice of the City, Residential with Maximum Privacy

    When forming the design of this house, the architect needs to build a Japanese-style house that can maximize light, but privacy is still maintained.

    This is done by building a large block which is divided by vertical voids, so that light can enter the house.

     

    1. Light Grain, Light Balance, Ventilation and Privacy

    Light Grain is a house specially designed to balance privacy, lighting and ventilation.

    With a design concept like this, light can enter through windows and perforated walls at the front of the house.

    Walls and small holes made of metal, apart from being useful for lighting and ventilation, can enhance the overall appearance of the building.

     

    1. Relations, Simple but Unique 2-storey Japanese Minimalist House

    The concept of this one house focuses on the use of a concrete structure as the “shell” of this residential facade.

    For the shape of the interior itself, this house applies a mezzanine design to be able to create extra space on the inside.

    Making this part of the decision can certainly produce a form of Japanese minimalist house that can outsmart limited space and even prioritize the privacy of its residents.

     

    1. Gandare House, a Tiny House with a Striking Design

    Even though it doesn’t look as wide as the house next to it, Gandara House will look more striking with its impressive facade.

    Even though the external appearance concept looks modern, the use of wood material which is very thick with Japanese-style forms can be found in the interior.

    In addition, aspects that can make this house look comfortable to live in are the perfect natural lighting in the room.

  • Minimalist Fish Pond Design For Narrow Land

    Minimalist Fish Pond Design for Narrow Land – For Sinaumed’s who like to raise ornamental fish but only have empty land that is not too wide or narrow. Relax, now there are many choices of minimalist pool designs for narrow land. In maintaining ornamental fish, a pond is a must that needs to be provided. Even fish ponds must be designed as unique as possible even though they are only located in narrow and simple land. Because, ornamental fish will display the beauty of body shape and beauty of color when the eye looks from above. Therefore, it is not surprising that ornamental fish are one of the most sought after pets and used as decoration in the yard or garden to make them beautiful.

    Starting from there, koi fish keepers think about how to create a minimalist pond design for narrow land. So that the ornamental fish that are kept can be enjoyed every day and do not die easily. For beginners, here are some choices of minimalist pool designs for narrow land that can be used as references.

    Minimalist Ornamental Fish Pond Design

    The existence of an ornamental fish pond in the yard or terrace of the house will certainly beautify the atmosphere around the house. Especially if the pool is designed as attractively as possible and is fed with clean water. Therefore, let’s create a minimalist pond design concept for narrow land that is cost-effective.

    Equipment in Making Fish Ponds

    Before making a fish pond, the first thing to prepare is some equipment that is usually used by builders to make ponds or buildings. Starting from shovels, hoes, cethok, tape measure, waterpass, and others. Then, also prepare the necessary materials, such as bricks, sand, stone, cement, lime, wall paint, and decorations for the fish pond. Decorations that can be used include dry plants, bamboo, natural stones, water hyacinth, and so on.

    All the materials and equipment above must be met, so that the process of making a fish pond runs smoothly and gets maximum results. However, if you don’t have enough time to make your own pool, you can hire a handyman to make one.

    It should be noted that the type of soil used to make the pond can affect the equipment that needs to be used. Whether it’s because of rocky soil, sandy soil, or clay. Of course, in digging these types of soil, you need to use different special tools.

    The size of the pool to be made

    After preparing all the equipment and materials needed, the next step is to determine the size of the pond to be made. Available location could be the answer. If it is wide, it can be made into a large pond. But if it’s narrow, then it can be made into a minimalist pool. However, there is another thing that needs to be considered after determining the size of the pond, namely the availability of running water. If not, then we can make a flow of water that is made by ourselves according to the size and shape of the pond that will be made later.

    On this occasion the author will provide several examples of minimalist pond design drawings for narrow land with the latest models. Certainly more modern and beautify the atmosphere of the house or yard. Maybe some people think that the beauty of ornamental fish comes from the beautiful colors or shapes. But it turns out that fish ponds can also affect the beauty emitted by ornamental fish. The right fish pond can also make the fish live longer and can reproduce optimally. It would be better if making a pond must be given a circulation of water that is always flowing. So that the fish feel in their natural habitat.

     

    Use a Pool Filter

    The filter is one of the things that determines whether the pool looks perfect in terms of beauty and beauty or not? Besides being able to beautify the pond, the pond filter also plays a role in supporting the life and health of the ornamental fish that live in it. Therefore, a pool filter must be used and must always work.

    Minimalist Ornamental Fish Pond

    When viewed in terms of soil conditions not in accordance with the desired design. Then it can be made slightly tilted on the inside of the pool. This serves to make it easier for us to clean the pool when changing the water. The advantage or advantage of the sloping pond shape is that if there are leftovers, they will definitely gather directly at the center of the slope. So that the dirt will come out when the water is cleaned.

    Don’t forget to polish the bottom of the pool until it’s smooth like glass. This aims to avoid friction on the skin of the fish when they are at the bottom of the pond. However, if it is felt that this will cost quite a lot, then Sinaumed’s can replace it with materials that are not used and have a smooth surface.

    Ornamental Fish Pond in Front of the House

    A minimalist pool design for narrow land if it is in front or on the home page will certainly be more suitable. If the irrigation system uses automatic equipment such as waterfall ornaments that can purify and also clean water regularly. Not only that, at the bottom of the pool it is necessary to provide a hole for the water to drain. This situation will make it easier for water to get out to the maximum when it will be replaced.

    Minimalist Pool Design For Narrow Land

    As previously explained, after preparing all the equipment and materials needed. Then we can immediately dig the ground as deep as 50 to 70 cm. The length and width can be seen in the example image below. This pool image can be an illustration of what the shape and size of the pool will look like based on the availability of land or land.

    After that, the next step that must be done is to make a mixture of ingredients consisting of sand, cement, and also water. Then stir until completely mixed. After the dough is finished, place the stones at the very base as the foundation, then add the bricks and arrange them neatly. If so, polish with the cement and sand mixture that was made earlier. Create a pond according to a pre-designed design. Sinaumed’s can adjust it according to taste and the place used.

    How to Make a Fish Pond So It Doesn’t Leak Easily

    In order to avoid pool leaks after it’s finished, it would be better if we give more portion of cement to the dough to be made. Sinaumed’s can mix it with Damdex or a pool coating specifically used to patch leaky pools. Then the chosen ceramic can be from the best quality mosaic brand which is installed on the wall of the fish pond. If the water is clean and clear, it will certainly add to the beauty and splendor of the pond.

    Fish Pond Paint Additives

    For the paint to be used can be adjusted to taste. If the pool already uses ceramics, then the use of paint is no longer needed. Vice versa, if you only use cement walls, then try to give them white paint. It is intended that the colorful ornamental fish will look more beautiful.

    Installing a Minimalist Fish Pond Filter for Narrow Land

    Before installing the filter, the first thing that needs to be done is to prepare a pump that has a mechanical system. So that it is easy to work on and quickly complete. After installing the water filter, we can put the water in a pool that already has a filter. Now there are many shops that provide decorative fish pond filters. But if Sinaumed’s can make their own filters naturally, then Sinaumed’s can make them from scrap materials. Such as large barrels or containers of consumption fish.

    Don’t forget to provide lighting or lights that can turn on at night. The purpose of the lamp is to display the beautiful color of the ornamental fish that are kept in the pond.

    The Cost of Making a Minimalist Pool Design for Narrow Land

    From the beginning of making the minimalist pool design, of course, Sinaumed’s wondered about how much it would cost to build the pool? Of course, it is very affordable and cost-effective. Moreover, all the materials and also the equipment from us. Of course this can reduce costs that need to be incurred. If it still seems expensive, Sinaumed’s can just replace the pool walls with tarpaulin. There are even some people who make fish ponds using only a pile of bricks. While the inner layer is given tarpaulin and decoration only.

    Minimalist Pool Design Options for Narrow Land

    The following are some recommendations for minimalist pool design choices for narrow land. So, Sinaumed’s doesn’t need to worry anymore if there is only a little land left in the yard, but wants to make an ornamental fish pond. The author will show that small land can also be used optimally.

    1. Japanese-Style Minimalist Pool

    It should be understood that in making a minimalist Japanese-style pond, we need to pay attention to its placement. Don’t let the ornaments that are installed reduce the minimalist and simple impression on the pond or garden. This minimalist Japanese pond design only requires simple ornaments. Even better if this Japanese-style pond is equipped with bonsai plants. Then give a little touch of rocks and this shower is made of bamboo which flows towards the middle of the pool. So that it will add to the atmosphere of peace and calm at home.

    2. Minimalist Pool with Patio

    Patio is the yard of the house or garden in front of the house that is attached to the wall or the boundaries of the house. The term originates from Spain. If the land to be used is narrow or limited, a patio pool at the edge of the house can be an interesting idea. To add to the aesthetic impression, give a little decoration to the fish pond. Sinaumed’s can use plants planted around the pond. Apart from that, you can also provide a little ornament by using hydra plants on the surface of the pond water. Not only beautiful, the roots of these plants also function as fish feed. If you want to be even more comfortable, Sinaumed’s can add an open fountain ornament.

    3. Minimalist pool in the house

    If there is no empty land in the yard, then Sinaumed’s can make a fish pond in the house with a minimalist design concept. A fish pond in the house can not only add a beautiful impression, but can also increase the coolness of the air in the house. To make it, Sinaumed’s needs to consult with people who are experts in making pools. This aims to prevent leakage and also in accordance with the needs of land and buildings.

    4. Minimalist Pool in Front of the House

    Does not require high costs, this minimalist pool design in front of the house is very suitable to be imitated. In making this pool, Sinaumed’s does not need many components. In addition, the arrangement of the pond is relatively simple and does not need complicated elements. However, in making it, make sure the pool foundation is made sturdy and leak-proof. Sinaumed’s can use the casting technique when making the foundation. Then install a drain hole in the bottom of the pool. Sinaumed’s can also use the remaining land to make mini plants in the fish pond area.

    5. Small Zen Minimalist Pool

    Making a fish pond can not only be done in the yard, behind the house or in the house. Fish ponds can also still look beautiful and attractive if placed on the balcony of the house or corner of the house. Especially when combined with small plant ornaments and also rocks placed around the pond. A small zen pond made in the corner of the house like the picture above can give a pleasant impression when the home owner is sitting relaxed outside the house.

    6. Minimalist Backyard Waterfall Pool

    Maybe a fish pond decorated with waterfall ornaments is too common and common. But don’t worry, now we can make a mini waterfall in a fish pond. Sinaumed’s can ask for help from a fish pond making service to make a waterfall that is not too big in a narrow backyard. Shower accents can be made to resemble a waterfall to add a natural accent.

    7. Pool With Natural Water Garden Theme

    A minimalist pond with a natural water garden concept can give the impression that the fish pond is a naturally formed pond. We just need to let the plants grow freely in the pond. To get a natural impression, make a fish pond as natural as possible with simple decorations that don’t seem stiff. Pools with oval or irregular shapes can also add a natural impression. Let wild plants grow freely in the area around the pond.

    8. Minimalist Pool Of Natural Stone

    A minimalist pool made of natural stone can be an interesting idea. Because, we do not need a large area of ​​land. With only 11 meters of land, we can build a pond with this concept and give the impression of a fresher and cooler home. Even though it looks easy in the manufacturing process, the selection of materials certainly requires precision and accuracy. Especially in choosing the natural stone that is used.

    One of the natural stone recommendations to choose from is granite. These rocks are used to reduce the amount of moss growing in the pond. As for the ornaments outside the pool, Sinaumed’s can provide a little extra glass to add a different impression to the pool to make it look more modern and also minimalist.

    Those are some choices of minimalist pond designs for narrow land that can be a reference when you want to have a fish pond at home. Sinaumed’s can adjust it to the remaining vacant land in the house area. That way, Sinaumed’s can also choose a pond design that suits the rest of the land and estimate the costs that will be used to make the fish pond.

     

  • Minimalist Fence Design Inspiration

    Minimalist Wall Fence Design – The concept and style of an interior design that has existed to date is very diverse, ranging from industrial, modern, classic, contemporary, eco-green styles, even styles that are tailored to the character and feelings of the designer himself.

    Some of us may already know or have even used one of these interior style choices for home or even office designs. However, did you know that each interior concept has its own characteristics and uniqueness?

    As an example of contemporary interior design, this is one of the most popular interior styles. This interior style is often known and even equated as a modern interior style. Although in fact very different.

    The difference can be seen from the various ‘patterns’ used. Modern interiors are more bound by strict patterns and seem to have been determined. Meanwhile, contemporary is more flexible. Contemporary was born with a greater mix of styles and variations.

    This time we will discuss one of the other design styles which is also quite popular. This design is also one of the most used today, namely the modern minimalist interior style.

    About Minimalist Interior

    Minimalism is synonymous with something that is functional, simple, and neatly arranged. This is also related to the advancement of technological developments.

    Quoting from ufikhomes.com, minimalist interior style is a design approach characterized by an austerity on decoration. This design concept can be achieved by using functional furniture and interior objects, geometric shapes, and in combinations which are generally no more than two basic colors.

    Minimalist design is a stripped down design , reducing the parts that are considered unnecessary, so that only the important elements are needed.

    Minimalism cannot be separated from a famous thought named Ludwig Mies Van der Rohe, namely “Less is More”. He is one of the leaders of the world’s modern architecture.

    According to the Architect, who is better known as “Mies,” to create a “bone” interior, he will use a lot of modern materials such as industrial steel and glass, while still emphasizing an open space and simplicity.

    Mies believes that simplicity in architecture is everything. That simplicity comes from a very strong influence of a Russian Constructivism movement. Russian constructivism has introduced using architecture to provide a benefit to society. Apart from that, this simplicity sentiment is also very compatible with his “less is more” mantra.

     

    You can learn about 30 Minimalist Tropical Home Design Inspirations
    by Rio Manullang

    Features of Minimalist Architectural Design

    In the world of architecture and design, minimalism means a condition in which a subject only prioritizes the function of a subject and displays essential elements. The focus of a minimalist designer is a connection between a building element, lighting, the remaining voids in a building.

    In full, here are the architectural design features of a minimalist home:

    1. Simple Layout

    Maybe many have thought that a minimalist architectural design is applied to homes with narrow land. In fact, in a minimalist concept it is also very possible to be used in a house that has large land.

    Because the main feature of a minimalist home is a plain, simple, and efficient layout with terraced volume sections. Apart from that, the minimalist house plan has also been made open with a minimal interior wall.

    Then, it is equipped with a simple and multifunctional storage area with an emphasis on the freedom of view.

    2. Simple But Quality Material

    Material selection is very much considered so that it can support the shape and even appearance of a minimalist home, including color, texture, and shape. Usually, in a minimalist concept house, you will use materials that are easy to find.

    Materials in a simple building will produce its own charm while highlighting the properties of a building material. For example, on the walls, the end result will be obtained by achi process, as well as on the floor, it is enough to use ceramic tiles without using a finishing process.

    3. Geometric Building Shapes Without Decoration

    The next characteristic of minimalist architecture is a building that has a strict geometric shape. Geometric shapes, such as rectangles or cubes, can be seen from the outside in a minimalist home. In fact, even in the shape of the roof, it is not triangular like a traditional house, but flat or has unnecessary indentations.

    Then, in the facade area, houses that use a minimalist style are generally without decoration and are deliberately left plain and only covered in white paint.

    4. The function of glass windows is made more optimal

    Minimalist house utilizes a window as an opening and optimal lighting. This is indicated by the existence of a window design that does not have complicated details. In general, a minimalist home will have large and wide glass windows.

    Not only will it look beautiful and modern, this large window will also aim to allow air and sunlight to easily enter the house. So that the humidity level in the house will always be maintained.

    5. Minimal bulkhead

    The dividing walls and partitions in a minimalist concept house will be kept to a minimum so that it can give the impression that the inside of the house is more comfortable, spacious and bright. This is because the minimalist concept prioritizes space efficiency.

    In a minimalist home, dividing walls will only be given to spaces that have a private nature such as bedrooms and bathrooms. Meanwhile for other rooms, such as the living room, dining room, and kitchen, they will only be separated by furniture.

    6. Minimalist Furniture

    In the minimalist home section, furniture will be made very functional. Usually in the living room section there will only be essential furniture such as shelves, sofas and tables.

    The shape of the furniture doesn’t have too much volume with lots of decorations. That way, this piece of furniture will be able to accentuate the temporary function while still using as little space as possible.

    7. Gives a Field Impression

    Given the lack of furniture and dividing walls, it’s not surprising that a minimalist home will give a broad and airy impression. Sunlight from outside with the presence of a wide window will also make a room look more open, clean and bright.

    No wonder this concept is widely used to get around land that is not too large but still wants relief.

    8. Minimalist Garden

    Minimalist garden is a characteristic of the next minimalist home. Even though in general many minimalist houses are built on land that is not too large, you will still find a garden as a residential refresher.

    Usually the garden is located on the front of the terrace and contains sedge grass and beautiful rocks. So, not only is it beautiful, the concept of a minimalist home will also continue to provide healthy air for its residents.

     

    You can learn about Minimalist Home Design Inspiration
    by Rio Manullang

    Minimalist Modern Concept in Interior

    Many believe that a modern minimalist design concept that is very close to a minimalist style is because in principle it minimizes the use of non-functional elements. However, the interpretation of the “Less is More” concept in a minimalist interior is actually very broad and can be applied to various elements and aspects of the interior design itself.

    Here is a minimalist concept in 4 points:

    1. Geometric Style

    Strong lines will keep the minimalist interior attractive. The designers usually explore a lot with various forms, in terms of the shape of the furniture, the shape of the room, and even the shape of the pattern that will be applied to the interior.

    However, in a simple interior concept, the use of these forms will actually be simpler. Exploration in form is more focused on comfort, ergonomics, and function, not on design aesthetics.

    2. Minimizing the use of furniture

    The minimalist interior concept will prioritize function, and consider starting to reduce various furniture with supporting function parts that exist in everyday life that are not used too often. In this interior concept ‘only’ will focus on the use of the main furniture needed to support the functions and activities in the room.

    For example, if we have a chair in the corner of the room, but in fact the chair will never be used, remove the chair from the list of selected furniture items.

    3. The use of monochrome colors

    The color element is an interior element that is often used as a weapon for exploring modern minimalist concepts. However, the selection of this color combination does not refer to aesthetic elements, but rather emphasizes the comfort level of the room itself. So, don’t be surprised if you find lots of neutral colors like white which is dominant in an interior concept.

    4. Prioritize Function

    This one thing is an essence of the concept of “less is more”. As previously mentioned, one of the keys to the modern minimalist interior design concept is the emphasis on functional aspects. So, avoid the formation of design and arrangement of elements in a room that are not based on an aspect of function and designation.

     

    You can learn about Who Says Creating a 3D Minimalist Home Design is Difficult
    by Anditya (DreamArch Animation)

    15 Minimalist Wall Fence Designs

    Entering an element that does not support or add to the function of a room is not recommended for a minimalist concept. The fence will be a way to maintain privacy and protect the house from thieves or other unpleasant things.

    Until now, there are various types and designs of fences that can be an option. One of them is a wall fence that can be used to guard the house and frame the garden and even the gate leading to the house.

    The presence of a wall fence can also be the focal point of the house. You can also customize the wall and house fences so you can have a unified design. For example, minimalist iron fences are often found in modern homes.

    To help choose the right design, here are presented some minimalist wall fence design concepts that can be our choice.

     

    1. Minimalist Wall with Natural Elements

    Want to be able to display a minimalist wall fence with a natural impression? To be able to apply it, we can use natural elements on the wall fence, for example the shape of wood and stone. Apart from looking minimalist, the use of natural elements can make the house feel cooler.

     

    1. Wood Combination Wall

    The next form of minimalist wall fence design is a combination of stone walls and wood. To give a similar impression, we can use a fence with the same material for the walls of the house.

    For the shape of the gate, use wooden panels that can be shifted to produce a minimalist feel to your home.

     

    1. Traditional Modern Wall Fence

    The design on this wall fence may already be familiar to us. Because we often encounter these wall fences, both in urban and rural areas.

    This fence is a combination of bricks, tiles and rooster which can be used for houses with minimalist, modern and traditional designs. To give it a simpler look, we can use one color of paint.

     

    1. Wall and Iron Fence

    Then, this next fence design is a combination of walls and iron. This fence will use half the wall and half the iron on top.

    For the fence covering, it is designed to resemble a door and aluminum or iron material which can make the house look more minimalist.

     

    1. Minimalist Wall Fence Design

    Want to be able to display a fence that can be simple and looks modern at the same time? This one wall fence concept design can be an option.

    This one wall fence will be designed simply using plain gray paint. To be able to provide a focal point, we can use wooden doors on several parts of the fence.

     

    1. Simple Minimalist Wall Fence

    Don’t like the excessively shaped fence design? Wall fence designs with iron shapes like this can be the right choice.

    This wall fence comes with a simple form, combining the wall with iron. This simple design will be suitable for modern minimalist homes in urban areas.

     

    1. Stone and Iron Wall Fence

    If we are worried about security at home, maybe this form of fence design can be an option. This wall fence uses a form of natural stone material that is strong and sturdy.

    Its size is quite high, so that it can almost cover half of the house. There are also sharp iron parts on the top and sidelines of the fence holes, so as to provide maximum protection to occupants.

     

    1. Modern Wall with Iron Door

    The concept of this wall fence uses natural stone material on the surface. Meanwhile, for the door itself, it uses iron material as access to the fence.

    The combination of stone and iron in this minimalist fence will be suitable for modern and minimalist section of the house.

     

    1. Wall Fence with Gate

    With this one fence design it will provide a unified design with the house. By combining the walls with some black and brown patterned natural stones.

    Meanwhile, for the door itself, apply iron material with a minimalist feel.

     

    1. High Wall Fence Design

    This concept wall fence has been widely used in medium and small modern houses such as the type 30 form. The high design almost covers the appearance of the facade of the type 30 house.

    This form of wall fence will have several holes, so that to create a garden and an area on the inside of the house will remain cool and not stuffy, even though the size of the walls is high.

     

    1. Modern Stone Fence

    The concept of this wall fence design uses natural stone as the material. The use of stone as a wall material will make this fence look beautiful and natural.

    This wall fence will be suitable for homes that are modern minimalist and want to display the beauty and coolness of the residence.

     

    1. Minimalist Classic Wall

    This wall fence design is suitable for classic and traditional homes that want to display an elegant impression and a simple design.

    This fence is a combination of walls and iron with simple carvings, but still charming.

     

    1. High Brick Wall of Security & Privacy

    In the form of certain houses, perhaps this high brick wall fence can be an option.

    This wall fence can provide privacy to the occupants. In addition, for home security, it will be more awake.

     

    1. Minimalist Wall & Wood Fence

    For a modern house with a simple or minimalist design concept, using a wall with a simple shape can be an option.

    Apart from that, we can also combine it by using wood panels to display a unique and natural impression on the dwelling.

     

    1. A combination of matching colored iron walls and fences

    To be able to display a simple but charming house facade, color harmony must also be considered. If the wall to be used for the fence is white, then we can add an expanded fence or wire mesh with the same color. In addition to making the house look elegant, white can make the atmosphere of the house more spacious and bright.

  • Migration Is: Definition, Causes, and Various Kinds

    Migration is – The occurrence of people from one region to another can be considered a
    very natural event.
    This is known as migration. Within migration itself there is
    transmigration as well as urbanization.
    So, to find out more about migration, you can watch
    this review until it’s finished, Sinaumed’s.

    Definition of Migration

    Basic human needs consist of clothing, food and shelter. Clothing consists of clothing, food
    consists of food, and boards consist of shelter.
    The need for proper and comfortable housing
    serves as shelter and shelter.

    When choosing a place to live, there are various factors to consider. If a person is not
    suitable to settle in an area or there are other motivating factors, then he can move or commonly known as
    migration.

    So, migration is a term used for the movement of people from one place to another for the purpose of settling
    across political/state boundaries or administrative/part boundaries of a country.

    If it crosses the borders of a country, it is called international migration. Meanwhile,
    domestic migration is population movement that occurs within the boundaries of a country, both between
    regions and between provinces, such as urbanization and transmigration.

    Migration is also explained in the Law in Article 1 No. 6 of 2011 concerning Immigration.
    Based on the law, immigration is defined as the traffic of people entering or leaving the territory
    of Indonesia and its supervision in order to maintain the upholding of state sovereignty.

    In the formulation of measuring population migration, it can be measured by several measures including mobility
    rates, in-migration rates, out-migration rates, and net migration.

    The term migration comes from the Latin “migratio” which means the movement of people between
    countries.
    However, this is not only movement from one country to country, but also
    population movement from one place (country and so on) to another place (country and so
    on).

    In addition, migration can also be said as an event where an organism moves from a biome or region that has
    the same geographical or climatic characteristics which includes communities of plants, animals, soil
    organisms, bacteria, and viruses to other biomes.
    In simple terms, migration is defined as a
    movement activity.

    In many cases, organisms migrate to seek new sources of food reserves to avoid food scarcity that may occur due
    to the arrival of winter or due to overpopulation or population explosion (the condition of too many people on
    Earth, so that the existing resources are not sufficient to meet their needs). ).

    Causes of Migration

    Migration means the movement of people from one place to another by crossing national borders or
    administrative boundaries within a country with the aim of settling.
    Migration itself does not
    just happen, there are still several causes. The following is an explanation of the reasons why people
    migrate.

    1. Natural Disasters

    Natural disasters can be experienced in an area. Natural disasters such as floods, volcanic
    eruptions, earthquakes, landslides and disease outbreaks can encourage people to migrate to safer
    areas.

    For example, many Acehnese did not want to live in Aceh after the 2004 tsunami disaster. They
    can move to other areas that are considered safer to continue their lives.

    2. Religion

    Religion is the main thing in human life, because the purpose of human life in this world is for the
    hereafter.
    The purpose of religion is also to regulate our daily behavior to behave better and
    better, so that in our worship there is no pressure from anyone.

    Freedom to worship according to one’s religion and the need for mutual respect between religious
    communities is a person’s capital to survive in a heterogeneous society.
    If religious life is
    not guaranteed for its continuity and security, then this will encourage someone to migrate.

    3. Politics

    Politics in an area is not the same. There is a region that considers politics to be normal,
    there are those who consider politics to be unusual.
    The meaning of the word unusual is that
    after politics is over, the grudge is still there.
    So that a problem will heat up.

    It is this heated political condition in an area that can lead to anarchic acts. As a result,
    residents of the area feel like moving to another area that is safer.

    4. Availability of Resources

    In an area usually the resources vary. Therefore, making people need other resources that do
    not exist in their area for survival.

    For example, there is a gold mine in an area where people automatically want to find gold, therefore their place
    of life also moves to where the gold is.

    5. Employment

    Humans live with the need to eat, drink, dress, shelter and other needs. So every human being
    needs effort such as work to meet these needs.
    For example, the need for school children will
    certainly increase expenses, so to meet these expenses we have to work.

    If jobs are available or are working outside the city from where we live, then we will go to places where
    there are jobs for us.
    Hence one of the reasons why employment affects migration.

    6. Educational Facilities

    The education taken is also one of the tools in finding a job that is in accordance with his education.
    Although sometimes, in reality the jobs we have are not in accordance with their education.

    However, at least most jobs match their education. Automatically people whose education is in
    other places will follow the place where they study.

    7. Stability and Security

    People who live in an area will definitely choose a safe and peaceful place to live. In a
    certain area or country there are things that are not safe to be made as a place to live.
    So,
    people in unsafe places will look for safer areas, of course.

    8. Work Location

    People who have jobs outside the area will certainly choose to live in the area where they work.
    Besides reasoning closer, but also saving costs, time and effort. So, it is chosen
    closer to the place of work than away from the place of work which of the two has more benefits that are
    closer to the place of work.

    9. Development Interest Factors

    Factors for the importance of development, namely migration that occurs because the area is affected by
    development projects, such as the construction of dams for irrigation and hydropower.

    10. Social Factors

    Social factors are also one of the causes of migration, for example mixed marriages. Marriage
    is worship for every religion.

    This social factor of marriage will affect migration. Moreover, mixed marriages, for example
    between Indonesia and Malaysia.
    So, if one will settle in the country one person will
    migrate.

    11. Population Density

    In a developing or developed country, the problem usually faced is population density.
    Likewise with the factors that cause migration including population density which must be overcome
    by one way of migration.

    This population density causes a person to live less comfortably, there is a lot of competition, so it will
    be difficult for some to get a job.
    Because it is difficult to get a job, many people will
    commit various crimes.
    That’s why population density must be overcome quickly.

    Because, if it is not quickly resolved it will cause various problems including pickpocketing, robbery and
    others.
    In addition, there are still many things that can happen due to excessive population
    density.

    For example, it is because of this overpopulation that some people decide to move to less densely populated
    areas.
    Apart from getting a new atmosphere of life, this kind of thing is also very good for
    supporting the population distribution program.

    12. Desire to Improve Living Standards

    In general, the reason why someone prefers to move to another area is for economic reasons.
    One of them is the desire to improve the standard of living for the better. This is
    usually felt by villagers, where he never gets a job.

    In Indonesia alone, this phenomenon occurs every year. Many people from the villages will go
    to the cities with the aim of finding work.
    At first he wandered, but over time he would take
    his family and then look for a place to live in the city where he worked.

    For example, Central Javanese people move to Jakarta because that person’s livelihood is in Jakarta.

    13. Unsuitable Geographical Circumstances

    Geographical conditions or an unsuitable environment are also one of the causes for someone to migrate.
    For example, someone has asthma that will relapse if he is in cold air. Then, that
    person lived in a mountainous environment where the morning air was very cold.

    Well, it’s possible that this person will suffer from asthma every morning. Thus, that person
    might think about moving to another place, where the air around it is not too cold.

    Types of Migration

    Migration is divided into two, namely national and international migration. Here’s the full
    explanation:

    1. National Migration

    National migration is the movement of people from one area to another but still within a country.
    National migration itself can be divided into two, namely urbanization and transmigration.
    Here’s the full explanation:

    a. Urbanization

    Urbanization is the movement of people from rural to urban areas. People who do urbanization
    are called urban.
    The factors that affect urbanization are divided into pull factors and push
    factors.
    Urbanization pull factors, among others:

    • Job opportunities, especially outside agriculture, are quite widely available.
    • Labor wages are relatively higher than in the village.
    • Availability of life facilities, such as education, health, and economic facilities.
    • The city is the center of government, economy, and science and technology (IPTEK).

    The occurrence of urbanization itself is caused by several factors, the following are the factors of
    urbanization.

    • Agricultural land is getting narrower.
    • Limited employment opportunities, especially outside the agricultural sector.
    • Small labor wages.
    • Lack of life support facilities.
    • The desire of residents to improve life.

    Urbanization has both positive and negative impacts. The positive impacts of urbanization
    include:

    • Reducing the population density of the village.
    • Reducing unemployment.
    • Increased manpower to facilitate urban development.
    • Improving the standard of living of villagers because part of their income returns to the village.

    In addition to the positive impacts, there are also impacts from urbanization, including:

    • Every village lacks young manpower.
    • The lack of an educated workforce as a driving force for village development, because they become the
      urbanization of big cities
    • The higher the urban population density
    • Many establishments of slum houses
    • Increased poverty and crime rates.
    • Decrease in the availability of clean water
    • Increasing unskilled workforce.

    b. Transmigration

    Transmigration is the movement of people from a densely populated area to an area with a small population.
    The objectives of organizing transmigration are:

    • Improving the welfare of transmigrants and the surrounding community.
    • Increasing and equalizing regional development.
    • Strengthen the unity and integrity of the nation.

    There are several factors that cause transmigration, including:

    • Unequal distribution of population.
    • The standard of living of the population is still low.
    • A natural disaster occurred.

    2. International Migration

    International migration is the movement of people from one country to another or between countries.
    International migration is divided into three, namely:

    a. Immigration

    Immigration is the movement of people into a country, or it can also be defined as the process of entering
    foreign nationals into a country.

    b. Emigration

    Emigration is the movement of people out of a country.

    c. Remigration

    Remigration is the movement of people back to their place of origin.

    3. Ruralization

    Ruralization, namely the movement of people from cities to villages with the aim of settling.
    Ruralization is the opposite of urbanization.

    4. Evacuate

    In addition to the types of migration mentioned above, there is another type of migration called
    evacuation.
    Evacuation is the movement of population that occurs due to threats due to the
    dangers of war, natural disasters and so on.
    Evacuation can be national or
    international.

    5. Forensen

    Forensen is also known as “nglaju”. Forensen or nglaju is an activity of people who live in villages
    or out of town, but have a livelihood in the city and commute every day or don’t stay in the city.
    There are various reasons why someone would do this forensen or nglaju, such as the difficulty
    of finding housing in the city, the high cost of living in the city, and so on.

    6. Tourism

    Tourist is a term for people who are traveling to places of recreation. What is meant by
    tourism is a person’s journey to tourist areas and stays for a certain period of time.

    We often encounter this with foreign tourists who are interested in Indonesia’s natural tourism.
    These foreign tourists spend a very long time in Indonesia to enjoy Indonesia’s natural scenery and
    also learn about Indonesian culture.

    Closing

    Basically, the occurrence of migration can be said to be a natural thing. However, if it
    occurs in large numbers and in close time, migration can cause losses.
    Therefore, the
    government must participate in managing the population.

    That way, residents in a country can live more safely and peacefully. From the above
    understanding it can be said that migration is the movement of people from one region to another.
    Thus the discussion about the meaning of migration to its various kinds. Hopefully all
    the discussion above can be useful as well as add to your insight.

    Sinaumed’s can get more information about migration by reading books available at
    sinaumedia.com . To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always
    provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

  • Microsoft founder and Bill Gates Career Story

    Inventor of Microsoft – Who doesn’t know the world famous figure, Bill Gates? Bill Gates is the founder of Microsoft as well as the person who founded a large company which is also named the Microsoft Corporation. The company has contributed a lot to the development and advancement of technology, especially in the field of computers.

    Microsoft is a type of multinational company based in the United States. Precisely namely in Redmond, Washington, USA. The company also develops, manufactures, licenses, and supports a wide range of computer-related products and services. One of the most famous products from Microsoft to date is the Windows operating system. Almost all computer and laptop devices provide this system in it.

    Short Biography of Microsoft Inventor: Bill Gates

    William Henry Gates III or better known as Bill Gates is a man who was born on October 28, 1955 in Seattle, Washington, USA. Bill Gates is the third child of the couple William Henry Gates and Mary Maxwell. While her two older siblings are named Kristianne and Libby.

    Bill Gates’ father is a lawyer who is quite famous because he has had many relationships with various companies and famous people. While his mother worked as a member of the Board of Directors of First Interstate Bank, Pacific Northwest Bell, and also a member of the national level of the United Way. Meanwhile, Bill Gates’ grandfather named JW Maxwell was a president at one of the national banks.

    In his family, Bill Gates is a child who has a fairly high intelligence. So he had experienced difficulties while at school. Because his enthusiasm for learning is higher than his peers. Therefore, the genius that is in Bill Gates’ brain makes him even smarter and genius in the academic field. When Bill Gates’ parents found out that their second child had academic abilities and a very genius brain. So they decided to move Bill Gates to a special school for boys in Seattle. The school was named Lakeside School. This school is located on the west coast, United States.

    At first, Bill Gates liked computer-related subjects when he entered the school. He began to study more deeply about computer lessons. At that time, Bill Gates was only 11 years old. He already felt in love with the world of computers. However, his parents actually became worried because they were afraid if they could not concentrate while studying at school. Because of this, Bill Gates’ parents finally stopped all their children’s computer-related activities for a year. This was done so that Bill Gates could concentrate more on learning activities at his school.

    However, because Bill Gates’ curiosity is very high and can not be dammed anymore. He then decided to do other learning activities by reading books on literature, business, science, and also biographies of world famous figures. The things that Bill Gates looks for when reading books about biographies is how to become someone who is great in the field he likes.

    Previously, Bill Gates’ parents asked their children to stop studying computers for several reasons. They did that so Bill Gates could get into university. Even though Bill Gates still wants to advance the world of computers. But because of the intelligence possessed by Bill Gates. He was finally able to enter Harvard University located in the city of Cambridge, Massachusetts in 1975.

    However, his love for computers made Bill Gates decide not to continue his studies at Harvard University. After leaving the university, he chose to advance the computer world with his partner, Paul Allen.

    Bill Gates Childhood Story

    Since childhood, Bill Gates was already very fond of reading books. Then when he was 10 years old, v had read the World Book Encyclopedia from the very beginning to the last series. Because of his penchant for reading books, Bill Gates’ parents bought various types of books that his son liked.

    Until he was 11 years old, Bill Gates began to ask his parents about business and events and phenomena that were happening in the world. However, Bill Gates’ fondness for reading various types of books made his mother worry. This is because the mother feels that her child interacts less frequently with other people and prefers to spend her time reading books. Therefore, Bill Gates sometimes fights with his mother because he feels that his mother really wants to control him.

    History of Bill Gates in Getting to Know the World of Computers

    Bill Gates started to like the world of computers while at Lakeside School, as explained above. However, the computer world that Bill Gates loved at that time was still a teletype machine linked by a telephone and a time-share computer. The thing that made Bill Gates fall in love with the world of computers was because of the way computers work themselves. Where the computer can read a software code perfectly.

    When Bill Gates was still attending Lakeside School, he felt that his love for computers was well facilitated. So that all his curiosity about the world of computers can be answered perfectly. Not only that, Bill Gates also had the freedom to play with the computer at his school. Because, he managed to find a software bug or an error that occurred in the program line.

    The intelligence possessed by Bill Gates and his love for the world of computers, make it easier to learn computers and write basic programming languages. Bill Gates and his colleagues often spend hours in the computer room. They do that just to learn and write programming languages ​​and all things computer world.

    Thanks to his love for the world of computers, when he was still in school, Bill Gates had earned extra pocket money. He earned this pocket money with his friends by becoming a young hacker or hacker at Lakeside. Bill Gates and his school friends can spend their time just studying computers. They even got home early in the morning. Where they spend all day just to fix the existing programming system on the computer.

    It can be said that his love for the world of computers is not easy to get the approval of his two parents. Even Bill Gates was also not allowed to study computer science at all. This happened when Bill Gates was still at the Lakeside school. Until it continued when he had to go to university on the wish of his parents. Even though Bill Gates had succeeded in entering Harvard University, he was also confused about which major to enter. Until in the end he chose to enter law school in the hope of becoming a lawyer like his father.

    While studying at Harvard University, Bill Gates was not very interested in the lessons he got at law school. He also felt that his love for computers would slowly fade away. However, all his love for the world of computers did not fade in the end. Because Bill Gates reunited with his friend when he was still at Lakeside School, Paul Allen. His friend was a hacker friend who used to work together when he attended Lakeside and it turned out that they both attended Harvard University. The meeting between the two made Bill Gates’ dream of having a software company start to grow again.

    Bill Gates and Paul Allen began to develop and create a basic programming language that was used to operate and run the MITS Altair Basic 8800 computer. The programming language used on the computer turned out to be successful. So, Bill Gates and Paul Allen convinced themselves to come to MITS which is a small company located in Albuquerque. So that MITS wants to buy their Basic programming language.

    After successfully creating a programming language with his colleague Paul. Bill Gates finally decided not to continue his studies at Harvard University. Because, he finds it difficult to divide his time between studying and also managing the development of his software. The choice taken by Bill Gates was intended so that he could focus more on his ambition to own a software company with his friend, Paul Allen. Until finally, the company they managed to build was named Microsoft.

    Microsoft Company Success History

    The beginning of the name Microsoft is Micro-Soft, where the words micro and soft are hyphenated. The name existed when Bill Gates and Paul Allen were already working with MITS. In 1976, Microsoft’s name was changed to Microsoft. Later that same year, the trade name was registered with the New Mexico Department of Foreign Affairs. Then, the partnership with MITS ended in 1976 and Microsoft’s software continued to be developed. The software was developed again by Bill Gates and his colleague Paul Allen. The development is not only intended for computers, but also for various other systems.

    After not working with MITS, Bill Gates finally moved his previous corporate office in Albuquerque to Bellevue, Washington. when building his company in the early days, Bill Gates was very thorough in overseeing every employee who worked with him. So that all employees feel they have a great responsibility to advance the company’s business. Even though he already has many employees, Bill Gates still sees and directly checks all the lines of code sent by his company. Not only that, Bill Gates also writes back if there is a part of the code that looks inappropriate.

    Then, the Microsoft company also tried to work with IBM to advance its computer operating system. This was because at that time, IBM was lagging behind Apple in the computer market. So that IBM opens opportunities for other companies to fill the most important parts of a computer in the form of an operating system and also a microprocessor of a personal computer. Finally, the companies selected to fill the field were Intel and Microsoft.

    Microsoft itself can win the competition with Intel and managed to get a cooperation contract. Bill Gates has the ability to negotiate well. So that the company’s contract with IBM can be won. The contract that has been established with the IBM company is one of the great opportunities for the Microsoft company to grow and advance. Microsoft realized that they could not fulfill IBM’s demands without help from other companies. Therefore, Microsoft made an approach to a local company called Seattle Computer Products.

    The company has an operating system called Q-DOS or Quick and Dirty Operating System. The system was later purchased by Microsoft for $50,000. After obtaining the operating system, the next step is to modify and also adapt the Q-DOS operating system to meet the needs of IBM.

    To become a good computer operating system, in order to meet IBM’s needs. So Bill Gates and also Allen have to work harder. The Q-DOS computer operating system had changed its name to the MS-DOS computer operating system or Microsoft Disk Operating System after going through various stages of modification and improvement.

    Microsoft’s Golden Age

    Bill Gates with the Microsoft company was increasingly successful and triumphant when IBM launched a computer with the MS-DOS system he made. Computers that use the MS-DOS system can be said to be in demand in the personal computer market. Thus making IBM obtain extraordinary profits from the sale of these computers. Every computer that has the IBM brand is sure to use the MS-DOS operating system.

    Sales of IBM personal computers are increasingly in demand in the personal computer market, making Microsoft’s name more popular and known to many people. This happened because IBM used the MS-DOS computer operating system made by Microsoft. Thanks to the success of selling these computers, the name Microsoft is slowly becoming more popular and known to the world. Simply put, IBM’s big name in the personal computer market is one of the keys to Microsoft’s success and glory in the field of computer operating systems. Microsoft’s MS-DOS is increasingly popular and known to the world, especially in the field of computer operating systems. Even though the name of the MS-DOS system was getting better, IBM didn’t gain much from it.

    Because, in its agreement with Microsoft, IBM agreed to provide MS-DOS development research funds to Bill Gates’ Microsoft company. Not only that, IBM has also agreed to allow Microsoft to resell the latest version of the MS-DOS operating system to third parties. In its contract agreement with IBM, it can be said that Microsoft gets more benefits. In addition to getting paid from the sale of IBM computers, Microsoft also received financing for the development of MS-DOS from IBM.

    The sale of personal computers by IBM was a relatively successful sale and had a good impact on Microsoft. Because, with this in mind, Microsoft companies are becoming increasingly eyed by personal computer manufacturers. Where personal computer manufacturers are competing to acquire and adopt Microsoft’s MS-DOS. That way, the success of Bill Gates and his partner Paul Allen began to open wide.

    Because of his love for the world of computers and his enthusiasm to achieve his dreams, Bill Gates was finally able to achieve all of that through his company Microsoft. Even though at a young age he was forbidden by his parents to study computer science, but Bill Gates remained persistent in achieving his dream.

    Those are some explanations about the history of the inventor of Microsoft and the story behind the success of Bill Gates and his Microsoft company. The thing that is quite important and that we can take from the story of Bill Gates’ life journey is to always believe in the abilities that are within ourselves.

  • Microsoft Access: Definition, Functions, Benefits, and Features

    Microsoft Access – Almost all computer users, especially Windows, must be familiar with
    using applications from Microsoft.
    In today’s digital era, Microsoft is almost always needed by
    many people because of its benefits in helping to get work done every day.
    Applications are
    widely used to complete work in the fields of education, accounting, and even marketing.
    All
    work related to inputting text, numbers or data into a computer system relies heavily on Microsoft
    application programs.

    Of the many applications from Microsoft that are often used by many people, such as Microsoft Word,
    Microsoft Excel, and Microsoft PowerPoint, even these applications have many experts.
    Apart
    from that, Microsoft actually has a superior application that few people know about, but is well known for
    fields such as business, offices, and even programmers.
    The application is Microsoft
    Access.

    So, here is an explanation of the meaning, history, functions and benefits of this application program:

    A. Definition of Microsoft Access

    Developer Microsoft Corporation
    Prime Release November 1992
    Operating system Microsoft Windows
    Type DBMS
    Website office.microsoft.com/access

    As part of Microsoft Access, it is an application program based on relational computer data that is
    intended for homes and companies that are still relatively small to medium-sized companies.
    Just like its siblings, this application program is already widely available on computers with the
    complete Microsoft Office package.

    Microsoft Access itself has the task of managing the database or data base. A data base or
    database is an organized and structured collection of data.
    This data base will be processed
    specifically to become an interesting information.
    Therefore, the database requires data to be
    entered in order to process it.
    Unlike other database application programs, Microsoft Access
    specifically uses the Microsoft Jet Database Engine database engine.
    That makes this
    application program has an intuitive graphical display that can make it easier for users to operate.

    As a data-based application program, Microsoft Access can process data stored in any type of data base
    container, as long as it supports the ODBC standard.
    As a result, this application program is
    certain to store data from the Microsoft Jet Database Engine, Microsoft SQL Server, Oracle Database, and so
    on.
    Good connectivity of this application program with other database application programs will
    be very beneficial for program makers, or so-called programmers.
    Programmers can maximize this
    application to develop complex applications.
    Not only complex applications, this application
    program can also be used to develop simpler applications, considering that more and more people here prefer
    simple and lightweight applications with maximum features.

    B. History of Microsoft Access

    This application program was first released in November 1992. In its first version, Microsoft launched
    Microsoft Access 1.0.
    However, not long ago, in 1993, Microsoft developed Microsoft Access 1.0
    to become Microsoft Access version 2.0.
    In operating Microsoft Access 2.0, Microsoft provides
    minimum specifications for users to be able to use this application.

    The minimum specifications set by Microsoft can be seen in the following points:
    The computer has a
    Microsoft Windows 3.0 operating system.

    RAM capacity of 4 MB (recommended 6
    MB).

    8 MB of free hard disk space required (14 MB is recommended).

    Database program applications can work very optimally in a database that has many records.
    However, in some cases, the data may be damaged. It can be ascertained that there are
    many causes of data corruption.
    One of the most common is due to outdated device drivers or
    incorrect configuration.

    A code name that was first used by Microsoft Access was “Cirrus”. The code name was developed
    even before Microsoft released and developed Microsoft Visual Basic.
    In addition, the name
    “Ruby” is used for the codename of the interface form building engine from Microsoft.

    As an application with great potential to be developed, Bill Gates, as one of the founders of Microsoft,
    saw that the prototype needed to be further developed.
    That’s what makes a decision that
    components of the BASIC programming language must be developed simultaneously.
    Development is
    carried out concurrently, of course, as a separate application, but it can be very broad.
    The
    development project is named Thunder.

    C. Microsoft Access function

    When discussing the functions of an application from Microsoft, there will probably be a lot of Microsoft
    users who are enthusiastic about knowing and understanding the functions of the Microsoft Access
    application.
    This becomes very reasonable because this application program is very well known
    and needed by business people.
    What’s more, this application program can greatly simplify
    matters related to data management in a business company or organizational institution.

    In matters of data management, this application program is almost like its other siblings, namely Microsoft
    Word and Microsoft Excel.
    However, Microsoft Access is given special capabilities to further
    assist corporate actors, businesses, programmers, organizations, and so on.

    So, here are the Microsoft Access functions that you really need to know.

    1. In the field of business

    As explained above, Microsoft Access is intended for users for business purposes. From small,
    medium to large businesses.
    In an effort to develop a business, of course, you will not be
    separated from the word database.
    This application program greatly facilitates work in the
    business sector such as making financial reports, profits, salaries for employees, and so on.
    Using Microsoft Access will greatly help and speed up business affairs and business
    development.

    2. In the field of education

    Unlike the business sector, the function of Microsoft Access in the education sector can be seen from its
    operation for various purposes at the school level.
    Someone who is usually in charge of
    managing the school’s database is the school admin.
    The school admin is very responsible for
    all matters relating to school data, from schedules from students and teachers, administrative and library
    employee needs, to other matters.
    Good data management will make it very easy for school admins
    to create, manage, edit, and delete data.

    3. In the field of offices

    At a glance, the function of Microsoft Access in the office sector looks almost similar to its function in
    the business sector.
    The function of this application program in the office sector is usually
    used by someone from the office who is responsible for managing the data base.
    The people who
    have these responsibilities are secretaries, financial administration, and so on.
    Even though
    in an office not everyone can operate and understand the work functions of Microsoft Access.
    However, expertise will be needed in office matters, due to the need for offices to manage data
    bases easily and quickly.

    D. Benefits of Microsoft Access

    After knowing and understanding the functions of Microsoft Access above, of course there are lots of
    benefits that can be provided to make work easier, whether business, school, office, or even an
    organization.
    Especially with the rapid development of technology now, you can be sure that
    there will be more and more attractive, functional and professional features.
    This application
    program will be very useful for us to add expertise related to the data base.
    It is also
    possible, because the function of Microsoft Access is to help improve the quality of data processing work,
    in the future there will be very many companies that need people who are experts in operating Microsoft
    Access.

    Well, here are two benefits that can be felt when using this application program.
    1. Make energy
    effective and time efficient

    2. Facilitate onerous work, especially in database
    processing.

    E. Pros and Cons of Microsoft Access

    Like other application programs, Microsoft Access is a data processing application program that will
    continue to be developed according to the needs of the times.
    As an application that will
    continue to grow, this application program certainly has advantages and disadvantages on several sides.
    Behind its advantages, such as being practical and easy to use, it is very popular among database
    systems, support for multiple users, and so on.
    There are some drawbacks that this application
    program also has as a risk of overload.

    So, here are the advantages and disadvantages of Microsoft Access that you need to know.

    1. Excess

    a. Easy to use.

    The Microsoft Access application program is relatively easy to use and not confusing. For
    users who want to learn about database systems, this application program will be very helpful because of the
    ease of operating it.
    In addition, this application program also provides Wizards who will be
    ready to guide you through the instructed steps.

    b. Popular database system.

    This application program is one of the most popular desktop-based database systems in the world.

    c. Saving money.

    Not only is the operating system quite easy and very helpful, the cost of using Microsoft Access is relatively
    inexpensive, compared to other database systems which are bigger and more expensive, with almost the same
    functions and features.

    d. Easy to integrate.

    As a product from Microsoft, Microsoft Access is also privileged because it can function properly in various
    Windows-based software programs.

    e. Storage capacity

    The storage capacity of a database or database from Microsoft Access can store up to 2 GB of data.

    f. Data import.

    Microsoft Access can facilitate and speed up the activity of importing data.

    2. Lack

    a. Limited storage capacity.

    If the storage capacity exceeds 2 GB, users will experience obstacles in managing the database.
    Therefore, Microsoft Access is very suitable for small to medium businesses. However,
    if you want to add large and heavy amounts of data, it is highly recommended to use another application
    program, such as medium to high-end businesses.

    b. Limited multi user.

    The multi-user technical limit is 255 people concurrently, but for Microsoft Access the actual multi-user limit
    is 10 to 80. (It also depends on the type of application)

    c. Paid application.

    Before operating the Microsoft Access application program, the thing that needs to be done is to buy it first
    because this program is a package with Microsoft Office.

    F. Main Features of Microsoft Access

    It could be that in today’s digital era, where all decisions need to be based on data, many people will be
    interested in learning about and using Microsoft Access to process databases.
    This application
    program itself has provided features that are very helpful for humans, both for processing data or
    determining actions to be taken.
    Features such as queries, forms, reports, macros, modules, and
    others can be operated quite easily.

    Well, to understand the features that exist in Microsoft Access. Here is an
    explanation.

    Feature Information
    Queries This feature at Microsoft functions to change, display, delete, analyze data, and so on.
    Forms This feature at Microsoft functions to check, create, and update data.
    Report This Microsoft feature functions to display and print data that has been
    created.
    Macros
    Macros This Microsoft feature functions to store all commands related to databases that have been created
    automatically.
    Modules This feature in Microsoft functions as a place to carry out programming on several aspects in
    Microsoft Access.

    G. Conclusion

    Microsoft Access is a database management application program that can be used to design, create, and
    process various types of data.
    As the most popular data processing application today, this
    application program is commonly used in business, education, offices, and even programmers.
    There are many benefits that can be obtained from this application, namely providing work
    effectiveness and time efficiency in analyzing data for preparing report data.
    This is usually
    done in matters of calculating employee schedules, company financial data, customer data, and much
    more.

    Recommended Books & Articles Related to
    Microsoft Access

  • Meteor Showers and a List of Natural Phenomena in 2020

    sinaumedia.com– A solar eclipse occurs when the position of the moon is between the earth and the sun so that it appears to cover part or all of it. The solar eclipse itself does not occur in every phase of the new moon, because the moon’s orbit is tilted 5° to the plane of the ecliptic (the plane of the earth’s orbit around the sun) so that the moon’s position is often not in the same plane as the earth and the sun. An eclipse only occurs when the moon is close enough to the ecliptic plane at the same time as the new moon. These two events occur on different schedules, the new moon occurs once every 29.53 days (iqtirani or synodic month) while the moon crosses the ecliptic twice every 27.21 days (draconic month). Therefore, solar and lunar eclipses only occur when the two events are close together, namely during the “eclipse season”.

    The term central eclipse is often used as a term that includes total, ring, or mixed eclipses, because generally in these eclipses the line connecting the center (“central”) points of the sun and the moon touches the earth’s surface. A central eclipse begins and ends with a partial eclipse, and these transitional phases are called “contact” points, namely:

    • First contact: when the leading edge of the moon (west edge) appears to “touch” the east edge of the sun for the first time. After the first contact, the moon begins to cover the sun and begins a partial eclipse.
    • Second contact: when the back edge of the moon (east edge) touches the east edge of the sun, thus initiating a central (total or annular) solar eclipse.
    • Third contact: when the leading (western) edge of the moon leaves the west edge of the sun, ending a central solar eclipse and the return of a partial eclipse.
    • Fourth contact: when the back (east) edge of the moon leaves the west edge of the sun, so that the moon completely no longer covers the sun and the eclipse ends.

    The National Aeronautics and Space Agency (LAPAN) said that from 2020 to 2100 there will be 13 solar eclipses that will occur in Indonesia. Here are four types of solar eclipses that you need to know about, including:

    • a total solar eclipse, which is when the moon completely covers the sun so that the corona (which envelops the sun and is usually much dimmer than the sun) becomes visible. In the event of a total eclipse, the total eclipse only appears in a small “path” on the surface of the earth.
    • An annular solar eclipse, which is when the moon is right in the middle of the sun and the earth, but the size appears smaller than the visible size of the sun. As a result, the sun’s rim appears as a very bright ring and surrounds the moon which appears as a dark circle
    • A mixed solar eclipse or a hybrid between a total eclipse and an annular eclipse. At some parts of the earth’s surface you can see a total eclipse, while at other points you can see an annular eclipse. Mixed eclipses like this are quite rare.
    • A partial solar eclipse occurs when the moon is not exactly in the middle of the line between the sun and the earth, so it only partially covers the sun. This phenomenon is usually visible at many points outside the path of a total or annular eclipse. Sometimes, what is seen on earth is only a partial eclipse because the umbra (the shadow that causes a total eclipse) does not intersect with the earth and only passes through the area above the polar regions.

    Apart from the solar eclipse, people around the world will be presented with various natural phenomena that adorn the sky throughout 2020. Starting from the appearance of Venus, to meteor showers. Meteor showers are an astronomical phenomenon that occurs when a number of meteors are seen shining in the night sky. This meteor occurs because of the fragments of space objects called meteoroids, which then enter the Earth’s atmosphere at high speed.

    Meteors are generally only the size of a grain of sand, and almost all of them disintegrate before reaching the Earth’s surface. The debris that reaches the Earth’s surface is called a meteorite. Meteor showers generally occur when the Earth crosses near the orbit of a comet and passes through its debris. The Meteor Data Center has recorded about 600 suspected cases of meteor showers, of which about 100 have been confirmed. The following details natural phenomena that can be seen from Indonesia. However, the following observation times are adjusted to the location of Jakarta using the West Indonesian Sinaumed’s time zone. What are they? Check out the full details below!

    4 JANUARY 2020 : QUADRANTID METEOR RAIN

    The Quadrantid meteor shower bombardment marks the first celestial natural phenomenon in Indonesia in 2020, on January 4 to be precise. The National Institute of Aeronautics and Space (LAPAN) explains that meteor showers occur because the earth encounters passing celestial bodies and rock dust that is carried into the earth’s atmosphere. This meeting resulted in a friction between the Earth’s atmosphere and meteoroids coming from outside the Earth’s atmosphere. This celestial body passes by Earth because it also orbits the Sun. This celestial body burns out with a heat of 1,650 degrees Celsius when it enters the atmosphere. This burning process that the human eye sees as a falling meteor. “This friction causes heat which destroys the meteoroid and produces heat and light that appears in the form of streaks across the sky. Usually this meteoroid burning event takes place at an altitude of 70-100 km from the Earth’s surface. Are you one of those who witnessed this phenomenon at the beginning of last year’s Sinaumed’s?

    JANUARY 10, 2020 : MOON eclipse

    There will be four lunar eclipses throughout 2020. These eclipses occur when the Sun, Earth and Moon are almost aligned and the Moon hides in Earth’s shadow. When will the four lunar eclipses visit Earth? Here are the schedules and areas that Sinaumed’s can observe:

    • Wolf Moon Eclipse, January 10, 2020. This eclipse can be observed in Asia, Australia, Europe and Africa.
    • Strawberry Lunar Eclipse, 5 June 2020. This eclipse can be observed in Asia, Africa and Australia.
    • Lightning Moon Eclipse, July 5, 2020. This eclipse can be seen in South America, North America and Africa.
    • Frosty Lunar Eclipse, 29-30 November 2020. This eclipse can be seen in South America, North America, East Asia and Australia.

    18 FEBRUARY 2020 : MARS HID BEHIND THE MOON

    As this unusual celestial event. The moon will slide in front of Mars. At the same time, the orbits of the Moon and Mars are moving toward their closest point to Earth. In Jakarta itself, this event will be seen in the sky at 01.55 WIB – 05.46 WIB. Are you one of those who witnessed this phenomenon, Sinaumed’s?

    9 MARCH 2020 : SUPERMOON

    Supermoon is a full moon phenomenon that makes Earth’s satellite look very big, close and bright. If you want to see the Moon increase in size dramatically, look east at moonrise or west at moonset. There are three supermoons that will occur in 2020, namely Super Worm Moon (9 March 2020), Super Pink Moon (8 April 2020) and Super Flower Moon (7 May 2020).

    MARCH 2020: THE MORNING STAR SHINES BRIGHT

    In March 2020, you can see the planet Venus, which is often called the morning star, showing its bright light. This space phenomenon will be clearly visible, especially from midnight to early morning. One of the signs is the bright white twinkling star in the middle of the Pleiades constellation, Sinaumed’s!

    APRIL 2020 : APPEARANCE OF THE PLANET VENUS FROM EARTH

    In early April 2020, Venus will appear in Earth’s sky. This phenomenon is like what happened in April 2012 and will happen again in early April 2028. With a telescope, the crescent of Venus will be a sight for the public by displaying a golden white color. Planet Venus can be seen from 18.08 WIB to 20.40 WIB Sinaumed’s.

    7 APRIL 2020: SUPERMOON

    The supermoon phenomenon appeared in 2019 and can be witnessed very well in various places around the world. Apparently, this celestial phenomenon will reappear in 2020 between February and March. However, astronomers themselves say that the peak of the supermoon will occur on April 7 2020, as the time when the Moon is at its closest point to Earth in 2020. The Moon will be about 356.9 kilometers from Earth. The point at which the Full Moon is closest to Earth will produce a large series of high and low ocean tides. However, unfortunately this natural phenomenon will not be seen from Jakarta Sinaumed’s.

    21 APRIL 2020 : METEOR RAIN

    2019 is not a good year to observe meteor showers. Because the moon’s light is too bright to be able to observe other celestial phenomena. But 2020 looks even more promising as the Moon will step aside as these meteor showers occur. The three most promising meteor showers to watch in 2020 are:

    • Lyrid meteor shower, April 21-22, 2020
    • Leonid meteor shower, April 16-17, 2020
    • Geminid meteor shower, 13-14 December 2020

    21 JUNE 2020: THE RING SOLAR Eclipse

    Another celestial phenomenon that occurs every year is the phenomenon of annular solar eclipses. December 26, 2019 was the last moment for an annular solar eclipse and it is said that it will reappear on June 21, 2020. Unfortunately, it is predicted that Indonesia will not be able to witness it and only certain countries can witness this event. The first solar eclipse of 2020 will be visible from parts of Africa, Arabia, Pakistan, northern India, southern China, Taiwan, the Philippine Sea and the Pacific Ocean. However residents in Asia, Africa and Northern Australia can still witness a partial solar eclipse which occurs because the Moon will pass in front of the Sun, but the size of the Moon will not cover the Sun. As a result,

    21 JULY 2020 APPEARANCE OF THE PLANET SARTUNUS

    Since Earth is an inner planet, every one day of the year our planet is between the Sun and the other outer planets. This phenomenon is called opposition. On that day, the outer planet will appear very bright from Earth and can be seen using a telescope. In 2020, Planet Saturn and Planet Jupiter will be in opposition with Earth, in the same week. Planet Jupiter opposition will occur on July 14, 2020. Meanwhile, Saturn’s opposition will occur on July 20, 2020, so prepare your telescopes. The best time to observe Planet Saturn from Earth, in this case Jakarta, is 18.30 WIB to 05.25 WIB Sinaumed’s.

    AUGUST 12 2020 : PERSEID METEOR RAIN

    The Perseid meteor shower that occurred in 2019 is called one of the greatest meteor shower events in history. This celestial phenomenon is said to appear again on August 12, 2020, with a much better and more magnificent appearance. One of its attractions is the treat of 100 meteors per hour with traces of bright light sparkling in the sky. Observe before 00.16 WIB until 05.40 WIB Sinaumed’s.

    OCTOBER 2020 : APPEARANCE OF THE PLANET OF MARS

    As in 2018, 2020 will be a good year for Planet Mars. Planet Merak will be on the opposite side of the Sun on October 13, 2020. Mars will appear brighter than Planet Jupiter. From Jakarta, Planet Mars will be visible at 19.12 WIB. The high brightness level of Planet Mars on September 29 2020 and October 28 2020 will replace Jupiter as the second brightest planet. Planet Mars will be the third brightest object in the night sky after the Moon and Planet Venus Sinaumed’s.

    31 OCTOBER 2020: BLUE MOON PHENOMENON

    Halloween night, 31 October 2020, will feel different with the appearance of a sky phenomenon in the form of a blue moon. This event arises because the position of the moon is at a point across from the earth. As a result, the sun creates a blue illusion on the moon’s surface which triggers this Sinaumed’s phenomenon.

    NOVEMBER 16-17 2020: LEONID METEOR RAIN

    The Leonid meteor shower at its peak will display 15 meteors per hour in clear skies without an overly bright Moon and without too many clouds. Meteor showers can be observed from 00.23 WIB until dawn around 05.04 WIB, Edufrends.

     

    13-14 DECEMBER 2020: GEMINID METEOR RAIN

    The peak of the Geminid Meteor Shower will occur on December 14, 2020. On December 14, the earth’s sky will be showered with 60 to 120 meteors per hour. In contrast to 2019 when the Full Moon becomes a bright object that interferes with the visibility of meteors. This time the sky will be clear so that the meteors can be seen more clearly. The meteor shower will be seen in Jakarta at 19.59 WIB and can still be enjoyed until 05.09 WIB Sinaumed’s.

    DECEMBER 14, 2020: TOTAL SOLAR CLOSURE

    One of the most amazing natural phenomena, the total solar eclipse, will grace the sky on December 14 2020. Unlike the ring type solar eclipse, this phenomenon occurs when the Earth, Moon and Sun are in a parallel position and the Moon manages to cover all parts of the Sun. Unfortunately, this solar eclipse will only be visible in a few countries, namely South America, namely Argentina and Chile. Some areas in this country can even enjoy a moment of darkness for 2 minutes and 9 seconds on Sinaumed’s.

    21 DECEMBER 2020 – GREAT SOLSTICE

    This phenomenon is a very rare phenomenon, because it has never happened again since 2000, and will only happen again in 2040. On December 21, 2020 Planet Saturn and Planet Jupiter will be in a very close position (only 0.06º apart) after sunset. Astronomers even call this phenomenon an ‘apulse’ and it’s really just a matter of perspective. Planets Jupiter and Planet Saturn may be hundreds of millions of kilometers away from each other, but from Earth, these giant planets look like they are merged with Sinaumed’s.

     

  • Meteor characteristics: Definition, types, and examples with explanations

    Characteristics of a Meteor – A meteor is a celestial body that originates from asteroid fragments, comet tails, or fragments of other celestial bodies which are caused by the influence of the earth’s gravity, which makes the celestial body fragments shoot up to the earth and cause damage due to falling meteors. .

    This celestial body passes by Earth because it also orbits the Sun. This celestial body burns out with a heat of 1,650 degrees Celsius when it enters the atmosphere. This burning process that the human eye sees as a falling meteor.

    Meteors are generally only the size of a grain of sand, and almost all of them disintegrate before reaching the Earth’s surface. The debris that reaches the Earth’s surface is called a meteorite. Meteor showers generally occur when the Earth crosses near the orbit of a comet and passes through its debris. The Meteor Data Center has recorded about 600 suspected cases of meteor showers, of which about 100 have been confirmed.

    To find out more about meteors, in the following we will explain in full about the meaning of meteors, their characteristics, types, and examples of meteors along with their explanations.

    Meaning of Meteors

    Meteors are the appearance of meteoroids falling into the earth’s atmosphere called shooting stars. A meteor is a flake or fragment of a celestial body that enters the earth’s atmosphere which causes friction between the meteor’s surface and the air at high speed. This friction causes glowing flames and rays or light from a distance which is commonly referred to as a shooting star phenomenon.

    Meteor is not only a celestial body that falls to earth, but also an appearance of the path when it enters the earth’s atmosphere. The occurrence of this appearance is caused by the heat generated from the ram pressure. Ram pressure is the pressure generated by an object moving at supersonic speed in a fluid medium (gas or liquid). The ram pressure produces a large propagation force on those falling objects, i.e. meteoroids.

    The ram pressure causes the path of the meteoroid to fall and it will appear to glow as it falls. In the case of a high-speed meteoroid falling into the atmosphere and producing enormous air pressure in the front of the meteoroid. Then, this pressure will heat the air until it finally heats up the meteoroids which later burn meteoroids and are known as shooting stars.

    Meteorites range in size from a grain of sand to one meter. Meteorites can move at speeds of 72 hours/s and can counteract the movement of the earth. When a meteorite collides with a planet’s atmosphere it turns into a meteor. The flash of fire that meteors produce when they burn in the atmosphere has a brighter light than Venus, this is why meteors are often called shooting stars.

    Every day it is estimated that more than 43,500 kg of meteorotic material falls to earth and there are already millions of meteors that enter the earth’s atmosphere but most of them burn up before reaching the surface. If a meteor enters the atmosphere and falls to the surface of which planet it is called a meteorite. Meteorites that fall produce explosions, ancient people believed that it was a star that fell from the sky.

    Meteors Characteristics

    The characteristics of a Meteor are that it shines brightly like a shooting star in a small size, like a shooting star in a small size. When meteors that fall and enter the atmosphere are not used up and reach the earth’s surface, then objects that reach the earth are called meteorites.

    The proper sequence is before meteors, celestial bodies smaller than asteroids are called Meteoroids. After entering the Earth’s atmosphere is called a Meteor. When the meteoroid atmosphere does not run out and reaches the earth’s surface, it is called a meteorite.

    Types of Meteors

    Meteors are celestial bodies that have various types. Each type of meteor has a certain category. Here are some types of meteors, including:

    1. Based on the Composition

    Based on its composition, meteors are divided into three types, namely Iron Meteorites, Stony Meteorites, and Mixed Iron and Stony Meteorites. Here’s the explanation:

    a. Iron Meteorite

    Features Iron meteorites are meteorites where most of the material comes from iron. Iron meteorites have been found as much as 4.8% of all meteorites ever found in the world. Iron meteorites are the most massive meteorites ever found. The mineral composition is heavy because it contains iron and nickel. That is what causes these meteors to remain intact when they fall to earth. The largest iron meteorite ever found is the Namibian Hoba meteorite.

    Iron meteorites originate from the cores of planets and asteroids. This means, he can help reveal the formation of the solar system which has been a mystery. Some iron meteorites contain minerals never found on Earth.

    b. Stony meteorite

    The characteristics of a Stony Meteorite are meteors composed of rocks. Stony meteorites are found as much as 94% of all meteorites ever found in the world. Of all meteorites, 93% of them are stony meteorites. There are two main types of stony meteorites – chondrites and achondrites – which differ from each other both physically and chemically. Chondrules are formed from molten silicate rocks, and one of the important types of chondrites is carbonaceous chondrite. This type of meteorite contains carbon, water and other volatile matter and has a slightly darker color.

    Achondrites have no chondrules and no visible metal or metal sulfides are seen. Appearance is also similar to rocks on the surface of the moon and terrestrial planets. The age of the rocks is about 4.5 billion years, the younger rocks are thought to have come from material ejected from the surface of Mars.

    c. Meteorite Mixed Iron and Stony

    The characteristics of a mixed iron and stony meteorite are a mixture of types and are still a rare type, because only 1.2% of all meteorites have ever been found in the world. Meteorites of this type contain rock and iron in nearly equal proportions.

    The most likely scenario for the formation of this type of meteorite is for them to form in an area where a cold solid object encounters. In this area there is also a separation between metals with high densities and rocks that have lower densities. One type of meteorite, the mesosiderites, contains minerals that are stable at pressures below 3kbar. This shows that this type of meteorite indirectly originated from a massive object.

    2. Based on Origin

    Based on their origin, meteorites are divided into three, namely Asteroidal / Planetary Meteors, Comet Meteors and Parabolic Meteors. Here’s the explanation:

    a. Asteroidal/planetary meteors

    Characteristics Asteroidal/planetary meteors are meteorites that come from fragments of asteroids or planets that explode or destroy. Asteroids or planets that break apart will turn into smaller pieces, so they are called meteorites.

    b. Comedy Meteor

    The characteristics of the Comet Meteor are debris from comets containing gas and other solid components.

    c. Parabolic meteors

    The characteristics of a parabolic meteor are fragments of objects from outer space, but it is not known exactly what type of object they are.

    3. Based on the Meteor Shower

    Based on the meteor shower, meteors are divided into four, namely the Orionid Meteor Shower, Perseid Meteor Shower, Geminids Meteor Shower and Quadrantid Meteor Shower. Here’s the explanation:

    a. Orionid Meteor Shower

    The Orionid meteor shower is a shower that occurs every year, usually in October. The process of the Orionid meteor shower can be seen clearly and usually the meteors are yellow and green.

    b. Perseid Meteor Shower

    The Perseid meteor shower is a rain that occurs over the constellation Perseus and usually occurs when the earth passes through a meteor stream called the Perseid cloud. Based on observations made since 2 centuries ago, the Perseid meteor shower occurs in the middle of July to August every year. Perseid meteors can be seen clearly in the northern hemisphere on summer nights when the sky looks clear.

    c. Geminids Meteor Shower

    The Geminids meteor shower is a meteor shower caused by meteors originating from the asteroid 3200 Phaethon. Based on observations made 1.5 centuries ago, the Geminids meteor shower occurs at the end of the year, in December to be precise.

    d. Quadrantid Meteor Shower

    The Quadrantid meteor shower is a meteor shower that originates in the Bootes Constlation. Based on the observations made, the quadrantid meteor shower occurs in January, but this observation is more difficult because it only lasts for a matter of hours.

    Meteor Examples

    Here are some examples of meteors, including:

    1. Stony

    Stony is a type of rock meteor that has many different varieties. Stony meteors are divided into three sub-classifications, namely:

    • Chondrites contain chondrules.
    • Carbonate chondrites contain chondrules with volatile minerals.
    • Achondrites do not contain chondroles

    Counting from the total number, there are about 94% of meteor types found.

    2. Iron

    Iron is a meteorite with an alloy composition of iron, nickel and crystals. Many scientists believe that this meteor is the same as the outer core of the earth. These iron meteors account for about 4.8% of the number of meteors ever found.

    3. Stony and Iron

    Stony and Iron are examples of meteors containing rocks and iron. This type of meteor is very rare to find, and there are only about 1.2% of the number of meteors found.

    How Is An Object Recognized As A Meteorite?

    An object that falls on Earth will not be protected from the effects of the weather. As a result, the surface of the object will experience erosion so that in the end it is difficult to distinguish it from the surrounding rocks. However, on the other hand, large chunks of iron are not often found on the Earth’s surface. If a dense and dense iron object with a dark appearance is found, you can be sure that the object is a chunk of meteorite.

    In addition, changes due to weather influences on iron objects will not be the same as ordinary rocks and they will retain their original condition over a longer period of time. The factors used to identify a meteor are that the object can maintain its original appearance and condition as far as possible and can survive in its environment.

    There are two types of areas where this meteorite finds is in the desert and Antarctica. In the desert, the process of change due to weather is slow, so the meteorite will be able to maintain its initial state for a long time. Meanwhile in Antarctica, which has a thick layer of ice (about several km), silicate or iron objects near the surface are certainly meteorites.

    The rocks that fall to Earth come from various places in the Solar System and they are one of the important sources of information to get a better picture of the state and what is in the parent object.

    Information about the parent object of the meteorite is obtained by analyzing the oxygen isotopes in the minerals present in the meteorite. Some minerals can only form at high pressure, while some are unstable at high pressure. Through mineral information, it can be known where and approximately under the pressure conditions how a meteorite is formed.

    One way minerals form at high pressure is when meteorites experience shock from impact. Usually the condition of a meteorite resulting from a collision is easy to recognize because it leaves marks on the rock as a result of the collision.

    In terms of finds, meteorites are divided into two groups, namely falls and finds. The falls group is a group of meteorites that appear to fall and are found shortly after their fall on the Earth’s surface. While the finds group is a group of objects found and identified as meteorites, which have fallen on Earth tens, hundreds or even thousands of years ago.

    Iron meteorites are much more common in the finds group. For planetary researchers, the most valuable meteorites are the falls which are found immediately after falling to Earth, because natural contamination due to weather and the environment is still very minimal.

    Why Meteor Can Fall to Earth?

    In accordance with the above understanding, we know that meteoroids move around the Sun like planets. These meteoroids are scattered in our solar system between the planets up to the Kuiper Belt and Oort Cloud. If the Earth’s orbit meets the meteoroid’s orbit, then the meteoroid can enter the Earth’s atmosphere.

    This is what causes meteors to fall to Earth. Meteors can also fall in large numbers or we are familiar with meteor showers. Especially for meteor showers, they usually occur when the Earth’s orbit meets the comet’s orbit. Comets will leave behind meteors in large numbers. This condition will cause a meteor shower.

    How Often Do Meteors Fall to Earth?

    Reporting from Space, it is difficult to calculate how often meteors enter the Earth’s atmosphere. The number is very large and there is no exact count. However, you don’t need to worry because most meteors have burned up in the atmosphere and are not harmful to humans. In addition, most of the meteorites that reach the Earth’s surface are only rocks less than half a kilogram in size.

    Stones that small rarely cause casualties or extensive damage. However, because the meteorite travels at over 322 kilometers per hour, it can damage or damage the car or house it hits. The more real danger comes from shock waves or shock waves. For example the Chelyabinsk meteor that entered Earth’s atmosphere in February 2013 over the Russian sky.

    This meteor is the size of a 6-storey building and broke up about 24 kilometers above the ground. The breakup of the meteor caused a shockwave equivalent in strength to the detonation of a 500 kiloton bomb. This incident left 1,600 people injured.

    Thus the article about Meteor characteristics and explanations. Hopefully this article can be useful and add to your insight about the subject of Natural Sciences.

    • What are the characteristics of the planet Mars? This is the full explanation
    • Various Theories of the Formation of the Solar System
    • Meteor Showers and a List of Natural Phenomena in 2020
    • Tidal Theory: Theory of the Formation of the Solar System
    • Planetesimal Theory: Recognizing the Formation of Planets
  • Metaphor Figures: Definition and 12 Examples of Figures of Metaphors

    Figure of speech Metaphor which is part of the figure of speech which in Indonesian is defined as various types of figurative language. Broadly speaking, figure of speech is grouped into four types according to its function, such as the figure of speech for comparison, the figure of speech for affirmation, the figure of speech for contradiction, to the figure of satire. However, figure of speech itself has many names, such as personification, hyperbole, simile, litotes, metaphor, and so on.

    Figure of speech is usually familiarly used in a literary work, whether it’s poetry or prose, even some drama literary works also often use figure of speech. The use of figure of speech or language style in literary works is actually to add flavor and impression to a literary work. In literary works, writers or poets usually use figure of speech as a style of conveying feelings as well as views in language so that they have a more optimal and effective impression on readers and listeners, so that they become more interesting and not boring.

    Like the quotations from the books of Figures, Pantun and Poetry, Figure of speech is a figurative language in the form of figures of speech, definitions, similes, and parables that aim to beautify the meaning and message of a sentence. Figure of speech or figurative language is also understood as an activity of utilizing the richness of language elements and the use of certain varieties of language.

    So, according to what was said above, if there are four types of figures of speech, in this article we will focus on one of the most frequently used figures of speech, namely metaphorical figures of speech. This figure of speech itself is included in the type of figure of speech comparison or figure of speech equation. The following is an explanation of the meaning and types of metaphors as well as examples of their use.

    A. Definition of Figure of Speech Metaphor

    Reporting from the Central Java Language Center, metaphor is a style of language that uses words or groups in the form of sentences to refer to a certain object, but not with the actual meaning.

    This one figure of speech can also be explained as a figure of speech or figurative language which describes something in a direct and precise comparison on the basis of almost similar or perhaps the same characteristics. The metaphorical figure of speech itself is usually referred to as a comparative figure of speech or an equation figure of speech.

    In the process of comparing or equating a particular object, this figure of speech does not use connecting words. For example, tub, like, and so forth. However, metaphorical figures of speech have the characteristics of directly addressing or using these figurative words.

    B. Types of Figure of speech Metaphors

    After recognizing and understanding the meaning of metaphor. Next, we will discuss three types of metaphorical figures of speech according to Nurgiyantoro (2017). The following is an explanation of the three types of comparisons of metaphorical figures of speech, among which are:

    1. Explicit Metaphor (In Praesetia)

    This type of explicit metaphor is a comparison of three things that are shown clearly against the comparison. In an explicit metaphor, the object to be compared is placed alongside the comparator. This makes the content of a meaning seem very explicit.

    As an example:

    I am a fish who wants to swim freely across the vastness of the ocean. In this sentence it is clear that ‘I’ makes a comparison or gives a description that he is a fish that can swim across the vast ocean.

    2. Implicit Metaphor (In Absentia)

    In accordance with the previous explanation, if the metaphor in praesetia contains a very explicit meaning. This type of metaphor is very different from the metaphor in absentia which has a very implicit way of expressing it.

    This type of figurative language makes the comparison not shown directly, but by using hidden words. In figurative language in absentia, the comparison is not directly focused on the object being discussed. This can cause the reader or listener to experience confusion in understanding the meaning of the hidden expression.

    As an example:

    My wings are broken, but flying is not an option. This sentence does not clearly explain that ‘my wings’ are for the wings of a bird. Figures of speech in absentia use wings and flying objects as pointers or provide an indirect description of the comparison he makes with birds.

    3. Old or Outdated Metaphor

    This type of metaphor is an expression that provides a comparison that is commonly used. Comparisons used as expressions usually have many meanings understood by the majority of people without having to think about it long enough.

    For example: Aisyah is the village flower in that village. In this sentence, it is clearly stated that Aisyah is the most beautiful girl in the village. However, the expression ‘flowers of the village’ is very common and some have been turned into poetry or songs. The use of figures of speech or metaphorical expressions that are common cannot be classified as metaphors in praesetia or explicit metaphors or metaphors in absentia or implicit metaphors.

    C. Examples of Figure of Speech Metaphors

    Now, after understanding the meaning and types of metaphorical figures of speech, You will be invited to find out some examples of metaphorical figures of speech. The following are twelve examples of this figure of speech and their meanings, among which are:

    1. “Office rats are still roaming freely in this country”
    Meaning: “Office rats” are corruptors.
    2. “The red flame devoured dozens of houses in the village”
    Meaning: “The red flame” is fire.
    3. “Goddess of the night has shone a spark of light from behind the clouds”
    Meaning: “Goddess of the night” is the moon.
    4. “Dendi is the golden child of Mr. Udin, a charismatic lurah from the village of Butur”
    Meaning: “Masson” is the favorite child.
    5. “The mother looks gloomy because the baby is sick”
    Meaning: “The baby” is a child.
    6. “We must always instill in ourselves the character of openness in our daily lives”
    Meaning: “Empty” means patience.
    7. “You stone head! It is very difficult for you to stop smoking”
    Meaning: “Stubborn” or stubborn has a meaning such as being difficult to advise.
    8. “After returning from Japan, my sister brought a lot of souvenirs”
    Meaning: “Handmades” are souvenirs.
    9. “Rivaldi is a class star in his class”
    Meaning: “Class star” is a smart student.
    10. “In order to meet the needs of the family, he is willing to toil every day on the streets”
    Meaning: “toil” is to work hard.
    11. “Jundi always looks for faces when dealing with his teacher at school”
    Meaning: “Looking for face” is doing good, but the deed only wants to be considered good because there is a specific purpose, not in the true sense of goodness
    12. “The afternoon king has appeared”
    Meaning: “The afternoon king” is the sun.

    D. Examples of figurative language metaphors in literary works

    As previously stated, metaphorical figures of speech are figurative language that use comparative words to represent a certain object or not. That particular object may be a comparison of another physical object, idea, trait, or action. One example of the use of this figure of speech which is often used in literary works is: “I am a bitch” by Chairil Anwar.

    The word “I” in the title of this poem by the legendary Indonesian poet is not an animal, but a fully human being. The use of the word “I” in the sentence is an example of a metaphorical figure of speech in literary works. Chairil Anwar made a comparison between himself and an animal. We know for ourselves that animals are not creatures that have thoughts or feelings like humans.

    In this sentence, “I” have become an animal and am no longer a human. This comparison that depicts humans as animals gives meaning to a human who is no longer like a despised human, does not have the same degree as humans. Meanwhile, “Bitch” becomes a reinforcement for the word “I” to further ensure that there is no beauty and beauty in the animal used as a comparison.

    The metaphorical figure of speech in Chairil Anwar’s array piece above is very extraordinary, from just four sentences, there are many meanings contained in these sentences. However, what happens if the fragment of Chairil Anwar’s poem is changed by using the word explicit or as it is. Then the sentence would be something like: “I am a human who is despicable and shameless”. Of course, the sentence does not give any impression to the reader or listener. In addition, in accordance with the purpose of figure of speech in literary works, figure of speech will make literary works more beautiful and have a strong impression.

    In addition, metaphors can add a dramatic effect to a sentence. This can have an impact on the idea that is commonly used to demean yourself to make a stronger impression. The dramatic effect of the figurative language of metaphor in making the power produced lies in the contrast of the comparisons that are made.

    E. The Difference between Metaphor and Simile

    According to Tarigan, figurative language is the use of words without actual meaning, but rather as an image based on a comparison or similarity. In figurative language there are brief comparisons arranged neatly to produce a certain meaning.

    Apart from that, the metaphor is also an implicit and indirect comparison giving expressions like I look like a monkey, or you are like an angel. The metaphorical figure of speech has a difference that is almost similar to the simile figure of speech. The comparison between humans and monkeys and angels is actually an example of a simile, not a metaphor.

    As previously stated, metaphorical figures of speech will directly express the object being compared as an angel, metaphors do not use demonstrative words such as: like, looks, like, etc.

    The use of this figure of speech is in line with the opinion of Nurgiyantoro who argues that metaphor is a form of comparison or similarity between two things in the form of physical objects, characteristics, ideas or other actions that are implicit in nature. This confirms that metaphorical figures of speech do not use comparative pointers in connecting two objects.

    In simple terms, metaphorical figures of speech and similes can be distinguished in the use of demonstrative words. If the simile figure of speech will use demonstrative words: like, looks, like, like, and so on. Meanwhile, metaphorical figures of speech do not use demonstrative words such as similes.

    As an example:

    Metaphor: I’m a bitch.
    Simile: I’m such a bitch.

  • Mental Verbs: Definition, Characteristics, and Examples

    Definition of Mental Verbs – Verbs or verbs are units of words that function to describe an action performed by the subject or actor in a sentence. Generally, the verb in a sentence plays the role of a predicate. In Indonesian grammar, verbs are divided into several groups, one of which is mental verbs.

    Mental verbs are types of verbs (verbs) that describe a response or reaction to an event or activity. These types of verbs are usually referred to as behavioral verbs because they describe the behavior or actions of a person. Examples of mental verbs themselves are commonly used by people in everyday conversations.

    Besides that, mental verbs are also found in many kinds of texts, such as expository texts, and others. To find out the meaning and examples of mental verbs, see the explanation of mental verbs below.

    Definition of Mental Verbs

    According to the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), a verb or verb is a type of word that has the function of describing processes, actions or circumstances, while mental has a meaning concerned with the mind and human nature.

    So, from the two meanings above, it can be said that the notion of a mental verb is a type of verb that describes an action related to the human mind in response to an action or event.

    According to Fitri Itut Rahayu in the Indonesian Language Textbook for Class XI Vocational Schools, it states that the word meaning of mental verbs is a verb that describes one’s perception, affection, and cognition. A sentence that uses a mental verb usually consists of a sensor and an event. For example, father (sensator) is surprised to see (mental verb) a flood in front of the house (phenomenon).

    In general, mental verbs are types of verbs that are used to describe a person’s reaction, response, or attitude towards an action or activity. This type of verb is also known as a behavioral verb or behavioral verb because it describes a person’s behavior towards an event or phenomenon that is experienced.

    In the configuration of a sentence, the mental verb as a predicate cannot stand alone. The existence of a mental verb in a sentence is very dependent on the subject and the event or phenomenon described.

    Characteristics of Mental Verbs

    Based on the explanation above, mental verbs have a number of characteristics or characteristics that distinguish these verbs from other types of verbs. The characteristics of mental verbs are as follows.

    1. Describe Human Perception, Affection, and Cognition

    The main characteristic of mental verbs is to explain or describe actions related to one’s perception, affection, and cognition.

    2. Cannot Stand Alone

    Mental verbs are words that describe a person’s behavior or actions. Therefore, this verb cannot stand alone because it must have a subject as well as an object and a predicate as an event.

    3. Triggered by Subject and Object

    Another feature of mental verbs is that they must be accompanied by a subject as well as an object that triggers the birth of a response action. The object in question can be another person or a particular phenomenon that is the trigger.

    Mental Verb Forms

    Based on the available data, there are two types of mental verbs, namely basic verbs (monomorphemic) and derived verbs (polymorphemic). Based on its syntactic behavior, mental verbs are divided into two behaviors, namely behavior at the phrase level and behavior at the sentence level.

    Based on its semantic meaning, mental verbs are divided into three meanings, namely mental verbs meaning circumstances, mental verbs meaning process, and mental verbs meaning attitude.

    Example 1: We need superior human resources who are tolerant and have noble character.

    The example above shows three constituents, namely we , need , and superior human resources who are tolerant and have noble character. Based on its form, the word need is a verb that is monomorphemic. The word need , without going through a morphological process, has been able to occupy one of the syntactic functions, namely the predicate.

    Based on its syntactic behavior in terms of phrase level, the word need in example 1 can stand alone and occupy the function of the predicate. Based on its syntactic behavior in terms of sentence level, the word need in example 1 is a transitive verb with an object. It is called transitive because the word need which functions as a predicate requires the presence of an object in the form of the phrase “excellent human resources who are tolerant and have noble character”.

    So, the word need includes an object transitive verb. The word need is a type of mental verb because based on its meaning in the sentence, the word cannot be done physically. Based on its semantic meaning, the word need is a verb which means ‘need’.

    The meaning of the word need in example 1 is a condition related to emotions or feelings requiring superior, tolerant, and noble human resources.

    Example 2: We have started with the B20 program, we will enter B30, a mixture of diesel fuel and 30 percent biodiesel.

    Example 2 consists of five constituents, that is , we have started , with the B20 program, will enter , and to B30 a mixture of diesel fuel with 30 percent biodiesel . In example 2 there are two mental verbs, namely start and enter .

    Based on the form, the words start and enter are monomorphemic verbs. The words start and enter , without going through a morphological process have been able to occupy one of the syntactic functions, namely the predicate. Based on their syntactic behavior in terms of phrase level, the words start and enter in example 2 function as predicates, respectively, side by side with the words already and will , both of which are categorized as adverbs.

    Based on the syntactic behavior in terms of the sentence level, the words start and enter in example 2 are non-transitive verbs without a complement. It is called intransitive because the words start and enter do not require the presence of an object. The sentence in example 2 also has no complements.

    So, the words start and enter are non-transitive verbs without the complement. The words start and enter are types of mental verbs because based on their meaning in the sentence, these words cannot be done physically. Based on its semantic meaning, the word start is a verb which means the attitude of ‘to start doing’.

    The meaning of the word start in example 2 is an attitude related to emotion or feeling to start an action. The action in question is a leap of progress with the B20 program and entry into B30. The meaning of the word entered in example 2 is an attitude related to emotion or feeling for coming to B30.

    Example 3: Data is a new type of wealth for our nation, now data is more valuable than oil.

    Example 3 consists of 7 constituents, namely data , is , a new type of wealth for our nation, now, data, is more valuable , and from oil . The mental verb in example 3 is the word valuable . Valuable verbs are polymorphemic verbs with the prefix ber -.

    Valuable in example 3 has the base form price which gets the prefix ber -. The basic form of price belongs to the class of nouns, to change its status to a verb it is necessary to add the prefix ber -. Based on its syntactic behavior in terms of phrase level, the word valuable in example 3 functions as a predicate alongside more words which are categorized as adverbs.

    Based on its syntactic behavior in terms of sentence level, the word valuable in example 3 is a non-transitive verb without a complement. It is called intransitive because the word valuable does not require the presence of an object. The sentence in example 3 also has no complements. So, the word valuable is a non-transitive verb without a complement.

    The word valuable is a type of mental verb because based on its meaning in the sentence, the word cannot be done physically. Based on its semantic meaning, the word valuable is a verb that means the state of having a high value.

    The meaning of the word valuable in example 3 is a condition related to the emotion or feeling of having high value. Something that has a high price is data. Data is referred to as a new type of wealth that has a higher price than oil.

    Example 4: We should be grateful, in the midst of various challenges and the storms of history, Indonesia as our common big house is still standing strong.

    Example 4 consists of 5 constituents, namely us ; should be grateful, in the midst of various challenges and the storms of history, Indonesia as our big home together , and still standing strong . The mental verb in example 4 is the word grateful .

    The verb grateful is included in the polymorphemic verb with the prefix ber -. Thankful in example 4 has a basic form of gratitude that gets the prefix ber- . The basic form of gratitude belongs to the class of nouns, to change its status to a verb it is necessary to add the prefix ber -.

    Based on the syntactic behavior in terms of the phrase level, the word grateful in example 4 functions as a predicate alongside a proper word which is categorized as an adjective. Based on its syntactic behavior in terms of the sentence level, the word grateful in example 4 is a non-transitive verb without a complement.

    It is called non-transitive because the word gratitude does not require the presence of an object. The sentence in example 4 also has no complements. So, the word grateful is a non-transitive verb without a complement.

    Examples of Mental Verbs

    After understanding the meaning and characteristics of mental verbs, identify various examples. For those of you who are still confused about examples of this type of verb, see a collection of examples of mental verbs and their meanings below.

    1. Perception

    Perceptual verbs are a type of mental verb which aims to describe human perception, the process by which a person knows several things through his five senses.

    Here’s an example of the verb:

    • Seeing: using the eyes to see, watch, know, prove, observe, predict, look, visit.
    • Enjoy: to feel, experience or something that is enjoyable or satisfying.
    • Hearing: being able to perceive sounds (sounds) with the ears.
    • Feel: feel, enjoy.
    • Seeing: seeing and noticing.

    Example of sentences:

    “Galih saw Ratna waiting for public transportation behind the school with a somber face.”

    In this sentence, ‘Galih’ acts as the subject, with the mental verb ‘see’ as the predicate. The phrase ‘Ratna is waiting for public transportation…’ is a trigger for Galih’s mental verbs.

    “Oki felt cold air enveloping him as he walked down the dark alley.”

    The phrase ‘cold air enveloped him…’ is the trigger for the predicate mental verb ‘feel’ which is done by the subject ‘Oki’.

    2. Affect

    Affect is a type of mental verb that describes or describes one’s feelings and emotions. Here’s an example of the verb:

    • Laughter: gives birth to a feeling of joy, pleasure, amusement, and so on with a crackling sound.
    • Grief: grieve, grieve, feel sad.
    • Crying: feeling sad (disappointed, sorry, and so on) by shedding tears and making noise.
    • To like: to love, to love, to cherish.
    • Worry: fear (anxiety, anxiety) of something that is not known with certainty.

    Example of sentences:

    “Citra is worried that Aji won’t be able to complete his mission this time.”

    The predicate ‘worried’ in the sentence above is a variety of affective verbs that describe the subject’s feelings ‘Image’ towards the phrase “Aji can’t …” the event or phenomenon that triggers the mental verb.

    “Kanaya regretted not being able to be by her father’s side in the last moments of her life.”

    The phrase ‘unable to be by his father’s side …’ is the trigger for the predicate of the affective verb ‘sorry’ as the emotion felt by the subject ‘Kanaya’.

    3. Cognition

    Cognitive verbs are a type of verb that describes the process by which a person obtains information or knowledge. Here’s an example he said:

    • Understand: understand correctly, know correctly.
    • Knowing: realizing or realizing.
    • To ponder: to seek effort to resolve, to ponder, to consider.
    • Estimating: making calculations approximately, or surmising, making an estimate.
    • Opinion: having and expressing opinion.

    Example of sentences:

    “Father is thinking of registering our family car with the motor vehicle insurance program.”

    The predicate ‘think’ is a mental verb that describes the cognitive activity of the subject ‘Father’ in response to the activity in the phrase “registering the family car…”

    “Arumi understands that Malik’s decision not to allow her to work while pregnant is the result of Malik’s concern for her safety.”

    In that sentence, the phrase “Malik’s decision…” triggers the subject ‘Arumi’ to react with the mental verb predicate ‘understand’.

    Examples of Using Mental Verbs

    The following is a collection of examples of the use of mental verbs in a sentence:

    • Rani thought back to Ratna’s words yesterday.
    • David realized that he had lost his cell phone while heading to the office.
    • Mother burst into tears when she saw my sister being taken to the hospital.
    • BMKG predicts that there will be a flood disaster in the East Jakarta city area after very heavy rains.
    • The audience really liked the traditional dance performed by the school’s dance team.
    • Mr. Budi was surprised to hear that his son had an accident.
    • The man regretted the way he treated his girlfriend after their relationship broke up.
    • Mrs. Rahmi is worried about the state of her son who is wandering outside the city.
    • I felt dad tuck me in last night.
    • Fira is sincere for her mother’s departure.
    • Danu was very happy because he got pocket money from his father.
    • Dinda felt sad because her test score this time dropped drastically.
    • Ratna refused Fadlan’s apology because she was already hurt.
    • Muslims believe that Allah SWT is the only God and Prophet Muhammad SAW is the messenger of Allah SWT.
    • Fani is desperate when the announcement of the end of the national olympics.
    • Danang got to know Duta when he was in the crowd at a concert.
    • Putra agrees with the opinion conveyed by Fahmi.
    • Mother expects me to be a successful person and willing to help others.
    • Andi enjoys the cooking made by his mother.
    • The concert goers were very excited when the concert started.
    • Adi scolds his younger brother for breaking his collection of favorite toys.
    • Dani is offended when his friends call him fat.
    • Fina understands the feelings of her grieving friend.
    • Indah believes that her lover will never betray her love.
    • Arin agreed with the opinion conveyed by the panelists on TV.
    • Anna had doubts about her final score when the grade announcement was about to be made.
    • Winda laughed out loud at the joke made by Dandi.

    Closing

    Indonesian grammar has various types of verbs that can be included in sentences to enrich writing. A variety of mental verbs is a variety of verbs that are often found in various kinds of writing. However, not many recognize this variety of verbs, even though the message in a sentence can be conveyed more precisely if it is applied correctly.

    That’s a collection of examples of mental verbs and their use in a sentence. Hopefully it can be useful for all of you!

  • Mendel’s Laws: Definition, Difference, Experiment, and Apparent Deviations of Mendel’s Laws

    Mendel’s Law – Sinaumed’s must have known that the genes in living things greatly affect how the “form” of their offspring will be, be it in humans, animals, even plants. Yep, the existence of genes in living things is the main subject and object in Genetics, namely a science that studies how traits are inherited from parents to offspring. Genes are also the most important aspect of living things because through them, they can reproduce and preserve their offspring. Now, to “calculate” how the embodiment of parental genes will be given to their offspring, you can use Mendel’s Law.

    Even in this advanced era, the existence of Mendel’s Law does not necessarily become subject matter in the field of Biology, you know  It turns out that both Mendel’s Law I and II have been applied in Agriculture, especially to find superior seeds through crossing. Then how does Mendel ‘s Law I and II sound? What about examples of experiments carried out through Mendel’s Laws I and II? Why are genes important in the effort to inherit traits from parents to offspring? So, so that Sinaumed’s understands these things, let’s look at the following review!

    What do Mendel’s Laws I and II sound like?

    Just a little trivia , Sinaumed’s , Mendel’s Law which discusses the system of inheritance from parents to offspring was first coined by Gregor Johann Mendel, who was born on July 22, 1840. His first theory regarding the inheritance system was put forward in 1865, based on his cross research using varieties pea. The research results are written in a paper entitled Experiment in Plant Hybridization .

    In cross-breeding research, the male and female parents are named parental (oldest) and are symbolized by the letter P. So, the results of the parental cross are named filius (children) and are symbolized by the letter F. Meanwhile, the cross between the male parent and the female parent is called P1. and the filial is called F1. Then, crosses between F1 males and F1 females that are carried out randomly will be called P2, while the filials will be called F2, and so on.

    Mendel’s Law I

    Mendel’s Law I has another name, namely the Law of Segregation. In the Law of Segregation it states that “In the formation of gametes (sex cells) the two genes that are partners will be separated in two daughter cells’. Well, Mendel’s Law I or the Law of Segregation applies to monohybrid crosses, aka crosses with one different trait.

    Broadly speaking, Mendel’s Law I will relate to the existence of 3 points, namely:

    1. Genes have alternative forms that regulate variations in the inherited characters. This is what makes the concept of two kinds of alleles, namely a) recessive alleles (not always visible from the outside, expressed in lower case, for example w in the picture); and b) the dominant allele (visible from the outside, expressed in capital letters, for example R)
    2. Each individual carries a pair of genes, one from the male parent (eg ww) and one from the female parent (eg RR)
    3. If this pair of genes has two different alleles, the dominant allele will always be expressed (visually visible from the outside). Recessive alleles that are not always expressed will still be passed on to the gametes (sex cells) formed in their offspring.

    Consider the example of a cross between a dominant red rose and a recessive white rose, below

    Well, Mendel’s First Law also states that two alleles (gene variants) that regulate certain traits will separate in two different gametes (sex cells). Mendel’s Law I includes several things, namely:

    • Alleles (gene variations) for inherited trait variations. For example: the colors of two different flowers, called alleles, will occupy the locus that corresponds to the homologous pair.
    • Two alleles for a character will separate when gametes (sex cells) are produced. Example: the result of a cross containing one allele of the parent flower color (purple or white)
    • Each character in each organism will inherit two alleles, each of which comes from the parent. Example: the result of a cross that is likely to produce 1 white allele and 1 purple allele.
    • If there are two different alleles, one of them will be dominant, while the other will be recessive. Example: there is a marriage of purple flowers with white flowers, it will produce purple offspring.

    Mendel’s Law II

    In Mendel II’s Law or also known as the Law of Independent Assortment or the Law of Independently Grouping of Genes, it states that ‘if two individuals differ from one another in two or more pairs of traits, then the nature of that pair will be inherited, not depending on the nature of the other pair. ‘ . The existence of Mendel II’s Law applies to dihybrid crosses (with two different traits). In a dihybrid cross, for example, there is an individual with the genotype AaBb, then A and a and B and b will separate and then the pair will join freely. Through this, it is possible that the gametes (sex cells) that are formed will have AB, Ab, aB, and ab properties.

    In short, Mendel’s Law II states that alleles (gene variations) with different genes do not affect each other. This also explains that the genes that determine plant height and plant color do not affect each other. Check out the following examples!

    Difference Between Mendel’s Law I and II

    The difference between Mendel’s Law I and II is most obvious in the traits that are crossed. In Mendel’s Law I states that the formation of gametes (sex cells) in both parental genes that are paired with alleles, will separate alias segregation. This causes each gamete to receive one gene from its parent.

    Meanwhile, Mendel II’s Law states that if there are individuals who differ from each other in two or more pairs of traits, then it will inherit a pair of traits and not depend on other traits.

    In conclusion, in Mendel’s Law I will experience a process of segregation or separation of cells freely. While in Mendel II’s Law will experience independent gene grouping.

    Examples of Crosses in Mendel’s Laws

    Mendel’s Law I

    1. Monohybrid Cross

    At that time, Mendel made an experiment by crossing two individuals of peas that had different characteristics, namely between peas with high stems and peas with low stems. While the ‘high’ trait is dominant over the ‘low’ trait, so it will produce:

    If you look again at the theory of Mendel’s Law I which states that in the formation of gametes (sex cells) the allele pairs will separate freely. Well, this separation event will be seen when the formation of individual gametes that have a heterozygous genotype, so that each gamete (sex cell) will contain one of these alleles.

    2. Backcross and Testcross

    Backcross is the process of crossing or mating hybrid individuals (F1) with one of the parents. The goal is to be able to know the genotype of the parent (parental). Consider the following example by relying on the ‘high’ property of peas.

    While testcross is the process of crossing an F1 individual with one of its homozygous recessive parents. The goal is to find out whether the F1 individual is homozygous or heterozygous.

    Mendel’s Law II

    1. Dihybrid Cross

    Through this Dihybrid cross experiment, Mendel tried to involve two traits at once and concluded that in the process of forming gametes (sex cells), each pair of alleles at one locus will segregate independently with other locus allele pairs, and will combine freely with alleles from that locus. other. In short, monohybrid is a hybrid with 1 different trait, while dihybrid is a hybrid with 2 different traits.

    At that time, Mendel used pea plants as his object of observation, for the following reasons:

    • Having a pair of striking or contrasting characteristics.
    • Self-pollination (autogamy), so that hereditary traits tend to remain.
    • Easy to cross pollinate.
    • Quick to produce offspring.
    • Can have many offspring.

    The following are the properties possessed by pea plants, so that they are used as objects of observation for this dihybrid cross.

    The process of dihybrid crosses has the following characteristics:

    • Crossing is done by paying attention to two different properties.
    • The number of gametes (sex cells) formed in each individual is 4 (2n)
    • An individual’s phenotype will be determined by 2 types of genetic traits.
    • There will be about a maximum of 16 genotypic variations in F2.

    Pseudo Deviation of Mendel’s Laws

    In Mendel’s law, both I and II, there will be apparent deviations, which are a form of crossing by producing different phenotypic ratios on a dihybrid basis. Even though it looks different, actually the phenotypic ratio is a modified form of the sum of the phenotypic ratios which is based on all of Mendel’s Laws.

    For example, in a marriage between 2 individuals with 2 different traits, it turns out that the F2 phenotypic ratio is not always 9 : 3 : 3 : 1. However, you will often find different comparisons, but a combination of Mendelian comparison numbers written 9: 3: 3:1 i.e.:

    • 9 : 7 = 9 : ( 3 + 3 + 1 )
    • 12 : 3 : 1 = ( 9 + 3 ) : 3 : 1
    • 15 : 1 = ( 9 + 3 + 3 ) : 1
    • 9 : 3 : 4 = 9 : 3 : ( 3 + 1 )

    If it is based on Mendel’s Law II, one allele will not affect each other’s segregation of other allele pairs in determining different traits. These genes will be freely paired and give rise to certain traits in individuals. Well, that’s what is called the ‘Pseudo Deviation of Mendel’s Law’. It is called “pseudo” because the principle of independent segregation remains in effect, and is caused by the genes that carry traits in determining these particular characteristics. The following are the characteristics of ‘Pseudo Deviations of Mendel’s Laws’:

    • The resulting phenotypic ratio is different from Mendel’s Law.
    • There are certain traits in the gene that cause different results in filial 2.
    • There is interaction between genes.

    Types of Pseudo Deviations of Mendel’s Laws

    1. Atavism

    Atavism is a process of interaction between genes that produces filial or offspring with different phenotypes from their parents. Example: atavism in chicken comb which has four types, namely rose (R-pp), pea (rrP-), walnut (RP-), and katakana (rrpp). Then it will be the following:

    A homozygous rooster with rose comb is crossed with a homozygous pea comb female rooster. From the results of these crosses, it was found that all F1 had walnut combs. If the F1 is crossed with each other, the possible ratio of the F2 is 9:3:3:1

     2. Cryptomers

    Cryptomerism is the hidden event of the dominant gene, especially if it is not paired with another dominant gene. So, if the dominant gene stands alone, it will become hidden, aka cryptos. Example: cryptomeri in the Linaria Maroccana flower cross which has 4 genes, namely:

    • A = formed anthocyanin pigment
    • B = no anthocyanin pigment is formed
    • C = alkaline protoplasm
    • D = acid protoplasm

    Then through these 4 genes will form:

    3. Polymers

    Polymer is a process of interaction between genes that are cumulative or add to each other. So, these genes will interact with each other to influence and produce the same offspring. For example: polymerization in red grain wheat with 2 genes, namely M1 and M2, so that when the two genes meet, the color expression obtained will also be stronger. Pay attention to the following explanation!

    4. Epistatis and Hypostatic

    Epistasis-Hypostasis is an event when a dominant gene will cover the influence of other dominant genes that are not alleles. The gene that covers it is called epistasis, while the gene that covers it is called hypostasis. An example of this epistasis-hypostasis can be found in the cross between the pumpkin and the white pumpkin.

    5. Gene-gene complements

    Complementary is the process of interaction between dominant genes, with different but complementary traits, so that a certain phenotype will emerge. If one of these genes does not appear, then the trait in question will not appear either. Examples of these complementary genes can be found in the Lathyrus Odoratus flower cross which has 4 genes in the form of:

    • C = forming color pigments.
    • c = does not form color pigments.
    • P = forming activator enzyme.
    • p = does not knock down the activator enzyme.

    Get to know the Theory of Inheritance

    Inheritance of traits can also be referred to as “heredity” which refers to the inheritance of traits from parents to offspring. This heredity is also related to genetics, which is a science that studies the inheritance of traits. Well, the inheritance of these traits can be determined by chromosomes and genes. There are theories about inheritance, including:

    1. Embryo theory

    This theory was put forward by William Harvey who argued that all animals came from eggs. This statement was further strengthened by Reinier de Graaf as the first researcher to introduce the union of sperm cells with egg cells in the formation of embryos. Reinier also stated that the ovaries in birds were the same as those in rabbits.

    2. Preformation Theory

    This theory was put forward by Jan Swammerdam who stated that the egg contains all future generations, so it can be considered as a miniature of the previously formed individuals.

    3. Embryological Epigenesis Theory

    This theory was put forward by CF Wolf who stated that there is a vital force contained in the seeds of organisms. Through this power, it can cause the growth of the embryo based on the previous pattern of development.

    4. Germplasm Theory

    This theory was put forward by JB Lamarck who stated that the nature that occurs is due to stimuli from the outside (especially the environment), on the structure of organ functions which are passed on to the next generation.

    •  
  • Members of the Nine Committees and Their Respective Tasks, and BPUPKI

    Members of the Committee of Nine – When talking about Indonesian history, especially about independence, it cannot be separated from the name BPUPKI. Within BPUPKI itself there are lots of meetings that discuss various kinds of discussions. Of the many discussions that were carried out, one of them was the drafting of the text of the Jakarta charter.

    The drafting of the text of the Jakarta charter can be said to be one of the forerunners to the formation of the ideology and basis of the Indonesian state, namely Pancasila. The text of the Jakarta charter was formed or drafted by nine members of the committee.

    Well, on this occasion we will discuss more about the Committee of Nine. So, watch this review to the end, Sinaumed’s.

    Member of the Committee of Nine

    The Committee of Nine was a small committee which was formed at the end of the first session of the BPUPKI (Investigating Agency for Preparatory Work for Indonesian Independence) which took place on 29 May-1 June 1945. The members of the Committee of Nine themselves were established on 22 June 1945.

    As is well known, BPUPKI is led by Dr. Radjiman Wedyodiningrat and was tasked with formulating several things including the form of the state and the basic philosophy of the state. One of them is formulating the basis of the state through the Committee of Nine.

    The members of the Committee of Nine are chaired by Ir. Soekarno and deputy chairman Drs. Mohammad Hatta. The task of the committee of nine is also to discuss and formulate the basis of the Indonesian state. In addition, the Committee of Nine is also tasked with accommodating various kinds of input and suggestions from BPUPKI members. Then, from this task, the trial began, from May 29 to June 1, 1945.

    From this meeting itself then produced the Jakarta Charter or Jakarta Charter . However, before producing the Jakarta Charter, there were already several national figures who provided basic suggestions for the state, namely Ir. Sukarno, Mr. Soepomo, and Mr. Muhammad Yamen. The three national figures have different ideas about the basis of the state.

    Even though Mr. Soepomo was not a member of the Committee of Nine, his role in conveying ideas was very significant. What’s more, his role in BPUPKI itself.

    Then, on June 1, 1945, Ir Soekarno delivered his speech regarding the basis of the Indonesian state which we are now more familiar with as Pancasila. From then on, Pancasila began to be used as the basis of the Indonesian state. However, at that time, the contents of the Jakarta Charter or Pancasila underwent changes because the first precepts were considered not to reflect the character of the Indonesian nation.

    Therefore, after the protest against the 1st precept, the text of the Jakarta Charter underwent changes. However, these changes were no longer made by BPUPKI but by PPKI. This is because during the change in the text, BPUPKI was disbanded and replaced with PPKI.

    Basically, the Committee of Nine was formed after the BPUPKI formed a committee of eight or better known as the “Small Committee”. At that time, after the Committee of Eight had finished holding a meeting with 38 BPUPKI members, then the Committee of Nine was formed by BPUPKI.

    The Committee of Nine is tasked with investigating various kinds of proposals regarding the basic formulation of the state. The trial itself took place on June 22, 1945. The chairman of the nine committees was Ir. Soekarno with his deputy chairman being Drs. Mohammad Hatta. Member. The nine committee figures consisted of participants at the BPUPKI session, and consisted of Islamic groups and nationalist groups. The following is a list of nine committee members:

    1. Ir. Sukarno (served as chairman)
    2. Drs. Mohammad Hatta (served as Vice Chairman)
    3. KHA Wahid Hasyim
    4. Kyai Haji Kahar Muzakir
    5. Mr. AA Maramis
    6. Abikusno Tjokrosujoso (served as an Islamic group)
    7. Mr. Achmad Soebardjo (served as a national group)
    8. H. Agus Salim
    9. Mr. Mohammed. Yamin.

    So, that’s the list of members of the Committee of Nine along with a brief history of the formation of the Committee of Nine. with the results of the meeting of the Committee of Nine, the Indonesian people have a state foundation that is in accordance with the characteristics of the nation.

    Committee of Nine

    The duties of the Committee of Nine include discussing and formulating the basis for an independent Indonesian state. This committee also then collects various suggestions as well as the votes of the audience who attended the trial. Starting from a meeting attended by BPUPKI members, the Committee of Nine then produced a formulation of the Jakarta Charter. Quoting from the book Citizenship Education:

    By Building Democratic Citizens, the meeting was then held at the Jawa Hokokai building. During the meeting, discussions were held regarding the basic formulation of the state. This meeting itself was held with the aim of achieving an independent Indonesia. The Ninel Committee then makes suggestions to the relevant investigating agency regarding:

    1. This investigative body then determines the form of the state and draws up basic laws.
    2. About nationality and finance.
    3. Requesting the Tokyo government and BPUPKI to immediately implement independence for the Indonesian state, in accordance with the basic law determined by the investigative agency and installed the national government.

    On 22 June 1945, the committee of nine then held a meeting at the residence of Ir. Soekarno, at Jalan Pegangsaan Timur Number 56, Jakarta. The meeting itself discussed the draft preamble to the constitution. The Committee of Nine then produced a formula as the goal of an independent Indonesian state. From the results of the meeting which resulted in the Jakarta Charter (Jakarta Charter).

    Until finally, the text of the Jakarta Charter was signed by a committee of nine. The contents of the Jakarta Charter include the following:

    1. Belief in the One and Only God by carrying out Islamic law for its adherents as an obligation.
    2. Just and civilized humanity.
    3. The unity of Indonesia.
    4. Population led by wisdom in deliberations or representatives.
    5. Social justice for all the people of Indonesia.

    This formulation of the Jakarta Charter was then presented at the second meeting of the BPUPKI which was held on July 10, 1945. Quoting from the book I am Indonesia, I am Pancasila, PKN Package B , the committee of Nine then believed that the Jakarta Charter could unite understanding during the BPUPKI meeting. Until finally on July 14, 1945, through this second meeting, the Jakarta Charter was then accepted by BPUPKI.

    Changes to the Text of the Jakarta Charter

    Quoting from the kemdikbud.go.id website , after the BPUPKI was disbanded a PPKI was formed which continued the duties of the BPUPKI. PPKI stands for Indonesian Independence Preparatory Committee. PPKI itself made changes to Pancasila texts which were carried out in a session.

    The trial took place on August 18, 1945 and was held at the Jakarta Arts Building. The assembly itself agreed to change the opening sentence of the Constitution in the fourth paragraph regarding the basis of the Pancasila state, the first precept then reads “Belief with the obligation to carry out Islamic law for its adherents” which was changed to “Belief in the One and Only God”.

    The change in the first paragraph itself is to protect the interests of the nation and state, because Indonesia consists of various tribes and religions. The first precept change also upholds tolerance and maintains unity and oneness. Following are the contents of the 1945 Constitution which was later ratified by PPKI on August 18, 1945:

    • Belief in the one and only God.
    • Just and civilized humanity.
    • The unity of Indonesia.
    • Population led by wisdom in deliberations or representatives.
    • Social justice for all the people of Indonesia.

    About BPUPKI

    BPUPKI is an independence preparatory committee which was later formed by the Japanese and also chaired by Dr. KRT Radjiman Wedyodiningrat. BPUPKI itself was formed on 29 April 1945 and was dissolved on 7 August 1945. BPUPKI stands for Investigating Agency for Preparatory Efforts for Independence.

    BPUPKI’s own duties include providing assistance and support for the process of Indonesian independence. In addition, the purpose of establishing the BPUPKI is to study and investigate matters related to the formation of the Indonesian state and the basis of the Indonesian state.

    The background for the formation of the BPUPKI itself was contained in the Gunseikan Declaration No. 23 dated 29 May 1945. One of the reasons for the formation of the BPUPKI was that Japan’s position was increasingly being threatened by the allies. In addition, another reason for the formation of the BPUPKI was that Japan then captivated the hearts of the Indonesian people to maintain power.

    The BPUPKI inauguration ceremony itself was held on May 28, 1945, at the Cuo Sangi In building, Jalan Pejambon (which is now known as the Ministry of Foreign Affairs Building), Jakarta. The BPUPKI session itself took place twice. In this session discussed the basic formulation of the state, the establishment of the PPKI, and discussed the draft Constitution.

    BPUPKI Organizational Structure

    In Japanese, BPUPKI is also known as Dokuritsu Junbi Cosakai. BPUPKI has 62 members chaired by Dr. KRT Radjiman Wedyodiningrat. The deputy chairmen were Raden Pandji Soeroso and the Japanese representative, Ichibangase Yosio.

    Meanwhile, the head of the secretariat was Toyohito Masuda and Mr. AG. Pringgodigdo. The BPUPKI session itself took place twice and also gave birth to nine committees. The duties of the nine committees include providing incoming suggestions and determining unanimity of opinion.

    BPUPKI members themselves consist of 62 Indonesians, 8 special people from Japan whose job is to observe, with an additional 6 members from Indonesia. The formation of these members was then determined by Japan, while an additional six people were appointed as BPUPKI members. Here are some names of BPUPKI members:

    • RT Radjiman Wedyodiningrat (as head of BPUPKI)
    • P. Soeroso (as Deputy Chairman of BPUPKI)
    • Ichibangse Yoshio (as Deputy Chairman of BPUPKI)
    • Soekarno (as a member of BPUPKI)
    • Moh. Hatta (as a member of BPUPKI)
    • Muhammad Yamin (as BPUPKI member)
    • Johannes Latuharhary (as BPUPKI member)
    • R. Hendromartono (as a member of BPUPKI)
    • Soekardjo Wirjopranoto (as member of BPUPKI)
    • H. Ahmad Sanusi (as a member of BPUPKI)
    • Agoes Moechsin Dasaad (as BPUPKI member)
    • Tang Eng Hoa (as a member of BPUPKI)
    • Soerachman Tjokrodimuljo (as member of BPUPKI)
    • Soemitro Kolopaking Poerbonegoro (as a member of BPUPKI)
    • Soerjaningrat (as member of BPUPKI)
    • Achmad Soebardjo (as BPUPKI member)
    • Dr. R. Djenal Asikin Widjajakoesoema (as member of BPUPKI)
    • RM. Abikoesno Tjokrosoejoso (as member of BPUPKI)
    • Parada Harahap (as member of BPUPKI)
    • RM. Sartono (as a member of BPUPKI)
    • Mas Mansoer (as a member of BPUPKI)
    • KRMA. Sosrodiningrat (as a member of BPUPKI)
    • R. Soewandi (as member of BPUPKI)
    • Abdul Wachid Hasjim (as BPUPKI member)
    • F Dahler (as member of BPUPKI)
    • Sukiman Wirjosandjojo (as member of BPUPKI)
    • KRMT. Wongsonegoro (as a member of BPUPKI)
    • Oto Iskandar Di Nata (as BPUPKI member)
    • Baswedan (as member of BPUPKI)
    • Abdoel Kadir (as BPUPKI member)
    • Samsi Sastro Widagdo (as BPUPKI member)
    • AA Maramis (as a member of BPUPKI)
    • R. Samoeddin (as BPUPKI member)
    • R. Sastro Moeljono (as BPUPKI member)
    • Abdul Fatah Hasan (as a member of BPUPKI)
    • Asikin Natanegara (as a member of BPUPKI)
    • Soerjohamidjojo (as member of BPUPKI)
    • P. Mohammad Noor (as a member of BPUPKI)
    • Mas Besar Martokoesoemo (as BPUPKI member)
    • Abdoel Kaffar (as BPUPKI member)
  • Meganthropus Paleojavanicus, The Oldest Early Human History in Indonesia

    Meganthropus Paleojavanicus – Indonesia has an important history and culture, including in the world of archeology or archeology. For example, the discovery of ancient human fossils. Of several ancient human fossils in Indonesia, Meganthropus Paleojavanicus is the oldest ancient human fossil.

    Fossils of Meganthropus Paleojavanicus were found in the Sangiran area, Central Java. Now Sangiran is an archaeological site on the island of Java.

    The discoverer of the Meganthropus Paleojavanicus fossil was GHR Von Koenigswald in 1941. Early human types have a large bone structure.

    GHR Von Koenigswald conducted research from the Bengawan Solo river from 1936 – 1941. It is estimated that this Javanese giant man came from the lower Pleistocene layer.
    Meganthropus Paleojavanicus is characterized by a well-built body, large and strong jaws. This ancient human type is thought to have lived in the Old Stone Age (Pleothhikum). Life time is estimated 1 million to 2 million years ago.

    The parts found at that time were the lower jaw and the upper jaw. It was Von Koenigswald who gave the name Meganthropus Paleojavanicus which means ” a giant man from Java .”

    Meganthropus Paleojavanicus still relies on nature to survive. When the natural resources for food run out, they will move to other places that provide abundant natural resources.

    Meganthropus Paleojavanicus

    Meganthropus Paleojavanicus comes from the word ‘mega’ which means ‘big’ and anthropus means human. While the word ‘paleo’ means old and ‘Javanicus’ comes from Java. The discovery of fossils was not found in a complete state. The only fossils found were the skull, lower jaw and loose teeth.

    The planting is also not just a name and without reason. This means that the body of Meganthropus Paleojavanicus is quite large compared to other early humans. The researchers estimated their presence from several remnants of life around the place where they were found, such as carvings, household tools and so on.

    The fossils of Meganthropus Paleojavanicus that have been found are fragments of the upper jaw, fragments of the lower jaw and a number of loose teeth. In addition to the existence of Meganthropus Paleojavanicus, in Java there are also many physical evidences of the existence of early humans who have been buried since the Lower, Middle, and Upper Pleistocene to the early Holocene.

    The Meganthropus Paleojavanicus fossil is thought to have existed from the oldest period, namely the Lower Pleistocene or around 2,588,000 years ago.

    Characteristics of Meganthropus Paleojavanicus

    1. The bones on the crown appear short and the shape of the nose is wide

    The bones on the fontanel that he has appear short but his nose is wide. That way, the face of this ancient human is very similar to that of a gorilla, it’s just that there are a number of fundamental differences that don’t lead him to the ape species.

    2. Has a prominent forehead protrusion and thick cheekbones.

    The forehead of Meganthropus Paleojavanicus is very prominent and thick. Besides that, the cheekbones are the same, so the shape is clearer with clearly printed strokes.

    3. The shape of the molars resembles a human

    Although the physical form is more similar to apes and gorillas, there is still one characteristic that humans have today, namely the shape of their molars. However, the teeth and jaws were bigger and stronger than humans today. This is useful for chewing hard foods better.

    4. The brain volume is 900 cc

    Surviving in nature gave paleojavanicus ancient humans a brain volume of up to 900 cc. This indicates that even though his life was far from sophistication and ease, his thinking ability was quite high so that he could make good use of nature.

    For example, the tools used by these ancient humans were hand axes and chopping axes as tools for processing food and hunting.

    5. Has a height of about 2.5 meters

    The feature of the ancient human, Meganthropus Paleojavanicus, is his very high body. In fact, his recorded height is almost 2.5 meters.
    When compared with today’s humans will be very visible difference. This is because modern people only have a maximum height limit of 1.8 meters.

    6. The way it walks is similar to an orangutan, that is, it bends with the hands supporting the body.

    If ordinary humans generally walk with an upright body but of course their ancestors are very different, according to research the way they walk is more like an orangutan, namely bending more with both hands used to support the body.

    The first human ancestor who was able to stand and walk upright was Pithecanthropus Erectus who lived long after Meganthropus Paleojavanicus.

    7. Thick and strong lower jaw

    These thick and strong lower jaws were used by early humans to chew food with a hard texture. If his life as a nomad makes him dependent on nature, of course there will be lots of plants or fruit with skin that is not soft.

    8. Well-built stature.

    9. Strong chewing muscles.

    10. Does not have a chin, but the mouth is protruding.

    11. Eating types of plants – plants.

    12. Has a sharp rear protrusion.

    13. Large and strong neck muscle attachment.

    14. Very large teeth and jaws.

    15. His arms are longer than his feet.

    Other Early Human Types

    Apart from Meganthropus Paleojavanicus, there are several other early human fossils found in Indonesia, namely Pithecanthropus and Homo Sapien. Here’s the full explanation:

    1. Pithecanthropus

    Pithecanthropus or known as ape man is a type of ancient human whose fossils are most commonly found in Indonesia. The first fossil discovery was discovered by a Dutch archaeologist named Eugene Dubois in 1891 in Trinil, Ngawai

    Pithecanthropus fossils date from the lower and middle Pleistocene. They have jawbones, molar teeth and well-built bodies. Pithecanthropus lived during the early and middle Pleistocene around 1 million to 1.5 million years ago, with a height of about 168 – 180 cm, an average body weight of 80 – 100 kg.

    Characteristics of Pithecanthropus as follows:

    1. Have a straight body.
    2. Walk straight.
    3. There are jaw bones and molar teeth.
    4. Has a brain volume of around 775 – 975 cc.
    5. Has a prominent and very thick forehead.
    6. No chin.
    7. Has an elongated roof of the skull.
    8. Has a chewing tool and eats everything.
    9. How to walk like a monkey.
    10. The nape of the brain is small.
    11. Straight bones with well-defined muscle attachment sites.
    12. Have a chewing tool and nape muscles are very strong.
    13. It has very strong jaws with large molars.
    14. Has a thick nose.

    The back of the head looks prominent. Three types of Pithecanthropus in Indonesia were found, namely Pithecanthropus Mojokertensis, Pithecanthropus Robustus, and Pithecanthropus Erectus.

    a. Pithecanthropus Mojokertensis

    Von Koenigswald discovered this early human fossil in the village of Perning, East Java. The fossils found are those of children who are 5 years old. Pithecanthropus Mojokertensis has a well-built body, thick forehead, strong cheeks and a face that protrudes forward.

    b. Pithecanthropus Robustus

    Weidenreich and Von Koenigswald found this ancient human fossil in 1939. The location of the discovery was in Trinil, the Bengawan Solo valley.

    c. Pithecanthropus Erectus

    Eugene Dubois discovered an ancient human species in the village of Trinil, Ngawa, East Java. Pithecanthropus erectus has a brain volume of up to 900 cc. Meanwhile, the modern human brain is above 1,000 cc. According to Darwin’s theory, Pithecanthropus Erectus is a transitional creature from ape to human.

    2. Homo sapiens

    This ancient human type has a body shape similar to ordinary humans. They have human-like characteristics, live a simple and wandering life.
    There are types of Homo Sapiens namely Homo Soloensis and Homo Wajakensis. In 1889, Van Rietschoten discovered Homo Wajakensis in 1889 in the village of Wajak, Tulungagung, East Java. It is estimated that this ancient human type lived around 40,000 – 25,000 years BC.

    Meanwhile, Homo Soloensis was found in Ngandong, Blora, in Sangiran and Terusan Macan. The discoverers of Homo Soloensis are Ter Haar, Opgenoorth and Von Koenigswald. They made expeditions and discoveries in 1931 – 1933. It is estimated that Homo Soloensis lived around 300,000 – 900,000 years ago.

    The characteristics of Homo Sapiens include:

    • Was walking and standing straight.
    • Brain volume varies between 1000 – 1450 cc.
    • Cerebrum and cerebellum have developed, especially in the skin of the brain.
    • Has a height of about 130 – 210 cm with an average body weight of 30 -150 kg.
    • The bones of the forehead and the back of the skull are rounded and high.
    • Have teeth and chewing tools that experience shrinkage.
    • The nape muscles are shrinking.
    • The chin and jaw bones are not very strong.
    • The face does not protrude forward.
    • Has more perfect features.

    The life of Meganthropus Paleojavanicus

    The lifestyle of Meganthropus Paleojavanicus is still nomadic, aka moving around and finding food by hunting and gathering. However, very few fossil fragments of Meganthropus Paleojavanicus have been found. Until now, no tools have been found that were used by this type of ancient human.

    Experts also have difficulty identifying the existence and culture they left behind. This also triggers differences of opinion among experts.

    Some experts consider it to be Pithecanthropus, while others believe it to be Australopithecus. In Africa, fossils have been found that come from the same layer as Meganthropus.

    In the vicinity of the fossil also found stone tools that are still rough. It is suspected that they used cooking utensils that were still very rough, because they were made in a very simple way, namely by striking a stone against another surface.

    The shards from the impact of the rock will resemble an axe. This tool is then used to collect food and cook. The equipment is in the form of a pickaxe and flake tools.

    Discovery of Meganthropus Paleojavanicus

    Initially, Meganthropus Paleojavanicus was discovered by archaeologist GHR Von Koenigswald in 1936. Then, during a mission trip to Java in 1937, archaeologist Franz Weidenreich joined him.

    The two archaeologists managed to find Meganthropus Paleojavanicus fossils at the Sangiran site, in the Pucangan formation to be precise. Sangiran itself is an ancient site located in Sragen Regency, Central Java Province.

    Historical fossils of Meganthropus Paleojavanicus were detected from the arrangement of bones which included the lower and upper jaw bones, skull and several teeth that had been removed. After that, a study was conducted which proved that Meganthropus Paleojavanicus ate plants during his life.

    The Life Pattern of Meganthropus Paleojavanicus

    Just like other early humans, Meganthropus Paleojavanicus lived a nomadic life and relied on hunting. This means that the oldest ancient human in Indonesia lives by relying on nature.

    If the food resources in the place where they live run out, Meganthropus Paleojavanicus will move to another place that has abundant natural resources. Usually, in processing food and changing the environment where they live, Meganthropus Paleojavanicus uses assistive devices such as hand axes and chopping axes. Therefore, these tools are very useful for cutting up hunted food.

    Further Research on Meganthropus Paleojavanicus Fossils

    In 1942, Von Koenigswald was captured by the Japanese occupiers. Therefore, research on ancient human fossils was continued by a scientist named Franz Weidenreich. From the research conducted, he found that the shape of the ancient human jaw was the same as that of a gorilla, but had a larger size. Similar fossil discoveries will continue to be made the next time. Several researchers such as Marks, Sartono, Tyler and Krantz continue to find similar fossils, especially at the Sangiran site and its surroundings.

    Early Human Research in Indonesia

    1. Eugene Dobois

    Eugene Dubois was the person who first became interested in researching ancient humans in Indonesia after receiving a skull shipment from BD Von Reitschoten who found skulls in Wajak, Tulung Agung.

    This fossil is called Homo Wajakensis, belonging to the type of Homo Sapien / human who has advanced thinking. Another fossil found, namely Pithecanthropus Erectus, comes from the word pithekos which means monkey, Antropus Human, Erectus walking upright, found in the Trinil area, on the edge of the Bengawan Solo, near Ngawi in 1891.

    2. Gustav Heinrich Ralph

    The findings of Gustav Heinrich Ralph are fossilized skulls in Ngandong, Blora. In 1936 a child’s skull was found in Perning, Mojokerto. Meanwhile, in 1937 – 1941, the skulls and jaws of Homo Erectus and Meganthropus Paleojavanicus were found in Sangiran, Solo.

    Other discoveries about early humans were the discovery of the skull, jaw, hipbone and femur of Meganthropus, Homo Erectus and Homo Sapien at the locations Sangiran, Terusmacan/ Sragen, Trinil, Ngandong and Patiayam/ Kudus.

    3. Teuku Jacob

    After Indonesia’s independence, research on ancient humans was continued by experts from Indonesia, including Prof. Dr. Teuku Jacob. Prof. Dr. Teuku Jacob again conducted research in the village of Sangiran, along the Bengawan Solo River.

    This research managed to find thirteen fossils. The last fossil was found in 1973 in the village of Kontakmacan, Sragen, Central Java.

    So, that’s the history of Meganthropus Paleojavanicus , the oldest ancient human in Indonesia. Is Sinaumed’s looking for that history? Apparently, there is also a lot of knowledge about the history of Meganthropus Paleojavanicus, yes.

    If Sinaumed’s still needs references regarding the history of Meganthropus Paleojavanicus, then you can visit sinaumedia’s book collection at sinaumedia.com . sinaumedia always provides the best and most complete products so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

    Author: Rosyda Nur Fauziyah

    Also read:

  • Meet the Founder of Youtube, the World’s Largest Video Sharing Platform

    Youtube Founder – Who doesn’t know YouTube? A platform that broadcasts videos of various genres is very popular and rivals television. Some people don’t even mind if they don’t have a television at home, but they must have YouTube. Are you a regular YouTube user? Let’s get to know this platform deeper and get to know the founders.

    YouTube trip

    1. The Beginning of Youtube

    YouTube was administratively registered for the first time to coincide with Valentine’s Day , namely on February 14, 2005. Whether this coincidence was intentional or not by the three founders who were former Paypal employees.

    It was Steve Chen, Chad Hurley, and Jawed Karim who initiated the founding of Youtube. At that time, they registered a shop in San Mateo, California as the official Youtube address. Their initial mission was to make YouTube a video-based online dating platform.

    However, this desire did not run smoothly. Youtube is only visited by a handful of people and unfortunately they are not interested. The three young men advertised on an advertising platform called Craigslist. No kidding, Youtube promised to give 20 US dollars for anyone who wants to upload videos on its platform.

    The uploaded videos are still related to online dating. Its contents must explain the partner desired by the uploader. Unfortunately, the lure is still not fruitful. Nobody is interested in Youtube.

    This caused the three founders of Youtube to be confused. They evaluate Youtube. Where will Youtube be taken? This evaluation is the turning point for the company with the white arrow logo in this red box.

    Youtube’s new policy is to open the door as wide as possible to anyone who wants to post any video. And the first video uploaded on this platform is a video of their co-founder , Jawed Karim, visiting the Diego Zoo. The 19-second video is titled Me at the Zoo .

    In the video, Jawed Karim recounts what he saw. He said the uniqueness of the elephant is in its long trunk. Until now, you can still find the video on YouTube. The video was posted on April 23, 2005 by channel jawed and has been viewed 222 million times.

     

     

    2. Youtube Speeds Up and Gets an Injection of Funds

    In May 2005 launched the beta version. At that time, YouTube was founded as a company funded by wealthy individuals ( angel investors ). Six months later, the company received investment funds from Sequoia Capital’s venture capital of US$3.5 million. In this month, Youtube was officially announced.

    Since changing its war strategy, Youtube has experienced a very significant spike. In January 2006 alone, video viewers on YouTube jumped to 25 million viewers. While in July 2006, this site has 65,000 videos uploaded every day and visited 100 million times in one day.

    This positive growth prompted Sequoia and Artist Capital as a capital venture to disburse additional funds of $ 8 million for YouTube in April 2006. Youtube’s operations are getting better, the results are getting bigger. Youtube is getting unstoppable.

    3. Bought Google

    Youtube’s popularity has increased coupled with the emergence of various new problems. Youtube requires more computers and a more sophisticated broadband internet connection. The company is also facing problems with copyright claims.

    Youtube also needs to maximize the commercialization of its products. These conditions accumulated and at a certain time, Steve Chen Hurley, Chad Hurley, and Jawed Karim were compelled to sell YouTube. This big decision will be a milestone for them and all of us.

    In October 2006, the giant US technology company, Google Inc. bought youtube in stock for $1.65 billion. If converted to rupiah at this time, this value is equivalent to 23 trillion rupiah. This fantastic figure makes the transaction the second largest acquisition ever made by Google.

    The Story of the Founders of Youtube

    1. Chad Hurley

    This man who was born on January 24, 1977 has the full name Chad Meredith Hurley. His father, Don, is a financial consultant. While his mother, Joann Hurley, is a teacher.

    He grew up in Birdsboro, Pennsylvania, United States. He is the second child of three brothers. His older sister is called Heather and his younger brother is named Brent.

    Since childhood he showed a high interest in the world of art. This interest even tends to be extreme. He often spends his time studying painting, sculpting and designing.

    However, this interest is slowly but surely shifting to the world of technology and business. This change in interest shifted his focus to building a business and getting involved in the world of technology.

    Chad Hurley represented Twin Valley High School’s trail running program. In 1992 and 1994, he won the State CUP title. He completed his studies in art majoring in Graphic Design and Printmaking from Indiana University of Pennsylvania, United States of America.

    After graduating from Indiana University, Chad applied for a job at a newly established company engaged in finance, namely Paypal. Chad got the first assignment to design the Paypal logo as proof of his portfolio. If you see the Paypal logo now, it’s a logo designed by Chad Hurley.

    Personally, Chad is a smart and creative person. He learned many things about technology independently. His talent for managing a business is shown by his ability to commercialize his works of art.

    Technological ability, sharp business acumen, and a well-honed artistic soul make for a beautiful combination for Chad. He took advantage of that potential to make money independently. When he was in college, he managed to sell services to build websites, games, and animation.

    Chad is a friendly person. However, he is not easy to open up with many people. It’s more closed.

    Chad is the man who became the first CEO of Youtube. After being purchased by Google, Chad acquired 694,087 shares of Google shares directly and an additional 41,232 shares. The number of shares was valued at $345.6 million at the close of trading on February 7, 2007.

    In October 2010, he stepped down from his post as CEO of YouTube. Even though he stepped down as CEO, he stated that he was ready to commit to becoming an advisor to YouTube in the future. The leadership of Youtube is continued by Salar Kamangar.

    Chad was reportedly the main investor for the US F1 team which was one of the members of the F1 car racing event in 2010. But unfortunately, the team eventually disbanded for no known reason. Chad reportedly still wants to be involved in the F1 industry through other teams.

    Chad seems to be interested in investing in sports. He is reportedly the co-owner of the Major Soccer League (MLS) Football Club and the Los Angeles Football Club. Not only that, he also explored business in the world of basketball with one of the NBA league teams, the Golden State Warriors.

    For his family life, he is married to Kathy Clark. She is the daughter of Silicon Valley entrepreneur Jim Clark. Their marriage presented two children.

    2. Steve Chen

    Steve Shih Chen is one of the founders of Youtube who comes from Taipei, Taiwan. He is also the former Chief Technology Officer (CTO) of Youtube. The man who was born on August 25, 1978, was motivated to succeed after people predicted that he would never succeed.

    He still remembers the event well. At the age of six, his mother took Chen to a fortune teller. Chen was bothered by the fortune-teller’s words and it kept ringing in his head.

    He does not accept that his fate must be determined by someone else. Fate seemed to be on Chen’s side. When he was eight years old, his family emigrated to the United States.

    He then attended middle school at John Hersey High School, moving on to the Illinois Math and Science Academy. For higher education, he decided to attend the University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign with a degree in computer science.

    After graduating from the University of Illinois, Chen worked at Paypal. Yes, he does have the same office as Chad. Not only that, Chen also became a senior engineer at Facebook. However, because he wanted to focus on developing YouTube, he also resigned from the company made by Mark Zuckerberg.

    In June 2006, Chen was named one of the 50 influential people of that era by Business 2.0. It should be noted that Business 2.0 is a magazine that discusses the development of the business world in the world. This crowning cannot be separated from Chen’s role in building Youtube into a company that has a large valuation.

    After Youtube was purchased by Google, Chen owns 625,366 shares of Google and an additional 68,721. That amount was equivalent to $326 million at that time. A fantastic value.

    The next time, Chen again teamed up with Chad Hurley. This time they agreed to jointly pioneer the AVOS System. The company was eventually able to acquire Delicious from Yahoo! Inc.

    Chen’s achievements don’t stop there. In 2011, he was awarded the 15th honorary Asian Scientists To Watch by Asian Scientist Magazine. Amazingly, this award proves that apart from being good at business, he is also capable in the field of computer technology.

    In 2016, Chen was known to launch an online site which he named Nom. This site is a live cooking platform targeted at culinary connoisseurs. Unfortunately, this company was considered not very profitable so Chen decided to close it in 2017.

    Currently, he is known to be starting a start-up hedge fund company called Draco Capital Macro Quant Fund. By 2021, the company has raised $50 million in funding with a goal of $200 million. This company is engaged in investment that utilizes artificial intelligence ( AI).

    In 2009, Chen married a Google Korea product marketing manager named Park Ji Hyun (now known as Jamie Chen). Both live in San Francisco with their baby. The Chen family is known as a supporter of the Asian Art Museum of San Francisco and because of that his wife is believed to be a member of the museum’s board of trustees.

    3. Jawed Karim

    The last Youtube founder is Jawed Karim. This Bangladeshi man was born in Merseburg, East Germany in 1979. A year later, his parents crossed the Berlin Wall to move to West Germany. In 1922, his family emigrated to the United States.

    Although both founders of YouTube, Karim are not as famous as Chad Hurley and Steve Chen. This Muslim figure is rarely discussed by many people because he does not like the spotlight that is highlighted by the media. While his two friends are indeed known as figures who are successful in pioneering start-ups.

    While Karim more often hides behind the scenes. He enjoys more technical work in coding and computing, so he rarely appears in public. So do not be surprised if not so many people who know his name.

    He grew up in a family of researchers. His Bangladeshi father, Naimul Karim, is a researcher at the multinational corporation 3M. Meanwhile, her mother, who is of German blood, Christine Karim, is also a research professor of biochemistry at the University of Minnesota.

    Young Karim was educated at Central High School in Saint Paul Minnesota. After graduating from the school, Karim continued his tertiary education at the University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign majoring in Computer Science. He had dropped out of college before graduating so he could work at Paypal.

    Not long ago he resumed his studies and managed to get a bachelor’s degree in 2004. He and his two friends agreed to create an online dating site called Youtube. After Youtube was established, he deepened his computer science by taking his master’s degree at Stanford University.

    Apart from being a co-founder, Karim is also the first YouTuber to upload videos on the platform. As we told at the beginning of the discussion, Karim uploaded a video with the title Me at The Zoo. At that time, he was in front of the elephant enclosure.

    After Youtube was bought by Google, Karim got 137,443 shares with a value of $ 64 million according to the closing price of trading at that time. In 2007, it was estimated that the value of his shares was $ 1 billion. A fantastic number of growth.

    Currently, Karim is reported to be one of YouTube’s advisors. He also founded a funding company which he named Youniversity Karim Ventures. The institution aims to assist students and alumni in developing their business.

     

    Conclusion

    Chad Hurley, Steve Chen and Jawed Karim are three young men who dare to reach their dreams. They are able to combine talent, knowledge, passion, belief, and hard work into a neat lineup to realize their own expectations. They believe in their own hopes and abilities.

    Their decision to leave an established job at Paypal was not an easy one. Moreover, they are the predecessor employees there. However, they remain confident to establish a platform whose future is still unclear.

    Not only that, their ability to survive in bitter times deserves thumbs up. This mentality is what most entrepreneurs need. And it’s been proven, their perseverance and patience have led Youtube to become a big company so that even Google is interested in buying it at a fantastic price.

    Youtube was bought by Google for $1.65 billion. Now, it is reported that YouTube’s revenue in three months has reached $ 5 billion or the equivalent of 68.8 trillion rupiah. In 2019, YouTube’s annual revenue reached $ 15.15 billion or the equivalent of 208.1 trillion rupiah.

    Sinaumed’s, our review of the founder of YouTube has come to an end. As #FriendsWithoutLimits, sinaumedia never tires of accompanying you with our selected books.

    Author: Mutiani Eka Astutik

  • Meet Steve Jobs, Founder of Apple

    Founder of Apple – It took many years for Steve Jobs, the founder of Apple, to gather his enthusiasm and
    determination to build the Apple company, which until now has become a very well-known brand in the world.
    Even today, many people use Apple products with pride. In fact, the price offered by
    Apple is quite expensive.
    But there are still many people who are willing to spend deeply to be
    able to have one of the Apple products they desire.
    So, aren’t you curious about the figure
    behind the success of the Apple brand on the world stage?
    So, for those of you who want to know
    more, let’s see this article until it’s finished.

    Short biography of Steve Jobs, the Founder of
    Apple

    Steve Jobs has the full name of Steve Paul Jobs. He was born on February 24, 1955 in
    California, United States.
    The Steve Jobs we know today is the man behind the success of the
    Apple Brand.
    Where Steve is one of the great people who has a variety of extraordinary works in
    the field of technology.
    At birth, Steve originally had the name Abdul Lateef Jandali until his
    name was changed when he was adopted by Reinhold and Clara Jobs.
    When Steve was a toddler, his
    adoptive parents asked him to move to Santa Clara County, also known as Silicon Valley.
    There,
    they also adopted another baby girl named Patti.

    Steve’s abilities did develop very quickly when he was still at Cupertino Junior High School and also
    Homestead High School in the Cupertino area.
    There, Steve met his friend named Steve Wozniak.
    Where his friend has the same interest as Steve, namely in the field of electronics.
    Then in 1976, Steve Jobs and his colleagues Steve Wozniak and Ronald Wayne tried to set up the
    Apple company for the first time.
    At that time, they named the business as Apple Computer Co.
    The three of them received funding from a product marketing manager and a technician who was about
    to retire from Int AC named Mike Markkula Jr.
    Then in the end they founded Apple
    together.

    Steve Jobs and Steve Wozniak have been friends for a long time. Where at that time Steve Jobs
    was trying to get Wozniak interested in assembling computers and then reselling them.
    Then as
    Apple expanded, the company began looking for experienced executives to help manage the expansion.
    The computer that was first introduced by Steve and Wozniak they named the Apple I. Then in 1977
    both of them re-introduced the Apple Ii to the public.
    Since then sales of the Apple II began
    to grow rapidly.
    Then in 1980, the founder of Apple Computer and inventor of Apple Computer
    introduced the Apple III.
    But the development is not as good as when they introduced the Apple
    II.

    In 1983, Steve Jobs began to attract John Sculley from the Pepsi Cola company to become head of Apple
    Computer.
    It was in that year that Apple introduced its newest product, the Apple Lisa.
    Where these products already have more sophisticated technology and are quite advanced at that
    time.
    However, in reality the product failed in the market. Then in 1984, Apple
    again tried to introduce its newest computer product, named the Macintosh.
    This product is the
    first computer that has been successfully sold to the market by presenting interface features in the form of
    graphical use.

    The Macintosh became one of the first commercially successful small computers with a graphical user
    interface.
    The development of Macm started with Jef Raskin, then was taken over by Steve Jobs.
    The success obtained by the Macintosh made the Apple company abandon the Apple II product in favor
    of developing Macm production, which still exists today.
    However, under Sculley’s leadership,
    Steve Jobs found no match.
    There are a lot of things that are not aligned between the two.
    Until finally it had an impact on declining sales in all industries towards the end of 1984. This
    then resulted in the relationship between the two not being good until the end of 1985. Because of this,
    Sculley decided to expel Steve Jobs from the Apple company.

    Apple history

    Before Apple was present in Indonesia, where we usually saw Apple outlets and their products were
    everywhere.
    Steve Jobs has gone through a very long way until finally Apple can develop until
    now.
    In his biography, at the time he founded the company Apple Computer Co. Steve Jobs was
    known to be 21 years old and Steve Wozniak was 26 years old.
    The two started the business in
    the garage owned by Steve Jobs’ family.
    While the personal computer that was being developed by
    the two of them at that time was named Apple I. The computer was first sold to the market at a price of
    666.66 US Dollars.

    Then in 1977, Steve Jobs and his colleagues finally started introducing their newest product, the Apple II.
    It was this second product that became one of his first major successes. Where there
    are lots of products that are sold in the market and certainly can have an impact on the personal computer
    industry, which at that time was still not common.
    Then in 1980, Apple Computer listed their
    company name on the stock exchange.
    At that time, Apple’s stock offering was successful in the
    early days and since then the name Steve Jobs became known to many people.
    In the same year,
    Apple finally launched its newest product, named Apple III.
    Even so, the launch of this third
    product did not go as smoothly as the previous product.

    As time went on, Apple Computer grew and the company started looking for a leader to be able to manage all
    the company’s capacities, which must always increase.
    Then in 1983, Steve Jobs invited Sculley,
    who was then working at Pepsi Cola, to join and become the leader of Apple Computer.
    Later in
    the same year, Apple released a new product called the Apple Lisa.
    But unfortunately, the
    product failed in the American market.

    NeXT Computer and back to Apple

    After no longer at the Apple company, Steve Jobs then founded his new company, which was named NeXT
    Computer.
    Where the company is engaged in the development of computer software.
    The products offered by NeXT Computer had quite sophisticated technology at that time.
    However, like previous Steve Jobs products that failed, such as the Apple Lisa. It
    turns out that the products offered by NeXT Computer are also less attractive to the market.

    Then in 1996, the Apple Company finally bought NeXT Computer worth 402 million US Dollars.
    That way, it automatically brings Steve Jobs back to the company he once founded.
    Until 1997, Steve Jobs became the temporary leader of the Apple company after the departure of Gil
    Amelio.
    There, Steve Jobs and his colleagues began to develop computers with various advanced
    technologies, namely the Macintosh.
    Where this technology is still being developed by the Apple
    Mac Brand.

    With the purchase of the NeXT Computer company, many of NeXT’s technologies were applied to products made
    by Apple.
    Especially NeXTSTEP which was developed into Mac OS X. Under the leadership of Steve
    Jobs, the company began to increase its sales after they released the iMac.
    This product is the
    first computer that is sold by prioritizing appearance.

    Until August 2011, Steve Jobs resigned as CEO of Apple company. However, Steve Jobs will still
    serve at Apple as chairman of the company’s board.
    But a few hours after Steve Jobs officially
    resigned, shares of Apple Inc (AAPL) fell by 5 percent in post-close trading.

    Pixar and Disney

    In 1986, Steve Jobs bought the Graphic Group from Lucasfilm’s computer graphics division for 10 million US
    Dollars and later changed his name to Pixar.
    However, he gave 5 million US Dollars to Lucasfilm
    to be used as capital.
    There, Steve Jobs served as an executive at Pixar Animation Studio.
    The first film made by the company was Toy Story. Where the film was successful in
    bringing fame and the name Steve Jobs was written as an executive producer in the film Toy Story when it was
    released in 1995. After taking Pixar by Disney in 2006, Steve Jobs became a member of the board of directors
    at The Walt Disney Company.

    Steve Jobs Dies

    Over the past few years, Steve Jobs’s health has reportedly begun to decline. Then he took
    medical leave since January 3011. Then on October 5, 2011, Steve Jobs was declared dead in California when
    he was 56 years old.
    Previously Steve Jobs was diagnosed with pancreatic cancer.
    After Steve Jobs died, his funeral was held privately on October 7, 2011.

    Important Lessons From Steve Jobs For A
    Successful Life

    If you look at Steve Jobs’ career and success, there are some important things we can take and apply in our
    own lives.
    Especially for those of you who want to be involved in the business world.
    For more details, see the explanation below:

    1. Don’t lose focus

    In 1997, Apple was having a hard time and almost went out of business. As long as Steve Jobs
    was not part of the company he founded, Apple has made various types of computer products.
    Then, when Steve Jobs returned to the Apple company, he stopped it and asked his team to start
    focusing on just a few things.
    The Apple and Steve Jobs companies then cut or cut various
    products that were considered not important.
    At that time they chose to focus on 4 computer
    products only.
    With this choice, the company that was on the verge of bankruptcy began to be
    saved.
    The focus used by Steve Jobs is to eliminate various things that are not important and
    leave only a few things that are appropriate and worthy of development.
    For Steve Jobs
    himself,

    Simple: Need Deeper Understanding

    Simplicity is at the heart of all Apple products. This can be seen not only from the outer
    design.
    But also on the appearance of the software. While developing this product,
    Steve Jobs wanted to make a product simpler, such as how to access the application, the design, and also the
    number of buttons.
    Steve Jobs’ desire to make various products more simple is not an easy thing
    to do.
    In order to be able to make a device that is small in size and can play songs like iPod
    products.
    All the Apple team must put more effort to make it happen. If you want
    to make a product that is simpler, then a developer must understand the most important things and the
    essence of the product.

    Building an Integration

    The Apple company also made a breakthrough in the form of integration for various devices.
    When someone has an iPhone or MacBook, they can access everything more easily through these two
    devices.
    For example, iMessage money can run on a personal computer. This
    integration ecosystem built by Apple will allow its users to more easily use all of their devices.
    Not only that, users also become more free and can save time. Because, they don’t need
    to bother to connect as an owned device.

    Take Big Steps

    One product that is able to break down the popularity and success of Apple is the iPod product.
    The device that functions to play music has succeeded in making its users feel a new experience
    when listening to music.
    In addition, iPod users can also easily buy various songs through the
    iTunes Store and then listen to them anytime.

    But as technology developed, Steve Jobs began to realize that the privileges of the iPod would be replaced
    when mobile phone developers added a music player feature in it.
    Therefore, Steve Jobs then
    decided to sacrifice the iPod and replace it with iPhone products.
    This decision is certainly
    not an easy thing to do.
    Considering the iPod has contributed greatly to Apple’s success.
    However, Steve Jobs knew that if he didn’t kill his own iPod product, someone else would.

    Prioritize Product Over Profit

    When Apple almost went out of business, the company was under the leadership of John Sculley who at that
    time served as Pepsi Marketing and Sales executive.
    If based on this background, Sculley is
    more focused on the benefits that must be obtained compared to the development of the product itself.
    As a result, sales began to decline.

    Then when Steve Jobs returned to the Apple company, he then changed the goals of his company: m.
    Steve Jobs refocused on producing innovative and high-quality products. Although he
    had to pay quite expensive funds in its development.
    Through this decision, the Apple company
    was finally saved from bankruptcy.

    In addition, by choosing to focus more on the product, Apple can also see the various deficiencies that
    exist in the product.
    Steve Jobs was able to obtain perfection from the products they made,
    both for the outside and the inside.
    The focus on the products produced gave Steve Jobs more
    time to produce quality products.

    This is an explanation of the history and life journey of the founder of Apple to finally be as successful
    as it is now.
    Thanks to the persistence and creative ideas of its founders, Apple has now
    become a brand that is known to almost everyone in the world.
    In fact, many people feel proud
    to use various products made by Apple.
    How, are you also a fan of Apple products?

  • Media: Definition, Functions, and Types You Need to Know

    Definition of Media – Nowadays, maybe everyone uses the media in carrying out activities, especially activities related to communication between one individual and another individual. With the media, it will be easier for everyone to carry out their daily activities. Therefore, the definition of media can be said to be very broad, for you a teacher will definitely determine the right learning media for his students.

    Not only that, the media which is more often used as a communication intermediary is often used by workers or even political officials who wish to nominate themselves. Media that often appears during the Indonesian democratic party is usually better known as political communication media. So, don’t be surprised if during the Indonesian democracy party there will be a lot of information from various media that only contains political issues or facts.

    Media that is used optimally, then any information provided will be maximized as well and listeners, recipients, or readers of information can get useful information. However, media that is used only for a number of purposes, does not rule out the possibility that the authenticity of the information in the media cannot be guaranteed, so that misunderstandings can occur between the information provider and the recipient of the message. In fact, it can lead to a conflict.

    So that you can use the media properly and correctly, it is necessary to understand the meaning of the media. Apart from that, you also need to understand each type of media and the maximum benefits of media can be felt. Then, how to know and understand the definition of media to the types of media itself?

    You don’t need to be confused about finding this information because in this article, we will discuss more about the meaning of media, the meaning of media according to experts, to the benefits of the media that have been used.

    Definition of Media

    Media is a word that comes from Latin and also has a plural form or is often called medium. Meanwhile, the word media literally means intermediary. In this case, the intermediary in question is the existence of an intermediary between the information or message source ( a source ) and the recipient of the message or information ( a receiver ). Therefore, we often see media in everyday life, such as newspapers, online articles , movies, television, and many more.

    With the presence of the media in this world, someone will be easily helped, so that everything that is being done will be easily resolved. In fact, this media can reduce the occurrence of misunderstandings between information providers and recipients of information. In addition, the media can be used for us to learn, the more we learn the more knowledge and insight a person has.

    Along with the times, the media has also developed, where previously the media was only in paper form, now the media can be accessed through electronic devices, such as cellphones , computers, laptops, and so on. Easy access to obtain media should be used wisely so that a person or group does not miss information.

    In addition, in the world of education there will definitely be communication between students and teachers and is often known as learning media. It’s become very u

    It is only natural that information in the form of knowledge that exists in the world of education must be given to the fullest so that students can receive knowledge and increase their insights.

    With the existence of learning media when carrying out teaching and learning activities, communication between teachers and students will be more harmonious and they can understand each other with any information provided. So, teachers should choose learning media that are very suitable for the characteristics of students.

    It feels incomplete when discussing the meaning of media, but not directly from the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI). In KBBI, media is a tool (means) of communication such as newspapers, magazines, radio, television, films, posters, and banners.

    Definition of Media According to Experts

    Now that’s the meaning of media that you need to know so that it’s easier for you to understand the meaning of media, so below is a definition of media that has been conveyed by several experts.

    Schramm

    Schramm revealed that the media is a technology that carries messages or information that is instructional in nature and can be seen, read, heard, and manipulated.

    Leslie J. Briggs

    According to Leslie J. Briggs, media is a tool in the form of a physical form that is usually used when conveying material content. Leslie J. Briggs also said that the tools in question, such as tape recorders, video recorders , pictures, cameras, televisions, graphics, and computers.

    Purnawati and Eldawi

    Punawati and Eldawi state that media is anything that can be used to deliver messages from the sender of the message to the recipient of the message, so that the recipient of the message received can influence the feelings, thoughts and attention of students and create teaching and learning activities.

    Gagne

    According to Gagne, media is a type of component that exists in the environment of students and can increase interest in learning.

    Sadiman

    Sadiman stated that the media contains various kinds of things that are usually used to send messages or information to the recipient of the message, so that the recipient’s (student) feelings, thoughts, concerns, and interests in teaching and learning activities can run effectively and efficiently.

    Miarso

    Media according to Miarso are various kinds of things that can function to provide messages or information where these messages can influence students’ attention, thoughts, and desires to learn.

    Robert Heinich

    According to Robert Heinich, the media is something that can carry an information or message that occurs between the source of the message ( source ) and the recipient of the information ( receiver ).

    Arshad

    Arsyad stated that the media is something that can be used as an intermediary or sender of messages originating from the sender of the message to the recipient of the message. In this case, Arsyad also said that media can also be in the form of software or hardware.

    Muhammad Rohani

    Ahmad Spiritual said that the media is something that can be received by the human senses and functions as an intermediary, tool, or means of carrying out communication activities or is used for the teaching and learning process.

    Santoso S. Hamikaya

    According to Santoso S. Hamikaya, the media are various forms of intermediaries that are often used by someone to spread their ideas so that these ideas can reach recipients of ideas.

    Degeng

    According to Degeng, media is a component related to delivery strategies that can be filled with messages to be conveyed to learners and usually in the form of materials, people and tools.

    Blake and Horlsen

    Blake and Horalsen revealed that the media is a communication channel that is usually used to deliver messages between the source of the message (coming from the sender of the message) and the content of the message (received by the recipient of the message).

    From the definition of media that has been expressed by several experts, it can be said that the media is often used by many people, especially to provide information. Information provided with a medium can be well received by the recipient of the message or information as long as the sender of the message and the recipient of the message have good communication activities.

    Some experts also say that this media is closely related to teaching and learning activities carried out by teachers or educators with students. Therefore, information, messages, knowledge, and insights can be well received as long as the feelings and attention of students can focus on the information provided by the teacher.

    Media Function

    Media that can be used in various fields, from education to politics, and many more. As for some functions of the media in general, namely:

    1. As a Means of Information for the Community

    Every community definitely needs information because with that information a person or group of people can broaden their horizons. The function of the media as a means of information makes it easier for people to get information. Only with mobile phones , you can get a lot of information. In addition, information can also be obtained through television. The more information received by the community, the more insight.

    2. As a Means for Channeling Ideas and Thoughts

    The second function of the media is as a means to channel ideas or ideas. Everyone must have ideas and ideas in his mind, so that someone can think creatively. Ideas and ideas that only exist in the head, if not expressed, then other people will not know. Currently, there are already various kinds of media that can be used to channel ideas and ideas, such as films, short stories, novels, and so on.

    3. As an Educational Means in Teaching and Learning Activities

    The next function of the media is as a means of education in teaching and learning activities. In the world of education, the media can be said to be very important for providing information to students, so that teachers will look for learning media that fits the characteristics of students and does not bore students when learning. Without learning media, students will have difficulty capturing or receiving scientific information.

    4. As a Means To Obtain Entertainment

    The media not only functions to get information or provide information, but can also function to get entertainment. This function can be said to be able to eliminate the feeling of fatigue being experienced by someone. In general, media that can entertain someone is in the form of movies, music, books, and others.

    5. As a means of supervising and controlling social activities

    The next function of the media is as a means of monitoring and controlling social activities. With the existence of the media, it is not easy for every member of society to carry out activities or actions that are harmful. By reducing harmful actions, it can make a community environment more prosperous.

    6. As a Means to Resolve Limitations on Senses, Space, and Time

    Media functions as a means to overcome limitations on the senses, space, and time. Therefore, the existence of the media makes it easy for all people to obtain information. This is because there are already many media that can help us to provide information and receive information.

    Media Types

    After discussing the function of the media, now is the time for us to discuss the types of media. Media has three types, namely visual media, audio media, and audio visual media.

    1. Visual Media

    Visual media is one type of media that prioritizes the sense of sight, so this media is usually in the form of images, videos, and so on. In general, the visual media that is often used by many people is a projector and the information conveyed to the recipient of the information is also in a visual form.

    There are two types of visual media, namely motion visual media and silent visual media. In fact, the two types of visual media can be combined into one unit. With the existence of visual media, there will be lots of people who are interested in receiving the information provided. In addition, the material provided in visual media will be easy to understand because it has examples of images in the form of facts.

    2. Audio Media

    Audio media is media that is usually used to broadcast information or messages through sound. Therefore, the auditory sensory organ becomes a sensory organ that is quite important in receiving messages through audio media. This audio media is usually found on radio broadcasts. However, along with the times and technology, audio media has developed into a podcast .

    You can get various kinds of information in a podcast broadcast . Thus it can be said that messages received through audio media have the characteristics of providing verbal information and providing non-verbal information. Verbal information in the form of words or spoken language. Meanwhile, non-verbal information is in the form of vocalizations or sounds.

    3. Audio Visual Media

    Audio visual media is a type of media that combines visual media with audio media, so that the information provided is in the form of images or videos that have sound. Therefore, not a few people say that audio-visual media is more interesting to see and hear. The merging of these two media not only stimulates one sense organ, but can also directly stimulate two sense organs, namely the sense organs of hearing and sight.

    Audio visual media is divided into two types, namely motion audio visual media and silent audio visual media. Motion audio visual media can be seen as sound images, films, and others. Meanwhile, audio visual media is silent in the form of sound books, sound pages, and so on.

    Media Benefits

    Basically, the media has many benefits that can be felt immediately or in the future. However, the main benefit of the media is that it can improve communication relations between individuals with one another. Here are some of the benefits of the media.

    1. People can get information faster, so they don’t miss information. Information that is received more quickly is influenced by the development of technology or the internet.

    2. It is easy for the public to provide information because information can be provided via mobile phones .

    3. The information provided can be maximized, so that there is no misunderstanding between the sender and the recipient of the message.

    4. The message is easily given to the recipient of the message because it doesn’t take a long time or is more effective and efficient.

    Conclusion

    Thus it can be said that the media is a tool that generally functions to provide information to other people or to other groups. The information provided can affect the condition of the sensory organs that we have. For example, a teacher is using learning media that only focuses on audio or sound, so that the sensory organs of students will immediately receive and listen to the information that has been given.

    In general, every media used to communicate has existed for a long time, but not everyone uses the existing types of media. In other words, a person or group uses the media only for their needs or needs. So, be wise in using one medium or several media.

    Book Recommendations & Related Articles

  • Meaning of the word Anti Mainstream and Examples of Its Use

    Meaning of the word Anti Mainstream – In this day and age, of course people are no stranger to the word mainstream. This term is included in the slang term which is usually used when hanging out with friends and joking. Maybe it’s like playing a game, then the loser gets an anti-mainstream challenge.

    Why anti-mainstream is one of the reasons to make it more challenging. Even though it is already familiar in the community, it is possible that some people do not know what it means. For those of you who don’t know about anti-mainstream. The following is information related to anti-mainstream.

    A. The Meaning of the Word Anti Mainstream

    The meaning of anti-mainstream is the opposite of mainstream which means that behavior is strange, unique, or creative, and is not practiced by most people. It can also be said that anti-mainstream behavior is an action that does not follow the current trend.

    Today most people prefer to act and be weird or unique. Because the existence of these differences can show that the self-confidence that appears is not artificial and is done purely. But make no mistake, it doesn’t mean that everyone who acts anti-mainstream is just to show self-confidence.

    Some people who do this strange act to get the attention of many people. Especially when the term viral appears, where many people want to be famous in an instant way. Anti-mainstream is not always only negative or positive.

    It all depends on the anti-mainstream behavior carried out by each person. Is it really like that or is it contrived to get a lot of attention. So don’t think that this anti-mainstream behavior is solely made up, but only to show abilities that many people don’t have.

    B. The Difference Between Mainstream Vs Anti Mainstream

    The term mainstream comes from a foreign language, to be precise in English. This word consists of two roots, namely “main” and “stream”. Separately the word “main” in Indonesian is translated into “principal, large, full, main, and main” while the word “stream” in Indonesian is translated into “stream, sequence, file”.

    The term mainstream in Indonesian is synonymous with the word tendency. There are also those who interpret mainstream as the main stream, or mainstream. The word mainstream is generally used to refer to media that actually functions as media. This means that the media has credibility as an institution that collects and broadcasts news by paying full attention to journalistic principles. By being professionally managed and even if necessary registered and verified by the press council.

    The term mainstream media appears because along with the proliferation of online media that present news sourced from other portals. As well as the proliferation of social media portals on the internet which also provide news. The term mainstream media is a counterpoint to social media and fake media.

    So what is meant by mainstream media is media that has been tested and proven to present facts and not just hearsay. However, a number of mainstream media also often fail in reporting information that is not necessarily the truth. While there are also anti-mainstream terms. The term is clearly contrary to the mainstream term.

    Anti-mainstream is generally used to refer to things that are strange and out of the ordinary. In Javanese terms to call it that is “not common”. This term is very fitting for the term anti-mainstream. Another term in Indonesian that is appropriate as an anti-mainstream equivalent is eccentric.

    C. Anti Mainstream Example

    There are several examples of anti-mainstream actions that make many other people do it, including:

    1. Anti-mainstream people wear masks made of drawstring.

    2. Come to the ex’s wedding and contribute songs according to the mood at the moment.

    3. People who mukbang with large portions of food.

    4. Pretend to be someone who needs help.

    5. Create unusual content, so that it makes people who see it feel strange.

    So, those are a number of examples of anti-mainstream actions that you may have encountered and are considered normal for most people. There’s nothing wrong with acting strange, as long as it doesn’t harm other people.

    D. Anti Mainstream becomes Mainstream

    After knowing the anti-mainstream as well as the difference with the mainstream, here are some anti-mainstream things that actually become mainstream after being popular, including:

    1. Street mice to avoid traffic jams

    First, if you are told by your friends there is a passage that is free from traffic jams. You can consider the purpose of the information, maybe you are not the only one who knows about that path. Besides that, when you think about trying to go through a road that will be quieter because people rarely pass there. This does not rule out the possibility that many people also think the same as you. So, to avoid traffic jams, consider carefully.

    2. Doing Yoga, Zumba, Pilates

    Second, what you need to start to realize is not only those who want to document yoga, Zumba, Pilates, meditation and so on. Many people today also want to share the same activity with everyone. This makes your sports activities the same as other friends’ activities.

    Well, it’s a good idea to find out which friends you can invite to do this together. This will help you more to share information about cool instructors. Together with your friends, you can document the significant results of your sports activities, such as before-after, when there is visible progress, and so on. You need to know, not many people are consistent until their end goal.

    3. Listen to indie music, watch indie films

    In today’s internet era, there are lots of communities whose members know and are even crazy about indie music and indie films. So, if you think you’re the only one who knows indie songs or movies. Then it could be that you don’t understand the environment around you.

    The indie thing has been getting mainstream lately. Therefore, put aside the thought that you won’t share your taste in music or movies because you think other people won’t like your taste. Sharing musical tastes will be very important to build mutual intimacy. In fact, you could be one of the people who brought music or film trends before they became known virally by everyone.

    4. Collecting or wearing vintage items

    Nowadays, there are many vintage smelling cafes popping up. In addition, there are also many shops that sell goods with a vintage feel. When you try to find out on the Google search engine or attend lots of vintage-related events, there are lots of vintage-related things that many people are used to wearing.

    Some experts on fashion trends say that fashion will roll back to the old era. This turned out to have been predicted long ago. Therefore, with you do not become exclusive. You will be able to share pastel colors or share pomade with your friends.

    5. Enjoy imported books and follow certain literary works

    Imported books and rare literary works are now being targeted by many groups. Meeting someone who both likes literature is no longer just a dream. You can find someone who has a real sense of literature with you pretty easily these days. There is potential for new Cinta and Rangga out there if you are good at getting to know your friends.

    Telling stories and sharing books is fun, especially songs if you can share your opinion about them with your friends. You can also recommend books to your friends. This makes you closer through the books they read. Imported books do look very likable, the aroma from the pages is so distinctive and at the same time can improve your foreign language skills.

    6. Fans of certain science-fiction or certain TV series

    When you hear or see posts about science fiction or your favorite series on social media. This means you are not an exclusive fan of one of these film genres. Instead of claiming to be the number 1 fan of a certain science fiction or TV series. It’s a good idea to find out friends who have the same tastes. That way, you can recommend that genre to your friends. Maybe you can find a friend who also likes science fiction or a certain TV series.

    7. Dieters special healthy foods

    Information about diet is now very easy to find via the internet. So, if you think you’re the only one who understands specific dietary behaviors, then you’re not quite right. There are many who already understand the current diet, starting with food, exercise, and so on.

    In addition, diet is not only a matter of losing weight. Diet is an attempt to exercise control over eating patterns for a specific purpose. This can be understood for certain types of food.

    Foods such as fiber/protein bars, muesli, dried berries, crunchy vegetable snacks, exotic nuts and whatever else you have purchased may not have been eaten by you alone. Therefore, instead of eating like a royal family, it’s better for us to share lunch boxes with your friends. Who knows he has a better type of food than what you eat.

    E. Anti Mainstream Media with Mainstream Media

    What is anti-mainstream media? Mainstream media is traditional media that has existed since ancient times, such as newspapers, radio, television, exhibitions, bulletin boards, and so on. Meanwhile, anti-mainstream media is creative media that emerged because of technological developments and market share that has different segments, for example Netflix, YouTube, Twitter, Instagram, Facebook, and so on.

    There are several types of anti-mainstream media, namely educative, informative, and also entertaining. To make it clearer, here is the discussion:

    1. Educative

    The purpose of educational media is action and unique content,
    for example YouTube, Netflix, Facebook, Twitter, Instagram, and so on.

    There are several types of anti-mainstream media, including educative, informative, and entertaining. In order to be clearer, here is the full discussion:

    The purpose of educational media is actions and content that are indeed unique, but aim to convey knowledge that according to the maker is needed by most people.

    2. Informative

    This informative media certainly aims to provide information to everyone about something that is certainly useful. In general, through content or directly in public.

    3. Entertaining

    This one media aims to entertain everyone with all its unique behavior. This one media is the media that everyone likes and attracts attention.

  • Meaning of Sakinah Mawadah Warahmah (Samawa)

    Sakinah mawadah warahmah is a prayer expected by Muslims who have just married and started a family. All married Muslims certainly want a family that is sakinah, mawaddah, and warahmah. That is the purpose of marriage, which is a blessing from Allah SWT. Give to those who can build a family.

    This book contains the best advice from Allah swt. and Rasulullah saw to every married couple as household controllers. Following this advice will achieve baiti jannati (my house, my heaven).

    Then, what is the meaning of sakinah mawadah warahmah? Does this include the prayer for newlyweds taught by Rasulullah SAW? To find out more details, let’s look at the following review!

    Definition of Sakinah Mawadah Warahmah

    The sentence sakinah mawadah warahmah has been written in the Al-Quran. This sentence is part of the function and purpose of marriage in Islam. This sentence is also often said when in wedding sermons or even on wedding invitations. The following is an explanation from QS Ar-Rum verse 21.

    وَمِنۡ اٰيٰتِهٖۤ اَنۡ خَلَقَ لَكُمۡ مِّنۡ اَنۡفُسِكُمۡ اَزۡوَاجًا لِّتَسۡكُنُوۡۤا اِلَيۡهَا وَجَعَلَ بَيۡنَكُمۡ مَّوَدَّةً وَّرَحۡمَةً ؕ اِنَّ فِىۡ ذٰ لِكَ لَاٰيٰتٍ لِّقَوۡمٍ يَّتَفَكَّرُوۡنَ

    Wa min Aayaatihiii an khalaqa akum min anfusikum azwaajal litaskunuuu ilaihaa wa ja’ala bainakum mawad datanw wa rahmah; inna fii zaalika la Aayaatil liqawminy yatafakkaruun.

    Meaning: “And among His signs (greatness) is that He created partners for you of your own kind, so that you are inclined and feel at ease towards him, and He made love and affection between you. Indeed, in that there are true signs (of Allah’s greatness) for people who think.” (QS Ar-Rum: 21).

    In this verse there is the word “litaskunu” or also sakinah, then mawadah, and rahmah. These three words are often combined into one sentence: sakinah mawadah warahmah. If translated into Indonesian, sakinah means calm or serene, mawadah means love, and warahmah means grace.

    The sentence sakinah mawadah warahmah follows what is in verse 21 of the Ar-Rum Letter. In this verse, Allah SWT. He gave his word that humans were created to pair up with each other, that is, between wives and husbands, to get calm, peace, and also love.

    Meaning of Sakinah

    Sakinah comes from Arabic, which can be translated into Indonesian with calm, serenity, security, and also peace. Meanwhile, the opposite of peace and tranquility are unrest, destruction, and shock. What is expected from marriage, as in the meaning of sakinah, is peace, calm, security, and peace among family members. Whereas a family that does not have sakinah means a family that is full of unrest, destruction, and turmoil, that is what must be avoided.

    An example of a family that is not sakinah is a family that is full of debates, fights, and suspicions. With so many conflicts that occur in the family, it can certainly trigger a divorce. Distrust in a partner is one of the triggers for family breakdown. Suppose the spouses are suspicious of each other and have no trust in each other, and other people deliberately shake up the household or the wife’s resistance to her husband. In that case, it is classified as a family that is not sakinah.

    By having calm, peace, security, and peace, conflicts in the family will not occur. With calm, family members can think about how to solve problems calmly because they have a clear mind. Family conflicts will easily occur if there is no sakinah in the family.

    Meaning of Mawaddah

    Mawadah also comes from Arabic, which means affection and burning love. The word mawadah has a special meaning for someone who has passionate feelings for their partner. This passionate feeling arises because of other aspects that are owned by the partner, including beauty, good looks, morals, position, mindset and other things in the partner.

    In Islam, mawadah is also a nature possessed by humans. Having mawadah in the family will make the family full of love and affection. It’s impossible in a family not to have love; it will taste bland. The feeling of love gives a sense of belonging and caring between family members.

    A family with mawadah must have positive things in that family. If you don’t have mawadah, your family won’t support each other because you don’t have love. In fact, infidelity can occur because there is no feeling of affection between partners.

    A family that has mawadah is not formed instantly but is developed through a process of nurturing it through the love of husband, wife, and children. Every family wants a mawadah family because it is a nature in every creature.

    Meaning of Warahma

    Rahmah means sustenance, forgiveness, grace, and mercy. The greatest grace, of course, comes from Allah SWT. The family that gets the greatest grace is, of course, the one with love, affection, and trust. Families who have warahmah are also not an instant process but rather a long process because it requires understanding, covering each other’s shortcomings, and providing understanding.

    With patience and sacrifice from husband and wife, it will certainly make the family have warahmah or grace in it. From this process of patience, warahmah will be given by Allah SWT. as the highest form of love in a family.

    It should be noted that warahmah will not appear if in the family there is mutual disobedience between husband and wife. Families must be calm, peaceful, and have loved so that warahmah can be realized.

    Characteristics of Sakinah Mawadah Warahmah

    Families who have sakinah mawadah warahmah certainly have visible characteristics or characteristics. Here are some characteristics of a family that has sakinah mawadah warahmah.

    • Have calm, serenity, and peace in a family;
    • Have love, affection, and a sense of belonging that is always maintained among family members;
    • Have a love that leads to Allah SWT. and also values ​​in religion, not just love for creatures or just lust;
    • Far from suspicion, distrust, and also feelings of misgivings with your partner;
    • Can maintain association in Islam, no rules are violated in marriage, including infidelity;
    • Have their respective roles as family members with sincerity and integrity. The role that belongs to both the husband as the head of the family, the wife as the mother who carries out the husband’s mandate, and the children as the mandate from Allah SWT. to be adequately educated;
    • Being able to maintain aspects of faith and worship between each family member, not destroying or plunging one another;
    • Supporting work or profession between partners to be able to create a family that is built as a mandate from Allah SWT.
    • They can meet family needs, including sustenance, sexual needs, and also a sense of belonging to one another.

     

    This book contains provisions so that you and your family can go to a sakinah mawadah warahmah household.

    Benefits of Sakinah Mawadah Warahmah

    Family is not just a relationship between husband, wife and children. The family has relationships and duties in society. Allah SWT. will only create something with the benefits to be obtained. All rules are, of course, in Allah SWT’s hands, as the universe’s creator.

    Sakinah mawadah warahmah family is an order from Allah SWT. given to the family to realize the benefits. With the existence of sakinah mawadah warahmah, it will certainly help the goals of an Islamic family to be realized.

    Carry out the Mission of the Human Caliphate

    Humans were created by Allah SWT. solely to worship Him. With a family that has sakinah mawadah warahmah, of course, it can guide, condition, and support the family to always worship Allah SWT.

    In a family like this, every member, husband, wife, and children, must guide each other in terms of religion and goodness. The sakinah mawadah warahmah family does not only love what is in the world but love Allah SWT. This has been written in QS Az-Zariyat verse 56.

    Amen

    Wa maa khalaqtul jinna wal insa illaa liya’buduun.

    Meaning: “I did not create jinn and humans except that they worship Me.” (QS Az-Zariyat: 56).

    Allah SWT. also created humans as caliphs fil ard. This means that humans were created to build and carry out several things that can provide benefits for prosperity on earth. Benefits can be given with the position you have now with the profession you have too.

    The mission of the caliphate can be carried out with enthusiasm if you have a sakinah mawadah warahmah family. The existence of careers owned by husband and wife will not distance each other from each other, let alone distance themselves from Allah SWT. However, having a career that is being built will certainly be very useful for yourself and others who are affected by us.

    1. Lots of Worship and Good Charity

    Allah commands humans to protect themselves and their families from the fires of hell. That is, humans are ordered to stay away from the fire of hell and increase worship and good deeds. This is indeed not going to be easy if you do it yourself. Therefore, the existence of a good family and, of course, in accordance with the expectations of Allah SWT. can be a field of worship and good deeds because many things can be done with family. This has been written in QS At-Tahrim verse 6.

    يَٰٓأَيُّهَا ​​ٱلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوا۟ قُوٓا۟ أَنفُسَكُمْ وَأَهْلِيكُمْ نَارًا وَقُودُهَا ٱلنَّاسُ وَٱلْحِجَارَةُ عَلَيْهَا مَلَٰٓئِكَةٌ غِلَاظٌ شِدَادٌ لَّا يَعْصُونَ ٱللَّهَ مَآ أَمَرَهُمْ وَيَفْعَلُونَ مَا يُؤْمَرُونَ

    Yā ayyuhallażīna āmanụ qū anfusakum wa ahlīkum nāraw wa qụduhan-nāsu wal-ḥijāratu ‘alaihā malā`ikatun gilāẓun syidādul lā ya’ṣụnallāha māmaraham wa yaf’alụna mā yu`marụn.

    Meaning: “O you who believe, protect yourselves and your families from the fires of hell whose fuel is humans and stones; guardians of angels who are rough, harsh, and do not disobey Allah in what He commands them and always do what they are commanded. (QS At-Tahrim: 6).

    A father who works for a living to support his family and children will certainly be rewarded and a good deed for his own family. Likewise, a mother who takes care of her family and helps her husband support his family is a field of worship and good deeds for herself. The wife’s obligation to her husband in Islam can be a field of worship and good deeds. Likewise, the husband’s obligation to his wife is a separate reward for the husband’s family.

    Raising children in Islam is also part of the fields of worship and good deeds. Good deeds are only beneficial for families who are cared for with love, affection, and sincerity in them. To do this, we need a family that has sakinah mawadah warahmah to be able to worship and do good deeds as much as possible.

    1. Place in Reaping Love and Compassion

    Allah gives good sustenance, one of which is to please his family and descendants. This is, of course, something that is expensive in family ties because not everyone can enjoy it. In fact, family, a sense of security, and affection are the natural needs of all human beings. a pious woman and a pious man is one form of family happiness. As in QS An-Nahl verse 72.

    وَٱللَّهُ جَعَلَ لَكُم مِّنْ أَنفُسِكُمْ أَزْوَٰجًا وَجَعَلَ لَكُم مِّنْ أَزْوَٰجِكُم بَنِينَ وَحَفَدَةً وَرَزَقَكُم مِّنَ ٱلطَّيِّبَٰتِ ۚ أَفَبِٱلْبَٰطِلِ يُؤْمِنُونَ وَبِنِعْمَتِ ٱللَّهِ هُمْ يَكْفُرُونَ

    Wallāhu ja’ala Lakum min anfusikum azwājaw wa ja’ala Lakum min azwājikum banīna wa ḥafadataw wa razaqakum minaṭ-ṭayyibāt, a fa bil-bāṭili yu`minụna wa bini’matillāhi hum yakfurụn.

    Meaning: “God made for you wives from your own kind and made for you from your wives, children and grandchildren, and gave you sustenance from the good. So why do they believe in falsehood and deny Allah’s favor?”

    Sakinah Mawaddah Warahman can meet the needs of members. These needs start from peace of mind, peace, sustenance in the form of wealth, love, sexual relations with partners, honor, and of course other forms of worship that can be practiced in family charity.

    The wife is the mission of the husband and vice versa. Because marriage in Islam is based on the name of Allah SWT. then building a house in Islam is not only the obligation of men and women but also the obligation of Allah. Households and families certainly have shocks and tests, but based on religious values, all of this can be overcome until the shocks are gone.

    The sakinah mawadah warahmah family is more than just a goal, but a process to achieve more happiness in this world, the happiness in the hereafter.

    Sinaumed’s this is an explanation of the meaning of sakinah mawadah warahmah along with the meaning, characteristics, and benefits in it. In building a family, I hope we all have a family that is sakinah, mawaddah, and warahmah.

    • Procedure for Ablution
    • Names of Angels and Their Duties
    • Definition of Al-Quran and Hadith
    • Definition of Morals
    • Noble Qualities
    • Honest Behavior in Islam
    • Definition of Zakat
    • Pillars of Hajj
    • Understanding Faith In Angels
    • Understanding Aurat
    • List of 99 Asmaul Husna
    • Zakat Fitrah and Zakat Mal
    • Meaning of Tablighi
    • Definition of Zakat Mal
    • The Meaning of the Title Al-Amin Rasulullah SAW
    • Definition of Faith in Language and Terms

    If you want to learn about marriage in Islam to get a sakinah mawadah warahmah family, you can buy and read books available at sinaumedia. sinaumedia as #UnlimitedFriends has provided the books you might need. Come on, Sinaumed’s, buy the book now!

    This book contains insights into the guidance of household life, to be guided by young people who are about to enter married life and married couples who are already living a household life. In this book, it is explained starting from the guide to choosing a life partner and entering into marriage.

     

  • Yogyakarta: 15 Exciting Spots for Adventurers

    Yogyakarta: 15 Exciting Spots for Adventurers

    Adventurers Go to Yogyakarta to Experience Everything from Whitewater Rafting to Climbing Volcanoes

    Yogyakarta is a fantastic all-inclusive vacation spot! It has everything: stunning landscapes, fascinating cultures, and a long and storied past.

    But you know what? There are several extreme adventure sites in Yogyakarta as well. A healthy dosage of bravery is required to take on the challenges in such locations!

    To get their heart racing, a lot of people visit Jogja’s extreme attractions. If you’re looking for a more exciting and demanding holiday ambiance, it could be the perfect choice. It would be a shame to lose out on knowing about these places!

    Yogyakarta: 15 Exciting Spots for Adventurers

    It is now abundantly evident that this dynamic city offers a multitude of experiences for individuals wanting an adrenaline rush, having explored some of the exciting spots in Yogyakarta that are ideal for explorers.

    Unforgettable adventures abound in Yogyakarta, from tackling treacherous cave excursions to risky brushes with the water.

    Whether you’re more interested in exploring the depths of tunnels or the lofty heights of mountains, this place has something exciting for every explorer.

    Get ready for an exciting excursion around Yogyakarta, the adventurer’s paradise! So, pack your bags and get ready to go!

    1. Yogyakarta’s Jomblang Cave

    Visiting the Jomblang Cave is the next exciting thing to do in Jogja. This tourist area has been booming recently, thanks to the influx of South Korean idols.

    Getting there from Jogja city center will require an early morning start because it is in the Gunung Kidul region. Because you’ll want to make it to Jomblang Cave in time to see the incredible spectacle there by lunchtime.

    Sixty meters below the surface lies Jomblang Cave. Descent via a manually operated pulley system requires bravery.

    When you get inside, you may see the “heavenly light,” which is beautiful but only viewable on clear days from 10:00 am to 12:00 pm. A slit in the ceiling of Jomblang Cave lets sunlight in, creating this ethereal glow.

    Stalactites and stalagmites, which form little hills, embellish the cave beyond the spectacular Heavenly Light, adding to Jomblang Cave’s allure.

    Learn More About Yogyakarta’s Past by Visiting These 12 Monuments and Museums

    2. Paragliding at Watugupit

    Watugupit paragliding hill is best visited in the evening because to its elevated position.

    During the evening, you can take in the breathtaking sunset while gazing out at the southern ocean. It’s not only about taking in the sights; there are plenty of refreshments to choose from as well.

    Paragliding is an exciting and risky activity that anyone who appreciates a good challenge should give a go. Very few tourists are brave enough to try this risky pastime.

    Safety is not an issue, though, because you will be escorted by knowledgeable professionals who will have all the necessary gear.

    3. The Merapi Lava Tour

    In a Jeep Willy’s, test your mettle on off-road adventures across regions impacted by frigid lava flows and volcanic debris along Merapi’s slopes.

    As the Willy makes his way across sandy meadows strewn with big pebbles, the steep terrain demands a revving of the engine.

    Hold on tight and go with the flow of the jeep’s rhythm to keep from being thrown off by the car’s violent shaking.

    It’s exhilarating and leaves you wanting more, despite the nerve-wracking moments. Lava Tour Merapi is not only an exciting and entertaining way to increase your adrenaline levels, but it also gives you a great overview and knowledge about Mount Merapi.

    Exploring Nglanggeran Mountain on Foot

    If you’re sick of city life and beaches, Mount Nglanggeran is the place for you. A long and exhausting path may be ahead, but it will be worthwhile in the end.

    Ascending the massive andesite boulders that formed a volcano is sure to be an adventure you won’t soon forget. It is a thrilling journey to walk down the rocky route with hills on either side.

    The path becomes increasingly steeper as you ascend. Behold, a perilous chasm flanked by jagged peaks. This dark and tiny tunnel can only be traversed by a single individual; “it’s like in the movie 127 Hours, thrilling but cool…”

    5. Gondola Riding on Timang Beach

    Proceed with caution! Before you decide to take a ride in the historic gondola at Timang Beach, you should know that.

    There is no certainty that the gondola will not be frail or that the ropes will not break when a plain wooden box is coupled with several pulleys and nine ropes.

    From the coral hills of Timang Beach to the nearby Watu Panjang Island, lobster hunters rely on this daring gondola as their sole mode of transportation.

    The exhilaration of riding it, nevertheless, has attracted a growing number of tourists in recent years. From Watu Panjang Island, you may see an equally breathtaking panorama.

    You can see the whole South Beach lineup from that vantage point, all the way to Nglambor Beach’s twin Turtle Islands, which are owned by Krakal Beach.

    6. Rock Climbing at Siung Beach

    Climbers will find Siung Beach to be a paradise. It features 250 climbing routes and is abundant with gigantic cliffs. Difficulty and height vary among the dozens of cliff pieces here.

    Beginning at the welcoming cliffs in the front block and working your way to the higher cliffs behind them is one option to consider.

    You can also feel what it’s like to spend the night in a hanging bivouac, perched precariously on the edge of a cliff. This is an unforgettable experience.

    7. Hanging Bridge, Sinden Beach

    Sinden Beach is another desirable beach location in Jogja. Jepitu, Girisubo, Gunung Kidul is where you’ll find this beach.

    The ocean at Sinden Beach is powerful, with big, angry waves. Depending on the weather, you may be able to see massive waves pounding the coast.

    Those with a daring spirit should not miss the opportunity to stroll across the famous Sinden Beach Hanging Bridge. In the midst of the ocean, you can cross to Kalong Island from Sinden Beach.

    In exchange for your bravery in crossing this bridge, which is elevated above the water, you will be rewarded with breathtaking views of Kalong Island’s natural beauty. Kalong Island is well-known as a home to enormous fish, so anglers will be in luck!

    To access Sinden Beach, you must pay Rp10,000. To cross the hanging bridge, an extra Rp25,000 is required.

    8. Kalisuci Cave Tubing

    Kalisuci Cave is another impressive and extreme cave site in Gunung Kidul. This picturesque spot may be found in the town of Pacarejo. Starting from downtown Jogja, the distance to this place is 12 km.

    A rather lengthy river, with depths of 2 to 3 meters, can be explored in this cave. Two exciting and entertaining ways to explore caves are cave tubing and cave rafting.

    Rubber boats are used for rafting exploration, whereas individual float tubes are used for cave tubing. Even though it’s a relatively safe activity, Kalisuci Cave Tubing may be quite severe.

    We will supply you with a life jacket and a helmet. Throughout your journey of Kalisuci Cave, you will be accompanied by professional instructors.

    For about Rp80,000, you can enhance your adventure at Kalisuci Cave Tubing. Parking rates might range from Rp3,000 to Rp6,000, so be prepared with some additional funds. Consider purchasing a tour package from Nagantour for an easy solution.

    9. Sand Surfing on Parangkusumo Sands

    This tourist site is absolutely essential for surfers. One catch, though: you can forget about surfing on water. As an alternative, you’ll be surfing on sand, which is guaranteed to be an exciting and novel experience.

    You won’t have to worry about getting wet when riding the waves. You may just hire surfboards and all the necessary gear from them. Julang Kusumo Road, Bantul, Jogja is the address.

    10. The Progo River for Rafting

    Rafting the Progo River is also another possibility. Tourists’ heart rates will rocket as they embark on this thrilling experience. You’ll have to brave the rapid currents as you row a rubber boat along the river.

    You and your pals may tailor the rafting experience to your skill level by adjusting the difficulty level. With its thrilling and entertaining ambiance, it’s ideal for gatherings of all kinds.

    11. Goa Jepang kaliurang

    For a historical take on nature, head to Goa Jepang Kaliurang, which is close to Malioboro.

    This cave lives up to its name; it was a hiding place for Japanese soldiers during World War II as they hid from their allied forces.

    Goa Jepang Kaliurang is a historical site next to Mount Merapi in Kaliurang. A knowledgeable tour guide will be there to tell you its tale.

    The tour is available for a starting price of Rp 10,000 and is limited to visits until 3:00 PM. If you wish to explore the cave in Goa Jepang Kaliurang, you’ll have to bring a flashlight because it doesn’t have any lighting. The cave walls could become wet if it were to rain.

    Kalirang Street in the Forest Area of the Hargobinangun Sub-district in the Sleman Regency of Yogyakarta is where you should go to experience Goa Jepang Kaliurang.

    Temples, Palaces, and Traditions of Yogyakarta: A Delightful Cultural Journey

    12. Cliff Swing, Gunung Api Purba

    It may be known to some of you that Jogja is a popular tourist destination. Not only does it have stunning natural scenery, but it also has thrilling extreme adventure opportunities.

    Visitors to Jogja often partake in the cliff swinging that can be found atop Gunung Api Purba. Swinging from cliff to precipice is the centerpiece of this heart-pounding game. If you’re in the Yogyakarta Special Region, you can try it out in the Gunung Api Purba region, Nglanggeran, Gunung Kidul.

    You need to walk across a rope to feel this sensation of swinging. An exhilarating sensation of swinging over a chasm 100 meters deep is available to visitors.

    Anyone looking to get their heart racing should give this extreme game a go. Guests can enjoy it for a fee that varies with the package they choose. Prices start at 3,000,000 Rp and go up to 4,000,000 Rp. Are you intrigued by the idea of attempting this thrilling pursuit?

    13. Motor Trail, Bunker Kaliadem

    Stunning Bunker Kaliadem is the perfect setting for an intense bike ride in Jogja. This popular tourist destination is in the Yogyakarta Special Region, more specifically in the Kinarejo region of Hargobinangun District in the Pakem Regency of Sleman.

    A rough and rocky path leads to Bunker Kaliadem. Several local residents offer trail bike rentals to visitors. The excitement of avoiding obstacles like muddy pools and sudden rocky jumps is sure to satisfy you.

    14. Hiking at Shoka Sunset Hill

    You may find Shoka Sunset Hill in the Yogyakarta Special Region, more specifically in the Giricahyo Forest Area, Purwosari, Gunungkidul. It takes almost an hour to get to Shoka Sunset Hill from Yogyakarta’s downtown, which is around 31 km distant.

    At least a thousand people make the pilgrimage to Shoka Hill every day just to see the sun go down. Dine on delicious, authentic Indonesian cuisine while taking in views of the beach. Additionally, the meal and drink prices are incredibly low, falling between Rp5,000 and Rp30,000.

    Getting to Shoka Sunset Hill via the twisting road can be a bit of a challenge when it’s raining. Thus, tourists should exercise caution and wear shoes that provide adequate support.

    You can visit Shoka Sunset Hill any time between 7:00 AM and 11:00 PM. It is recommended that visitors come here first thing in the morning when the air is cooler. In order to secure your preferred seating and view for the sunset, it is advised that you do not arrive too late.

    15. Trekking at Bukit Pengilon

    In the Yogyakarta Special Region, namely in the Wates Hamlet of Purwodadi and Tepus in the Gunungkidul Regency, one may find Bukit Pengilon. The trip to Bukit Pengilon from Yogyakarta’s downtown takes around two hours and covers 75 kilometers.

    Only guests may drive their vehicles up to the parking lot. Approximately 1.5 kilometers of hiking track go to Bukit Pengilon’s summit from the parking area.

    Situated at the base of Mount Purba Batur, it offers visitors the chance to explore expansive and picturesque meadows. Also, from up here, sightseers can take in a panoramic view of the sky, hills, and ocean.

    Many people who enjoy camping and photography flock to Bukit Pengilon. Camping spaces are available for Rp 20,000 per night, and guests are welcome to bring their own gear.

    A number of amenities are available, including restrooms, prayer rooms, parking, camping, and food stands. Any time, day or night, you can visit Bukit Pengilon. With parking rates of Rp 2,000 for motorcycles and Rp 5,000 for vehicles, the entrance charge to Bukit Pengilon is a fairly inexpensive Rp 5,000 per person.

    Let’s Explore Java!

    Embark on an unforgettable journey to Java, Indonesia, where a world of wonders awaits! Java, the heart and soul of Indonesia, is a treasure trove of diverse landscapes, rich cultural heritage, and breathtaking experiences.

    Find out the package now from Yogyakarta Tours:

    • 1 Day Tour:

    Borobudur Sunrise

    Prambanan Ramayana Ballet

    Timang Beach

    and more…

    • Multidays Tours

    10 Days Tour in Java Island

    3 Days Tour in Yogyakarta

  • Meaning of Junub: Causes, and Procedures for Purifying It

    Definition of Junub – Cleanliness is part of faith. All provisions have been regulated by Allah SWT in the Al-Qur’an and hadith. It is stated that Allah SWT really loves His holy servant and always purifies himself. This is in line with His words in Surah Al-Baqarah verse 222 which reads as follows:

    ….اِنَّ اللّٰهَ يُحِبُّ التَّوَّابِيْنَ وَيُحِبُّ الْمُتَطَهِّرِيْنَ

    “… Indeed, Allah SWT loves those who repent and loves those who purify themselves ”.

    A Muslim can be said to be holy if he is clean from hadas and unclean. Conversely, a person who is still in a state of impurity and exposed to uncleanness is called a junub condition and is prohibited from performing obligatory worship such as prayer.

    The term junub is a familiar thing among Muslims. Junub is a condition when a person has large hadas in his body. For example, a husband and wife who have had sexual intercourse are prohibited from performing acts of worship such as praying, fasting, reading the Qur’an, and so on.

    In order to be able to return to worship again, the husband and wife are required to perform the junub bath or also known as the obligatory bath or big bath. Junub bath is different from bathing in general because there is an intention that must be read first and the procedure for doing a junub bath.

    So, what is junub and what is the law in Islam? To find out more, see the following explanation.

     

    Meaning of Junub

    In language, junub comes from the word janabah which means far away, while junub in terms is the state of a person after emitting semen ( al-inzal ) for women and men, due to wet dreams or sexual intercourse.

    While still in a state of junub, a Muslim is required to take a big bath. If not, he is prohibited from approaching places of worship and performing certain worship. The command to take a junub bath or take a big bath is contained in Surah Al-Maidah verse 6. Allah SWT says as follows:

    وَاِنْ كُنْتُمْ جُنُبًا فَاطَّهَّرُوْاۗ

    ” And if you are junub, you should purify .”

    Meanwhile, according to the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), junub is a dirty condition due to discharge of semen or intercourse which requires a person to take a bath by wetting (cleaning) the entire body from the tip of the hair to the toes or a condition with hadas which requires mandatory bathing.

    Conditions Requiring Junub Bathing

    In the book Having to Take a Mandatory Bath Again, written by Ustadz M. Saiyid Mahadhir mentions Ibn Faris in the Maqayis Al-Lughah dictionary explaining that janabah itself means far away, as opposed to the word near. It is called distant because someone with janabah status is in a remote position (unable to perform) some of the rituals of worship, such as praying, reading the Qur’an and staying silent in the mosque.

    The term janabah is used to indicate the condition of someone who is having a big hadats because he has had a husband and wife relationship, or for other reasons, janabah and big hadas are two words that have the same meaning.

    If someone says he is in a state of janabah , it means he is in a state of great hadas. There are seven reasons why a person has janabat and is obligated to take a big bath, among them.

    First , discharge of semen. Semen is a liquid that comes out of the genitals with a distinctive aroma, slightly fishy, ​​slightly thick and dries easily like an egg when it dries. Usually, the discharge is accompanied by a feeling of pleasure by radiating.

    Regardless of how it came out, intentional (masturbation) or dream, or by way of husband and wife intercourse, all must wash. It turns out that this does not only apply to men. Women can also release semen, and women also have the same obligation if semen comes out of them.

    From Umm Salamah RA that Umm Sulaym, the wife of Abu Talhah RA, asked RA, ” O Messenger of Allah, really Allah SWT is not ashamed when it comes to the truth, is it obligatory for a woman to take a bath when she dreams?” Rasulullah SAW replied: ” Yes, if he finds semen ” (HR Bukhari and Muslim).

    Second, related husband and wife. If intercourse between husband and wife is accompanied by discharge of semen or not, even if it is only limited to the meeting of the two genitals, then this condition makes a person obliged to take a bath. Rasulullah SAW said:

      Amen 

    ” If two genitals meet or if the genitals touch the other genitals, it is obligatory to bathe .”

    Third , women who have finished their menstrual period. The obligation to bathe is as stated by Allah SWT in Al Baqarah verse 222:

    وَيَسْأَلُونَكَ عَنِ الْمَحِيضِ ۖ قُلْ هُوَ أَذًى فَاعْتَزِلُوا النِّسَاءَ فِي الْمَحِيضِ ۖ وَلَا تَقْرَبُوهُنَّ حَتَّىٰ يَطْهُرْنَ ۖ فَإِذَا تَطَهَّرْنَ فَأْتُوهُنَّ مِنْ حَيْثُ أَمَرَكُمُ اللَّهُ ۚ إِنَّ اللَّهَ يُحِبُّ التَّوَّابِينَ وَيُحِبُّ الْمُتَطَهِّرِينَ

    “ And they ask you (Muhammad) about menstruation. Say, “That is something dirty.” Therefore, stay away from your wife during menstruation, and do not approach them until they are pure. When they are pure, interfere with them according to (the conditions) that Allah has commanded you. Indeed, Allah loves those who repent and loves those who purify themselves .”

    Fourth , finish the puerperium. Puerperal is the blood that comes out accompanying the release of the baby as well as the blood that comes out afterwards. The discharge of puerperal blood obliges to take a bath even though it turns out that the baby who was born died. After the blood has stopped, then hurry up to take a shower, so that you can carry out the worship activities that have been left behind.

    Fifth, women who have given birth. The obligation to bathe is based on the ijma (consensus) of the scholars, as emphasized by Ibn Al Mundzir. Part of the things that oblige a person to take a bath, even though giving birth is not accompanied by childbirth. According to the narrative of some of the husbands, there are indeed some of their wives who give birth without giving birth.

    Sixth, people who died. This is the last condition that makes it obligatory for a person to bathe, because he has died and is unable to bathe himself, the obligation to bathe rests on the shoulders of those who are still alive.

    Rasulullah SAW said when one of his daughters died, ” Wash her three times or five times or more from there ” (HR Bukhari and Muslim).

    Seventh , people who have just converted to Islam. The Islamic issue of a non-believer is still being debated among scholars as to whether they are obliged to bathe or not. Scholars from the Maliki and Hanbali schools are of the opinion that infidels who convert to Islam are obliged to take a bath.

    Abu Hurairah RA narrated that Tsumamah bin Atsal RA had just converted to Islam, then Rasulullah SAW said, ” Take him to one of the walls of the so and so, and order him to take a bath ” (HR Ahmad).

    Apart from that, it is very likely that those who disbelieve have experienced a major hadith status, either because of a dream or a husband and wife relationship, so it is on this basis that they are obliged to take a bath. And in these two schools of thought the obligation to bathe does not differentiate between those who are true disbelievers and those who are apostates.

     

    Hadiths that Explain about Junub

    Apart from being explained in the Al-Quran, discussion of junub is also explained in several hadiths. The following are hadiths about junub that Sinaumed’s friends need to know:

    First Hadith

    عن عائشة رضي الله عنها ق الت : كان رس ول الله صلى الله عليه وس لم إذا اغتسل من الجنابة غسل يديه ، ث م توضأ وضوءه للصلاة ، ثم اغتسل ، ثم يخلل بيده شع ره حتى إذا ظ ن أنه قد أرو ى بشرته أفاض عليه الماء ثلاث مرات ، ثم غسل سائر جسده

    It means:

    “From Aisyah radhiyallahu ‘anha; he said, “ That if the Prophet sallallaahu ‘alaihi wa sallam was taking a bath from the janabah then he would start by washing his hands, then do his ablution as he would for prayer, then put his fingers in the water and then interrupt the roots of his hair, until he thought the water was down to the base of his hair then watered his head with both hands three times then he splashed his entire body ” (Reported by Bukhari and Muslim).

    Second Hadith

    God bless you

    It means:

    “Aisyah radhiallahu ‘anha also said, “ I bathed with the Prophet sallallaahu ‘alaihi wa sallam from a jar, and we both took water from the jar ” (HR Muslim).

    Third Hadith

    عن ميمونة بن ت الحارث رضي الله عنها ز وجة النبي صل ى الله عليه وسلم أنها قا لت : وضعتُ ل رسول الله صل ى الله عليه وسلم وَضوء ا لجنابة ، فأك فا بيمينه عل ى يساره مرتي ن أو ثلاثا ، ثم غسل فرجه ، ثم ضرب يد ه بالأرض أو الحائط – مرت ين أو ثلاثا – ثم تمضمض و استنشق ، ثم غسل وجهه وذر اعيه ، ثم أف اض على رأسه الماء ، ثم غ سل سائر جسده ، ثم تنحّى فغسل رجليه ، قالت : فأتي ته بخرقة فلم يُردها ، وج عل ينفض الما ء بيده

    It means:

    From Maimunah bint Al-Harith radhiyallahu’anha; he said, “ I prepared water for the Prophet sallallaahu ‘alaihi wa sallam to bathe junub. Then he  poured (the water)  with his right hand over his left hand twice – or three times, then he  washed his private parts , then  rubbed his hands on the ground or on the wall  twice – or three times. Next, he  rinsed his mouth and took istinsyaq  (breathing water), then he  washed his face and his hands up to the elbows Then he  flushed his head and then his whole body . Then he took a position/place, shifted, then washed his feet . Then I gave him a cloth (a kind of towel, pen.) but he didn’t want it, so he wiped the water (on his body) using both hands “(HR Bukhari and Muslim).

    Mandatory Bathing Prayer According to Sunnah

    The Islamic religion requires its followers to remove major hadas by means of a mandatory bath or large bath. Hadas besar is the condition of someone who is not pure because after sexual intercourse, semen comes out for men, menstruation and childbirth for women.

    It is obligatory for Muslims to take a large bath after having hadas. If a Muslim does not perform the obligatory ghusl when he has a large period, it can prevent him from doing some acts of worship such as praying, reading the Qur’an, and thawaf.

    As a form of worship, of course there are prayers and procedures for bathing obligatory according to the hadith of the Prophet Muhammad. Prayers and procedures for bathing must be known by all Muslims so that this matter of purification can be carried out correctly. Prayers and procedures for bathing are obligatory in accordance with the sunnah to be carried out with the aim of cleaning oneself after menstruation, childbirth, semen and after intercourse.

    Here are the obligatory prayers and procedures for bathing that you need to know.

    1. Mandatory Bathing Prayer After Junub

    “Bismillahirahmanirahim, nawaitul ghusla liraf’il hadatsil Akbari minal janabati fardlo lillahi ta’ala”.

    It means:

    ” By mentioning the name of Allah SWT, I intend to take a bath to remove large hadas from jinabah, fardhu because of Allah Ta’ala “.

    2. Obligatory Bathing Prayer After Postpartum

    During a major hadas in a woman who is in childbirth or bleeding from the sex organs after giving birth, the obligatory bath prayer that must be read is as follows:

    “Bismillahirahmanirrahim, nawaitu ghusla liraf’il hadatsil Akbari minan nifasi fardlo lillahi ta’ala”.

    It means:

    ” By mentioning the name of Allah SWT, I intend to take a bath to remove large hadas from childbirth, fardhu because of Allah Ta’ala “.

    3. Obligatory Bathing Prayer After Menstruation

    The following is a mandatory bath prayer after menstruation that needs to be read:

    “Bismillahirahmanirahim, nawaitul ghusla liraf’il hadatsil Akbari minal haidi fardlo lillahi ta’ala”.

    It means:

    ” By mentioning the name of Allah SWT, I intend to take a bath to remove large hadas from menstruation, fardhu because of Allah Ta’ala “.

    After reading the obligatory bathing prayer above, the next step is to start bathing according to the good and correct procedures for taking a junub bath.

    Mandatory Bathing Procedures

    Prayers and procedures for bathing are obligatory according to sunnah, not like regular bathing, but there are rules according to hadith. Every Muslim who has reached puberty  must know fully the correct prayers and procedures for obligatory bathing in order to be lawful to perform worship.

    Junub bath or obligatory bath must be done perfectly as exemplified by Rasulullah SAW. Quoting the Fiqh book for Class VII MTs by Hasbiyallah, here are the mandatory bathing procedures that you can see:

    1. Before taking a bath, first wash your hands three times.
    2. Followed by washing the genitals.
    3. Then perform complete ablution, before sprinkling water all over the body.
    4. Pouring water on your head three times, insert your fingers through your hair to wet your scalp.
    5. Finally, splash water all over the body starting from the right side before the left side, while rubbing the areas that are difficult for water to enter, such as the inside of the ears, navel, under the arms, between the toes and other indentations of the body.

    Especially for women who take a junub bath to purify themselves from menstruation or childbirth, it is recommended to use cotton that is slightly perfumed, where the blood has been coming out. The point is to remove the remnants of the smell if it is still there.

     

    Prohibited Things When in Junub Condition

    Before purifying himself with a large bath, a Muslim who is still in a junub state is prohibited from performing certain rituals. Quoting the book Fiqh of Purification and Prayer According to the Guidance of the Prophet by Abu Usman Kharisman, these prohibitions include:

    1. Salat.
    2. Tawaf in Baitullah.
    3. Holding the Koran.
    4. Read the Qur’an even without touching the Mushaf.
    5. Live or remain silent in the mosque.

    Benefits of Mandatory Bathing

    After knowing the prayers and procedures for obligatory bathing according to the syara ‘ above, then we discuss the benefits of carrying out obligatory bathing.

    Quoting from  Sharia Discussion , Sheikh Muhyiddin writes in his book Ibadatul Islam: Fiqhuha, Asroruha, wa Ta’allumu Kaifiyyatiha  in the chapter on the benefits of bathing ( fawaidul ghusli ) about the benefits of obligatory bathing, namely:

    • When a Muslim performs the obligatory ghusl, he has carried out the command of Allah SWT and gets a great reward, happiness, serenity and joy.
    • Having sex between husband and wife will cause fatigue and laziness. Mandatory bathing will restore lost body strength after intercourse.
    • Bathing is one of the efforts to maintain cleanliness and health of the body.
    • The benefits of taking a big bath also make the body more enthusiastic about activities, and drive away laziness.

    That is the explanation of junub, which is a condition when a Muslim, both men and women have hadas and it is obligatory for them to take junub bath as an effort to purify themselves. That way, someone who has done a junub bath can perform worship again in a holy condition.

    Book Recommendations & Related Articles

  • Meaning of Imaging: Definition, Types, Purpose, and Examples

    Meaning of Image –  Image is an effort to highlight a good self-image to the public. The impression of this image itself is usually bad because many then practice it with lies and exaggeration. Even so, what was really wrong was not the image but the elements who then made the fake image.

    Imaging will also be wrong if someone then performs a fake image by presenting something completely different from the original conditions. Imaging can be said as proof of self-quality that is in accordance with actual abilities which will be better if done consistently, and for a longer period of time. Imaging also in a popular positive connotation is also known as personal branding.

    So, to find out more about imaging, then you can see this article till the end, Sinaumed’s. Here below is further imaging from various sources:

    Definition of Imaging

    Image is an effort made to describe someone or something as better or worse in the eyes of the public. The meaning of imaging itself can be defined in several meanings, among others.

    • An attempt to highlight the best image for someone or something in the public eye.
    • The attempt to prove one’s existence in public and also to show what one actually feels is so exaggerated that it doesn’t match the truth.

    The term image itself is often used in politics and art. However, basically this term is used to explain that there are efforts or efforts that are then made to describe something or someone to be better in front of the public, so that it will influence public opinion.

    Meanwhile, in the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), imagery is a process, a way of forming a personal mental image or an image of something or a description.

    Understanding Imaging According to Experts

    The following is an explanation of what imaging is according to experts:

    1.Huddleston

    According to Huddleston (Buchari Alma, 2008: 55), the notion of image is a series of beliefs which are then connected with an image that is owned or obtained from experience.

    2. Bill Canton

    According to Bill Canton (S. Soemirat and Ardianto. E 2007:111), the meaning of image is impressions, feelings, self-image of the public to the company; the impression that is deliberately created from an object, person or organization.

    3.Philip Kotler

    According to Philip Kotler (2009: 299), the meaning of imagery is a set of beliefs, ideas, and impressions that a person has of an object.

    4. Frank Jeffkins

    According to Frank Jefkins (Soemirat and Adrianto, 2007:114), the notion of image is the impression of a person or individual about something that arises as a result of their knowledge and experience.

    5. Suharta Abdul Manjid

    According to Suharta Abdul Majid (2009: 70), the notion of image is a picture that is formed in society (consumers/customers) about the good and bad of a company.

    Recommended Books Related to Imaging that You Must Read

    Introduction to the Psychology of Intelligence

    Saifuddin Azwar, the author of this book, is Associate Professor at the Faculty of Psychology, Gadjah Mada University, teaching courses in Test Construction, Thesis Writing Techniques, and Learning Psychology. Besides that, he also teaches as a non-permanent lecturer for Psychology and Statistics courses at the Faculty of Psychology, Wangsa Manggala University, Surakarta Muhammadiyah University, Ahmad Dahlan University Yogyakarta, and the Islamic University of Indonesia. The author’s books include: Achievement Test (Edition 2-1996), Introduction to the Psychology of Intelligence (1996), Human Attitudes Theory and Measurement (1995, 1997), Reliability and Validity (Edition 3-1997)

    Thinking, Fast and Slow

    Daniel Kahneman is one of the most important thinkers of this century. His ideas had a profound and far-reaching impact on a variety of fields including economics, medicine and politics. In this highly anticipated book, Kahneman describes two systems that drive the way we think. System 1 is fast, intuitive, and emotional; System 2 is slower, more purposeful, and more logical. Kahneman points out the extraordinary abilities as well as the shortcomings and biases of quick thinking, and reveals the impact intuitive impressions have on our thoughts and behavior. By knowing how these two systems shape our judgments and decisions, we can understand, among other things:

    • The impact of loss of enthusiasm and too much trust in corporate strategy.
    • It’s hard to predict what will make us happy in the future
    • The challenge is to create a clear framework for risks in the workplace as well as at home.
    • The profound impact of cognitive biases is on everything from trading in the stock market to planning your next vacation.

     

    The Power Of Now : A Guide To Spiritual Enlightenment

    Before we had control over our thoughts, they controlled us. The mind is constantly talking to itself and it is difficult to stop. The mind has many opinions, but all of them are usually based on what has happened in the past. As a result, it becomes difficult for us to perceive things that exist today as something new. Constantly thinking makes us unable to enjoy the present moment. Accept it—then act. Whatever is in the present, accept it as if you had chosen it. Always cooperate with the present, don’t fight it. Make the present your friend and ally, not your enemy. It will miraculously change your whole life. The Power of Now focuses intensely on the problems we face today and who we are today. The most practical of all practical guides, success or spiritual, and can be used to change our lives.

     

    Live Once Wise Execute

    “Life is not only about sharing and loving. It’s not just about giving and loving. Not only about depriving and oppressing. This life never escapes the name of loss, struggle, and letting go. Isn’t that what life is like? As long as we are alive, we have made many decisions. The decision is for ourselves or others. However, is it true that the decision is good for us? Or is it just not the best? Therefore, you only live once, so use it as best you can. Choose a good friend to live in, choose a good environment to live in, and so on. If you have chosen, then decide, execute it. Before executing it, don’t forget to ask Allah SWT for guidance. That way we will get good things for us and others.”

     

    Imaging Type

    Image or personal branding can now also be interpreted as credibility, character, impression, perception and opinion in the public. The person who performs the image then has no value or is meaningless if it is only based on lies only to influence public opinion.

    Image itself is not always negative, because imagery that is based on value or meaning can then benefit the perpetrators. The impression of a good image itself is referred to as personal branding.

    This imaging can be further divided into several types. The various types of imaging include the following:

    1. Visual imagery

    Visual imagery is imagery that arises due to the presence of visual aids.

    2. Auditory imagery

    Auditory imagery is an image that arises through the image of the ear to then evoke a certain atmosphere.

    3. Olfactory imagery

    Olfactory imagery is an imagery that is done by going through the sense of smell and depicting an abstract idea into a concrete idea.

    4. Imagery of feelings

    The feeling image is an image that arises through emotional stimulation and then directs one’s imagination as if the taste buds feel something.

    5. Tactile imagery

    Tactile imagery is an image that arises through touch, so that a person can then feel as if he is being touched or anything that involves the effectiveness of his skin senses.

    6. Motion imagery

    Motion imagery is imagery which then aims to make a picture more lively by depicting something that is still as if it is moving.

    Imaging Purpose

    From the explanation above, we then know that image is all efforts made as a way to form or build a good opinion of something or a person or company so that then get attention and a response that is in accordance with the intent and purpose.

    In addition to discussing the meaning and types of imagery, we will also discuss the purpose of imagery. Following are some of the purposes of imaging.

    1. Predicting Results 

    Imaging that is carried out will then help reasoning and problem solving, namely by giving someone the ability to be able to predict the results of an action. For example, when someone sees that the contents of the house are messy, he will immediately understand how to tidy it up.

    2. Reasoning 

    With imaging, one can then reason abstract concepts by visualizing a symbol, such as a diagram or graph about something.

    3. Describe the Situation 

    Imaging abilities can also then assist a person in providing a verbal description of something or someone.

    4. Recall 

    Imaging can also be used to recall visual or spatial information. For example, when someone tries to remember about the dinner that was served the previous day.

    5. Memorizing Information 

    Through imaging, one can also memorize information. For example, if a person’s memory will increase sharply when he visualizes various objects which are then given names as if the names of these objects interact with each other.

    6. Improve Ability 

    Imaging can also then help a person improve his abilities by visualizing himself by taking an action so that it will then direct him to that action.

    7. Provide Ideas or Insights 

    Every image that is done by someone will then remind him of an important insight, or give an idea.

    Relationship of Self Image with Other Aspects of Self 

    Self-image in psychology is closely related to what a person sees when he is looking in the mirror, but the true meaning of self-image is much deeper than that. This self-image refers to how a person sees himself at a broader level, both internally and externally.

    By definition, self-image is about how a person then perceives himself. Self-image as a number of self-impressions that have been built over time. In addition, self-image also has a relationship with other aspects of self. The following is the relationship between self-image and other aspects of self.

    1. Self-Concept 

    Self-image can be said to be related to a person’s self-concept. Self-concept is our personal knowledge of who we are including all thoughts and feelings about ourselves physically, personally and socially.

    These two things would then be closely related, but they are not the same thing. Self-concept is also more comprehensive than self-image, will involve how a person sees himself, thinks about himself and how he then feels about himself so that it develops into types of self-concept. Self-image is also a component that forms self-concept, according to Mc Leod (2008).

    2. Self Esteem 

    Self-image is related to self-esteem. This is because how we see ourselves will then be a major factor in how we feel about ourselves. However, self-esteem also has a deeper meaning than self-image.

    Overall self-esteem is the respect we have for ourselves that involves how favorable or unfavorable this feeling is towards us. Negative self-image will greatly affect self-esteem and concepts in psychology. Low self-esteem can be said to tend to be accompanied by negative self-image, and vice versa.

    3. Identity 

    Identity as a concept that is closely related to self-image in psychology, identity is bigger and more comprehensive than self-image. Identity is the whole idea of ​​who we are, as stated by Roy Baumeister: The term identity refers to the definition that is made and superimposed on someone’s self (1997:681).

    Thus, it can be said that identity is the whole picture of who we are that we believe in or believe in the importance of finding identity, and self-image is part of the whole picture.

    Self-image in healthy psychology is mainly based on an individual’s personal feelings and perspective, where a person will no longer be influenced by other people’s opinions about them or by social expectations which then build self-concepts in communication psychology. Instead, he will establish his own mind regarding internal mental pictures and ideas about himself.

    Closing

    Basically, everyone will always try to show their image to everyone, especially workers. Self-image can be said as a way for a person to be known by many people. Therefore, to do that, one needs to know oneself first.

    From all the discussion above it can be said that imagery is an action that shows a positive attitude in front of many people. Thus the discussion about the meaning of imagery, starting from the meaning, types, to the purpose of doing imagery.

    If you want to find books on psychology, you can get them at sinaumedia.com . To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

    Author: Sofyan

    Source: from various sources

  • Meaning and Origins of 5 Classical Dances from Central Java

    Meaning and Origins of 5 Classical Dances from Central Java – Sinaumed’s, as we all know that dance is a form of culture that is full of meaning. Jazuli (2008) in the Contextual Paradigm of Art Education states that dance is a beautiful form of movement, born from a body that moves, rhythmically, and has a soul according to its intent and purpose.

    Furthermore, Soedarsono (1986) through his Introduction to Dance Knowledge and Composition in Knowledge of Dance Elements and Some Dance Problems also added that dance is an expression of the human soul which is expressed by beautiful rhythmic movements.

    Dance is a rhythmic movement which (with awareness) is formed with the body as a medium in space. This art can then become a cultural statement. This is why the nature, style, and function of dance cannot be separated from the culture that produces it.

    Indonesia on the other hand consists of various tribes and very diverse cultures, thus producing dances that also have different characteristics. One area that has various types of classical dance is Central Java.

    This province, which has a thousand cities in Semarang, has many dances, most of which still survive today. There are interesting facts behind the emergence of some of these dances to become part of the cultural development of Central Java.

    So, what are the classical dances? In the following, we will present brief explanations and facts about 5 classical dances that are still developing in Central Java today.

    1. Ampil Kridha Warastra Jurit Dance

    Jurit Ampil Kridha Warastra dance is a classical dance originating from the city of Salatiga. This dance has meaning, namely jurit which means “warrior”, garwa ampil which means “concubine” (from Mangkunegara I), and warastra which means “gendewa”.

    In general, the dance depicts the garwa ampil (concubine) troop of Mangkunegara I in the Salatiga Agreement which was executed on March 17, 1757. Each party (Hamengkubuwana I, Pakubuwana III, and Mangkunegara I) in the agreement agreed to bring and show their strength his troops. Mangkunegara I himself also showed some of the bregada (army units) he brought with him, one of which was the Jurit Ampil, namely the soldiers’ unit of the daughters of his concubines.

    This dance is classified as a loose dance, meaning that it can be performed in teams, pairs and singles. The classical elements of the dance are contained in the movements, song accompaniment, clothing, and make-up, but now it has been combined with new elements that keep up with the times.

    This dance is also a fusion of Surakarta style classical dance and folk dance, which take many movements from the Warrior dance. The musical accompaniment uses Javanese gamelan with pelog tunings which include gender, kendhang, demung, saron, kenong, kempul, and gong, while the forms of the music are smooth , srepeg , and palaran .

    The clothing worn in the dance is a princess warrior dress with her hair in small buns and wearing a golden crown. The main shirt is blue, short-sleeved with gold decoration, belt and dodot, while the pants are knee-length.

    For his weapons, he uses jemparing (archery), endhong , nyenyep , gendewa , and cundrik. The makeup of the dancers aims to help shape the character and soul of a soldier.

    2. Warrior Dance

    The Warrior Dance is a traditional dance in the form of a mass dance that first appeared in Getasan Village, Getasan District, Semarang Regency, Central Java Province. This dance then developed into other areas in Semarang Regency with different versions of origins and themes, including Ambarawa District, Banyubiru District, Sumowono District, and Ungaran City. This dance also developed in Salatiga City, to be precise in Tegalrejo Village, Argomulyo District, Salatiga City.

    The elements contained in the dance include clothing, make-up, movement, and musical instruments. This dance is indeed included in the category of group dances, but the number of dancers is sometimes adjusted according to the needs and size of the venue.

    This dance on the other hand is not a dance of new creations which is more dynamic and has many variations according to the tastes of young people. This is because the movements and accompaniments tend to be monotonous. Folk dances are also rarely performed, so people don’t appreciate them, not even a few don’t know about them.

    This dance procession is thick with the nuances of war, which can be seen from the clothes of the dancers and their movements that carry weapons following the accompaniment of gamelan organs. The dance in its implementation has undergone changes along with the times and the various factors that influence it. One of the intrinsic factors of change in this dance can be seen from changes in the composition of the dancers.

    At the beginning of its appearance, this dance was danced by male dancers, but now it is also danced by female dancers. This is why the makeup used is male makeup. In addition, the real influence on the appearance of this dance is the modern songs that are performed to accompany it. The extrinsic factors that drive changes in the composition of dancers are economic and market reasons, not merely functional reasons for art as entertainment.

    Warrior dancers used to only wear cloth pants and ngligo (not wearing clothes). The clothes worn by the dancers of the warrior section currently consist of trousers, camouflage cloth, beskap, songkok, and sampur, while the dancers of the Manggalayuda (war leader or line leader) use trousers, camouflage cloth, beskap, blangkon, and keris.

    The movements performed in the Warrior dance include:

    • Lumaksana , means that humans must be responsible for carrying out their duties and always remember God Almighty;
    • Merong megar , means that humans must always look at various sides in carrying out their obligations;
    • Garuda nglayang , means that any action taken by humans must look at the state order. This movement is taken from the symbol of Indonesia, namely the eagle;
    • Nyongklang , means humans who travel in carrying out their duties;
    • Gedrug , means human awareness of life on earth;
    • Fishing sandals , means that one must face various problems patiently and not in a hurry;
    • Barn , means that all the results of the work to be used and stored properly.

    The musical instruments used to accompany the Warrior dance include:

    • Jedhor , which is a small beduk made of teak wood and covered on both sides with goat skin. The bat is made of teak wood with black rubber wrapped around the end. Diameter size + 25 centimeters;
    • Dhodhog kendang , which is a smaller drum than jedor made of teak wood. One side is closed using goat skin, while the other side is left open. The bat is made of teak wood with black rubber wrapped around the end. Diameter size + 12.5 centimeters;
    • Bendhe , namely the gamelan organ made of iron and brass, while the beaters are made of teak wood wrapped in black rubber. Bendhe consists of majors (diameter + 20 centimeters), keprah (diameter + 18 centimeters), successors (diameter + 18 centimeters), and kenthing (diameter + 15 centimeters).

    Jedor and dhodhog drums are hit almost simultaneously, only one beat apart. The majors and keprak are beaten monotonously, while the successor and kenthing are beaten alternately. When changing movements, use the whistle brought by Manggalayuda as a marker.

    3. Ireng Mask Dance

    Based on stories circulating in the community, the Topeng Ireng art began to develop among the people on the slopes of Merapi–Merbabu since the Dutch colonial era, which then continued its development in the 1960s.

    At that time, the Dutch colonial government prohibited the public from practicing silat as a precautionary measure so that the people would not have the skills if they later resisted. This is what made the local people develop the various silat movements into folk dances.

    At first, the dance was presented to the accompaniment of gamelan music and Javanese songs, which in essence concern various advice about the goodness of life. This art is growing when presented as part of the construction procession of mosques and prayer rooms.

    Before being installed, the dome of the mosque will usually be paraded around the village first. The carnival or procession will be followed by all the people around the mosque with dances accompanied by tambourines and hymns of praise. This is what later caused this dance to develop into the Topeng Ireng art.

    The name “topeng ireng” itself comes from the word kenceng rhythm plates . Tata means “arrange”, plate means “straight”, rhythm means “tone”, and kenceng means “loud/fast”. Therefore, the dancers perform this dance in straight lines and accompanied by loud and enthusiastic rhythmic music.

    This dance is a form of traditional art performance that combines Islamic religious symbols and the martial arts of pencak silat. Not surprisingly, Topeng Ireng is always accompanied by Islamic rhythms and songs. Aside from being a symbol of Islam, the Topeng Ireng performance also depicts the lives of rural communities living on the slopes of Merapi–Merbabu. Judging from its firm movements, this dance describes the physical strength possessed by the village community when fighting or making friends with nature to defend their lives.

    Before being known as Topeng Ireng, this performing art was known as the Dayakan art. The name is based on the costumes worn by the dancers, namely the lower clothing worn by the dancers resembling traditional Dayak clothing.

    Around 1995, the word Dayakan was considered to contain SARA elements. This is what later made this art changed its name to Topeng Ireng art. However, the name Dayakan has been popularized again since 2005, thus making this art known by two names, namely Topeng Ireng and Dayakan.

    4. Gambyong Dance

    Gambyong dance is a form of classical Javanese dance originating from the Surakarta region. This dance is usually performed to welcome guests. Gambyong is not just one dance, but consists of many choreographies – the best known are the Gambyong Pareanom Dance (with several variations) and the Gambyong Pangkur Dance (with several variations).

    Before the Mangkunegaran Duchy reorganized and standardized the structure of its movements, the dance belonged to the people as part of agricultural ceremonies so that the rice planted would thrive and obtain an abundant harvest. Dewi Sri is described as dancers who are dancing. Now, the Gambyong dance is used to enliven wedding receptions and welcome guests of honor or statehood.

    In general, the Gambyong dance consists of three parts, namely the beginning, the content, and the end (in terms of Javanese dance, the Surakarta style is called the advanced beksan, beksan , and backward beksan ). The center of the whole dance lies in the movement of the feet, arms, body and head.

    Conceptual head and hand movements are the main characteristic of the dance. The dancer’s eyes always accompany or follow every movement of the hand and the direction of the fingers. In addition, the foot movements that are so harmonious in rhythm make the dance beautiful to look at.

    The clothes worn by the dancers are colored yellow and green as a symbol of prosperity and fertility. Before the dance begins, it is always opened with Pangkur gending. Movement techniques, rhythm, accompaniment, and drum patterns in this dance are also able to display the dancer’s flexible character.

    5. Serimpi Dance

    Serimpi is a form of presentation of classical Javanese dance from the Mataram Sultanate tradition, which was then continued to be preserved and developed until now by its four heir palaces in Surakarta and Yogyakarta. Serimpi dance in the Sultanate of Yogyakarta is classified into Serimpi Babul Layar, Serimpi Dhempel, and Serimpi Genjung. For Surakarta Sunanate, Serimpi is classified into Serimpi Anglir Mendhung and Serimpi Sangupati.

    The emergence of this dance began when the Mataram Sultanate was ruled by Sultan Agung in 1613–1646. This dance is considered sacred because it is only performed in the palace environment for state rituals and the commemoration of the sultan’s ascension.

    In 1775, the Mataram Sultanate split into two, namely the Yogyakarta Sultanate and the Surakarta Sultanate. This division has an impact on the differences in the movements of the Srimpi dance between the two, even though the essence of the dance is still the same. This dance appeared in the Surakarta Sunanate environment around 1788–1820.

    Since the 1920s, this classical dance practice was included in the Taman Siswa subject in Yogyakarta and in the Kridha Beksa Wirama dance or karawitan association. After Indonesia’s independence, this dance was taught at the government dance and karawitan academies, both in Surakarta and Yogyakarta.

    The presentation of this dance is characterized by four dancers performing graceful movements depicting politeness, delicacy and gentleness. Serimpi is considered to have a similar social position to the Pakarena dance from Makassar, which is seen in terms of the softness of the dancers’ movements and as a palace dance.

    Since ancient times, the Serimpi dance has had a special position in Javanese courts and cannot be compared to other staged dances because of its sacred nature. In the past, this dance could only be performed by people chosen by the palace. Serimpi has the same sacred level as heirlooms or objects that symbolize the power of the king, although it is not as sacred as the Bedhaya dance.

    In its performance, this dance does not always require offerings like the Bedhaya dance, but only at certain times. The musical accompaniment for the Srimpi dance prioritizes a combined choir, namely when singing Javanese songs.

    Serimpi has experienced many developments from time to time, one of which is the duration of the performance. The dance has now been developed into several new variants with shorter durations. For example, Serimpi Anglirmendhung was changed to 11 minutes and Serimpi Gondokusumo was changed to 15 minutes, both of which were originally presented with a duration of approximately 60 minutes.

    So, that’s a brief explanation of the Meaning and Origins of 5 Classical Dances from Central Java. These dances generally fade away with the times. For this reason, friends of Sinaumed’s, let us protect and preserve the culture of our ancestors together. Do not let us lose to cultures from outside Indonesia which are now better known globally, such as Anime, Korean Pop, and Gangnam Style Dance.

    Sinaumed’s can also visit sinaumedia’s book collection at www.sinaumedia.com to obtain references about social conditions in the Central Java region. The following are recommendations for sinaumedia books that Sinaumed’s can read to study them in full. Happy reading.

    Recommended Books & Articles Related to Classical Dance from Central Java

    Author: Fandy Aprianto Rohman

     

  • Matrilineal is a kinship system adopted by several world tribes

    Matrilineal is – Matrilineal is a kinship system that draws bloodline from the mother’s side only. The child will then be connected to the mother including connected to the mother’s relatives, based on the unilateral female lineage.

    The consequence of this kinship system is to attract offspring from the mother’s line which is considered very important. In matters of inheritance, it is the people from the mother’s line who will get more portions than those from the father’s line.

    This kinship system can then be found in the Minangkabau and Semando communities. Children who are related to their mother based on female lineage.

    In a matrilineal society, descent according to the mother’s own line is considered very important, so that it will give rise to family relations that are far more pervasive in families with descent according to the mother’s line. In Indonesia, this kinship system applies to the Minangkabau people.

    Matrilineal in the Minangkabau Tribe

    In family relationships there is a kinship system. This kinship system will then connect a nuclear family or small family with extended family members. Unlike the patrilineal kinship system adopted by tribes in general, the matrilineal system itself is rarely used.

    In Indonesia there are not many tribes that adhere to this kinship system. However, one of the surviving tribes adhering to the matrilineal system is the Minangkabau tribe. The existence of the Minangkabau tribe dominates the province of West Sumatra with a large population.

    Here are some unique facts regarding the matrilineal system adopted by the Minangkabau tribe that you need to know.

    1. Doing Exogamy Marriage

    In the matrilineal system, adat in Minangkabau does not support inter-tribal marriages. Even if they come from a different nagari (a village or area) but have the same tribe, then marriage is still seen as something that is not good.

    Minangkabau custom is often concerned about damage to the ethnic line if two people from the same ethnic group marry. Those who end up violating these provisions will generally receive social sanctions, such as being ostracized from society.

    With regard to exogamy marriages, it is not uncommon for the man to be given the dowry. The position of men with this condition will make them referred to as pick-up people. After marriage, a man will become a “guest” because they will then live in his wife’s family home.

    2. The generation that is born will affect the size of the Gadang house that is inhabited

    Rumah Gadang is an heirloom and is a place for various important events, from birth ceremonies to weddings. If a man has a family, the Gadang house is occupied by his sister with her husband and their children.

    Home development will also adapt to the needs of girls. The more contents, the bigger the size of the house. Women also play a central role in the family structure. Several experts such as Naim, Anwar, and M. Radjab then mentioned what the meaning of family in a Gadang house includes, includingparuik, jurai, and samande.

    Paruik is a term for 5–6 generations who occupy the Gadang house. This larger group is also known as jurai, while the smaller group is also known as samande.

    In general, there is no neglect because each generation and group has an equally important role. For the Minangkabau people, living with a large family is the same as receiving great protection from the family.

    Parents have responsibility for the survival of children, while children are responsible for families with old age. If these two provisions do not work, the responsibility will then be transferred to the saparuik family members.

    If not, it will be taken over by members of the sajurai family, and so on up to a higher family level

    3. Name of Descendant Withdrawn from One of the Parties

    Matrilineal is a term that refers to a kinship system that draws lineage from the female (mother), both sons and daughters. They then bear the tribe in their name according to the tribe owned by the mother.

    Starting from the ancestors to the newly born generation, Minangkabau children generally will not use the tribe from their father’s side. Because of this, the birth of a daughter was welcomed very well because later she would become the successor to the lineage of her tribe.

    4. Inheritance for Collective Use

    As previously mentioned, the Minangkabau people then have a very close relationship with their relatives. The strength of this relationship itself is based on common goals and interests, namely the ownership of houses and land.

    So, even though women play a big role in ethnicity, it does not mean that women will get full power over inheritance or inheritance in their family. The Minangkabau people have the philosophy of Adat Basandi Syarak, Syarak Basandi Kitabullah. This means that besides adhering to adat, the Minangkabau people will also make Islamic teachings a guide in life, including in the distribution of inheritance.

    Minangkabau people in general also adhere to inheritance from mamak (uncle or mother’s brother) to nephews. From the division of this inheritance, usually the inheritance will be used jointly by the recipient of the inheritance with other family members. In a way, the inherited property then cannot be divided and must remain intact because it belongs together.

    5. There are some relationships between women and men in the system

    The matrilineal system adopted by the Minangkabau tribe causes women and men to receive different titles. The difference itself depends on the type of relationship that is established. Here’s an explanation.

    • Mother-niece relationship. Mamak is the name for the uncle and nephew is the name for the uncle’s nephew. This relationship itself is established between the uncle and the child of his sister or the relationship between a man or a woman and his uncle.
      It is Mamak who will play an important role in preserving the matrilineal system. He also served as a protector for his family at the Gadang house. Starting from guiding daughters to continue the matrilineal system of their tribe to guiding boys to be wise if one day they are faced with inheritance.
    • The relationship is based on the Bako mother and the banana child. Induk bako is a term for a woman when it comes to the child of her brother. Meanwhile, the banana child itself shows the relationship between men and women with their father’s sister. The role of women here will be even wider when compared to the relationship in the previous point.
    • Relations on the basis of trust. Husbands will be called sumando because they will be the party who stays in or lives in the house of his wife’s family while the wife is called pasumandan because they become the party that is boarded.

    Even though it is somewhat complex, it cannot be denied that the matrilineal system which was later adopted by the Minangkabau tribe has given birth to a generation of strong women. The role of women in the Minang realm itself then occupies a high position until now.

    Ethnicity in a World that Still Executes Matrilineal Customs

    As we already know, matrilineal is a custom that passes inheritance to women or from the mother’s line. Apart from Indonesia, there are several ethnic groups in the world who still adhere to matrilineal culture, which countries are they?

    1. Minangkabau

    In the Minangkabau community, also known as Minang, located in Indonesia, all property, land and inheritance are passed from mother to daughter. Meanwhile, the father’s income will be passed on to the son.

    In the past, this would then make women in Minang have power, but now, low incomes have contributed little to changes in modern social life. Even so, inheritance continues to be passed down to the mother’s line and the mother is still the head of the family.

    The groom will generally be given to the bride from a female family member, who will escort him to the bride’s house. Overall power and authority would be divided equally between men and women, with women ruling the house, while men had spiritual and political roles. Both parties believed that this would make them equal.

    Women in Minang have the right and power to choose a man to be made the chief of the tribe, then remove him from that position if it is felt that he is not the right person to be made the chief of the tribe.

    2. Will

    The Akan people are a multi-ethnic group in Ghana, where everything is governed according to matrilineal custom. In Ghana men are often the leaders of the tribe, while their power stems from the matrilineal line.

    The men will not only help their own families, but also the families of the women. In general, women in Ghana will carry out many rituals and ceremonies, such as funerals, making food, as well as various house rules.

    3. Mosoo

    Mosuo China is a tribe that lives at the foot of the Himalayas. Mosuo is one of the most well-known examples of a society with matrilineal customs. They even have a tradition of “walking marriage” where women then have the right to choose their partner by walking directly to the house of the man they choose.

    In this tribe the woman is entitled to more than one man and undergoes more than one marriage. Their offspring will later bear the last name and live with their mother, while the male may or may not be involved in raising the child.

    4. Bribri

    Located in northern Panama and Costa Rica, Bribri adheres to a matrilineal custom in which women inherit land and create a large family. The children who will enter the family of their mother and a grandmother are then seen as bearers of tradition and a source of knowledge.

    While men with important roles are not allowed to impart knowledge or give jobs to their sons, only the sons of their sisters.

    The women then have the right to prepare cocoa for the sacred Bribri ritual as one of the most important things in a tribe.

    5. Garo

    Garo is an indigenous tribe in Bangladesh and India. The Garo gave their tribal name after their mother, with the youngest daughter to be heir to all of the mother’s property. Adhering to the matrilineal custom, the women from Garo hold power and will be given the right to rule in the house.

    6. Tuaregs

    The Tuareg consist of a Berber people who have a nomadic lifestyle in the Sahara desert area. In social life, the women of the Tuareg will then have a high status and every tribe within it will be gathered together so that everyone can listen to the women who write and read.

    While the men will raise animals. Most of the property and livestock will be owned by women, while private property will be inherited regardless of gender. Although the majority of them adhere to Islam, the Tuareg ethnicity is also influenced by several other cultures, one of which is matrilineal.

    Matrilineal Related Books

    1. Chinese Padang people – Dima the Earth is stepped on, Disinan Langik is upheld

    There are two kongsi that are the pillars of Chinese society – the gedang and kecik kongsi, the temple as a moral binder and guardian of civilization, as well as close interaction with the Minang community based on a common language. As a result of this adaptation process, their culture now appears with mixed Chinese and Minang characteristics or is experiencing cultural hybridity.

    2. Cultural Communication Understanding Interhuman and Intercultural Communication

    Intercultural communication is the process of exchanging thoughts and meanings between people of different cultures. When communication occurs between people of different nationalities, racial groups or language communities, the communication is called intercultural communication (hereinafter referred to as KAB).

    So basically intercultural communication examines how culture influences communication activities, what are the meanings of verbal and nonverbal messages according to the cultures concerned, what is appropriate to be communicated, when to communicate it, and how to communicate it verbally and nonverbally.

    3. Intercultural Communication in the Age of Cyber ​​Culture

    The development and growth of the internet today has changed the face of the world. There are many things that have changed. Things that were previously limited by geographic conditions and terrain are now slowly fading away, making the exchange of information take place continuously all the time.

    But on the other hand, this condition also blurs the boundaries between cultures, changes the way of communicating between cultures, and directly or indirectly creates a mixture of cultures.

    Now we know that matrilineal is a system of kinship and culture or custom which is still carried out by several tribes in the world, including the Minang tribe in Indonesia. Sinaumed’s can read books related to culture on sinaumedia.com so they can understand it better. As #FriendsWithoutLimits, sinaumedia always provides the best products so you have #MoreWithReading information.

  • Material Simple Future Tense – Definition, Formulas, Example Problems

    In the previous article, Eduteam has discussed the simple present tense and simple past tense material which includes definitions, formulas, and example questions. The next general form of tenses is the simple future tense, which is a tense that describes an event that will occur in the future. If You masters these three basic forms of tenses, it will be easier to learn other tenses which are variations of the three

    A. Definition of Simple Future Tense

    Simple future tense is a tense to describe an event that has not yet started and will occur in the future. Sentences in the simple future tense can be marked by using the words will, shall, and going to. The simple future tense is also used to express a prediction or desire.

    B. The Simple Future Tense formula

    In simple future tense sentences, the basic verb (V1) will be followed by the auxilary modal will or the phrasal modal be going to. Take a look at the following form of the simple future tense formula:

    C. Adverb of Time

    Adverbs of time are very important to know so that You can determine which tenses the sentence uses. The following is a description of the time that is generally used in the simple future tense:

    Tomorrow : tomorrow

    Later : later

    Next week : next week

    Next month : next month

    Next year : next year

    soon : immediately

    Tonight : tonight

    By and by: Soon

    The day after tomorrow : The day after tomorrow

    It’s actually quite easy to remember the timestamp. The time of the event that “will happen” or “happens later” is a future tense sentence. For example, in this morning, in this evening, in this afternoon can be used as a description of the future tense if the context of that time has not happened and will happen. You can learn this more easily through the book The 1st Students Choice Changing Times Changing Tenses.

    D. Use of the Simple Future Tense

    1. Declare an event that will occur in the future.

    2. Declare something that has been decided to do.

    3. Declare an offer/request/invitation to other people.

    4. Declare a decision to do something without a plan.

    5. Expressing an emotion or feeling.

    E. The difference between Will, Shall, and Going to

    Broadly speaking, the words will, shall, and going to have the same meaning, which means “will”. However, in some circumstances the word can also have different meanings based on the context.

    Will/Shall

    Will is used for the subjects I, You, We, They, He, She and It

    Shall is used for the subject I, We

    Expresses a desire and an unwillingness (definite possibility)

    Stating a fact or general truth

    Stating a promise or offering yourself spontaneously

    going to

    Can be used for subjects I, You, We, They, He, She, and It

    Using to be am/is/are after the subject, for example: I am going to…, She is going to…

    Expressing a desire but only limited to the intention

    F. Simple Future Tense Practice Questions

    Lia : … to Surabaya?

    Hana : Next month

    a. When do you move

    b. When will you move

    c. Where are you going to move

    d. Will you move

    Discussion :

    The correct interrogative sentence is When will you move because Hana’s answer next moth which means next month shows that the dialogue above uses the simple future tense.

    Iga : The car won’t start, Mom. I think it’s broken.

    Ms. X : Don’t worry. The mechanics… it soon.

    a. has fixed

    b. will fix

    c. fixed

    d. have fixed

    Discussion :

    Ms. X answered using the time description soon, which means later/as soon as possible. Soon is an adverb of time used in the simple future tense.

    You … (be) able to drive after another five lessons

    a. are being

    b. is be

    c. shall be

    d. will be

    d. well being

    Discussion :

    In the sentence there is an adverb “after” which means “after”, but the form of the sentence used is not past, meaning it is a plan.

    Ardi : When … you go there?

    Bian : I think next week.

    a. did

    b. are

    c. will

    d. do

    Discussion:

    next week = next week, indicating that the sentence is asking for an action that will be carried out in the future (future tense), so the correct word is will.

    Nanda : This letter is in French, and I don’t speak a word in French. Can you help me?

    Lois: Sure, I … it’s for you.

    a. will translate

    b. am going to translate

    c. won’t translate

    d. am not going to translate

    Discussion :

    During the conversation, Lois offers her help in translating the letter Nanda received. Lois did it because she voluntarily wanted to do it, without her planning it first.

    How about You, now you understand how to learn the simple future tense. You can do similar questions at Sinaumedia.com. Have a good study!

  • Material Past Future Tense: Definition, Formulas, Usage, Example Sentences & Questions

    Before going into the discussion of the past future tense material , Sinaumedia would like to repeat a little about the simple past tense and simple future tense which form the tenses which we will discuss further. The simple past tense is used to talk about an event that happened in the past and ended in the past at a specific time.

    Sentences in the simple past tense are marked with a second verb (verb2) which shows the past tense. One of the characteristics of this sentence is the simple past tense is the use of verb 2 in the positive sentence.

    Well, for the simple future tense, it is a tense to explain an event that has not yet started and will occur in the future. Sentences in the simple future tense can be marked by using the words will, shall, and going to. The simple future tense is also used to express a prediction or desire.

    Definition of Past Future Tense

    Past future tense is a tense that describes events in the future from the perspective of the past. For example, I would come to Nina’s birthday. In would come, it describes an action (in the form of a promise to come) in the past that will occur in the future, namely Nina’s birthday.

    The past future tense can be used to express an event that will be carried out, make predictions and make promises in the future while in the past. The Book of Propositions 16 Tense Edition I by Polce Aryanto Bessies Ifoni Ludji Teresia Yanti summarizes the 16 tenses to make it easier for You to learn them.

    Past Future Tense formula

    Past future tense has two different forms. First, it is a past form of modals shall/will so that the use of the past future tense becomes should/would. The second is the past form of the auxiliary verb “be”, namely am, is, are, were, were, and going to. This book entitled The 1st Students Choice Changing Times Changing Tenses will help you in constructing the right sentence for a particular time.

    Notes:

    would+not can be shortened to wouldn’t, and should+not can be shortened to shouldn’t.

    Example of sentences:

    I would buy pizza for you
    I would not buy pizza for you
    would I buy pizza for you? (Shall I buy you pizza?)

    They were going to visit me
    They were not going to visit me > not going to here the context could be not so
    Were they going to visit me? (Will they visit me?)

    Each of the examples above has a context in the form of an action or intention that was carried out in the past for future events.

    Use of Past Future Tense

    1. Declare an event that will occur at a time that will have occurred in the past.
    Example:
    I should go to Semarang last year (I will go to Semarang last year)

    2. Declare an event, action, and deed that becomes a habit.
    Example:
    I would sit here for a long time

    3. Declare an event, action, and deed that becomes a must.
    Example:
    We should obey the rules

    Understanding this verb itself is not easy and requires constant memory and practice. For You who want to learn and memorize verbs in tenses, you can read the Complete New Phrasal Verb Dictionary (English-Indonesia) which provides verbs for each word and also its translation.

    Time Signal

    The way to find out which sentence is being discussed uses which tenses, can be identified by looking at the context and the time information used. Usually the past future tense uses the following time information:

    Yesterday : Yesterday

    Last week : Last week

    Last month : Last month

    Last year : Last year

    The next day : The next day

    The day before : Before today

    The week before : The week before

    The month before : The month before

    Examples of Sentences Past Future Tense

    You would meet him if you knew about him

    They were not going to go to the party

    I thought that he would forgive you for making a mistakes (I thought that he would forgive you for your mistakes)

    I already told her that when she arrived, we would watch a movie together

    I knew he would make a dinner

    He told me he was going to Manila

    I would not be angry if you say the truth

    Were they going to pick me up? (Will they pick me up)

    Would your mom believe you? (Will your mother believe you?)

    Dina would finish her study in an hour

    Examples of Past Future Tense Questions

    1. i … came late to your party tonight

    A. will

    B. would

    C.am

    D. was

    Discussion: to your party tonight is a sentence that will occur in the future, while the context of the conversation is in the past. So the word used is would because I predicts that he will arrive late.

    2. Jasmine … going to give you a present

    A.is

    B. has

    C. was

    D were

    Discussion: The sentence is in the context of the past future tense. Jasmine is the subject she uses to be “was. So the answer is C.

    3. My dad told me that he would … on time

    A. come

    B. came

    C. comes

    D. comed

    Discussion: Past future tense uses the formula S + would/should + V1 , from the multiple choices above the one that fits the formula is A.

    4. Dani told me that he was going to … pizza

    A. bought

    B. bought

    C. buy

    D. buys

    Discussion: there are 2 formulas in the past future tense, besides S + would/should + V1 , you can also use S + was/were + going to + V1, from the multiple choices above the one that fits the formula is C.

    5. My Mom … me a cake

    A. were going to buy

    B. will be going to buy

    C. would buy

    D. would buy

    Discussion: based on multiple choice, the correct sentence to complete it is would buy because in the past future tense the sentence structure is S + should/would + V1. While the other options are not in accordance with any tenses sentence patterns.

  • Material Future Perfect Tense: Definition, Formulas, Example Sentences and Questions

    Definition of Future Perfect Tense

    Future Perfect Tense is a sentence that functions to express an event that was started in the past and will be completed in the future. The use of the future perfect tense is to include a clear time in the future. For example in the form of hours, next day, etc. This is to provide clarity that the event will be completed before another event occurs.

    When to use the future perfect tense? The answer is when you want to state something that will be done or done in the past and will be completed in the future.

    The tenses in English vary greatly according to the time of delivery which you can all learn in the book Definitely Can! English Communicative Teaching 12 Tenses Grammar Materials.

    Future Perfect Tense formula

    Basically the main formula of the future perfect tense in a positive form is subject + will + have + verb-3 + complement. Meanwhile, in the negative form, subject + will + not + have + verb-3 + complement. Whereas in the form of an interrogative sentence it becomes will + subject + + have + verb-3 + complement?

    However, as in the present perfect tense and simple present tense , the English Academy will divide the formula for the future perfect tenses into nominal sentence types and verbal sentences. So, you can see the further discussion below.

    Verbal Formulas

    The verbal formula in the future perfect tense is in the positive form ( subject + will + have + verb-3 + complement), in the negative form ( subject + will + not+ have + verb-3 + complement ), in the form of questions ( will + subject + + have + verb-3 + complement? ). To make it easier to understand the verbal formula in the future perfect tense, you can see the example below.

    (+) I will have graduated when we meet next year
    (-) I will have not taken the exam
    (?) Will he have done it by this evening? (Has he been going to finish it this afternoon?)

    (+) I will have watched the film The Batman (I will have watched the film The Batman )
    (-) I will not have watched the film The Batman (I will not have watched the film The Batman )
    (?) Will he have watched the film The Batman (Has he been going to watch The Batman movie yet ?)

    Nominal Formula

    Nominal formulas in future perfect tense sentences in the form of positive sentences ( subject + will + have + been + complement ), negative sentences ( subject + will + not+ have + been + complement ), and interrogative sentences or sentences ( will + subject + have + been + complement? ).

    (+) I will have been at your house when the party starts
    (-) I will have not been there by this evening
    (?) Will you have been here tonight? (Will you be here tonight?)

    Characteristics of the Future Perfect Tense

    After discussing the formula of the future perfect tense, the next discussion is its characteristics.

    • The future perfect tense in the form of a nominal sentence after have will have a third verb from “be”, namely been . Therefore, in this sentence formula, do not use regular or irregular verbs which function to provide a clear explanation of an action or event.
    • In the verbal sentence formula, the writing of the verb is changed to a third verb by adding an additional affix, namely “ed”. The prefix “ed” is placed at the end of the verb in the sentence.
    • In all subjects used in future perfect tense sentences, use have, whether it’s a singular or plural subject. As for singular subjects, such as (I, she, he, and it) and plural subjects, such as (you, we, and they).

    Future Perfect Tense function

    The future perfect tense has the function of talking about or discussing an event or events that have occurred in the future. Therefore, when using this tense, it is as if we are thinking or imagining someone or ourselves in the future. In addition, this tense also talks about an action or event that will be completed at a time after now. In simple terms, the future perfect tense functions to express time expressions relating to the future.

    How to Make Future Perfect Tense

    The Future Perfect tense can be said to be tricky because we need to pay attention to the third verb of the verb (verb). In addition, sentence structure also needs to be considered, such as positive sentences, negative sentences using “not”, and use in interrogative sentences. Here’s how to make future perfect tense sentences.

    1. Must see the formula, want to use the verbal formula or nominal formula

    2. Follow the structure of each formula (verbal or nominal)

    3. Notice the use of the verb in the third verb form

    Time Description Future Perfect Tense

    by next … : ahead of … ahead
    by next week : ahead of next week
    by Sunday : ahead of Sunday
    by tomorrow : ahead of tomorrow
    by next month : ahead of next month

    The use of tenses to describe adverbs of time is very important, such as the use of adverbs of time above as adverbs of time in the future tense. You can learn this more easily through the book The 1st Students Choice Changing Times Changing Tenses.

    Examples of Future Perfect Tense Sentenes

    I will not have graduated next May
    The work will not have been finished next month
    I will not have been at your house tomorrow tomorrow)
    Will you have graduated next May? (Have you graduated next May?)
    Rina will have done her home work (
    Rina will have left at 9 pm)
    He will have posted 100 images next week (He will publish 100 pictures next week)

    Examples of Future Perfect Tense Questions

    Problem 1

    She … the meeting room by 12 ‘oclock.

    A. will have left

    B. will left

    C. is leaving

    D. was left

    Discussion: The question contains specific time information, namely 12 o’clock, so the sentence can use the future perfect tense with the formula S + will + have + V3. So the answer is A .

    Problem 2

    They … their study by evening

    A. finished

    B. will have finished

    C. will have finished

    D. are finishing

    Discussion: The question contains a specific time statement, namely by evening, so the sentence can use the future perfect tense with the formula S + will + have + V3. So the answer is B .

    Problem 3

    Will we … it tomorrow?

    A. do

    B. did

    C. are doing

    D. have done

    Discussion: The question contains a specific time statement, namely tomorrow, so the sentence can use the future perfect tense with the formula will + S + have + V3. So the answer is D .

    Problem 4

    I will … when we meet next year.

    A. graduates

    B. graduate

    C. have graduated

    D. graduates

    Discussion: The question contains specific time information, namely next year, so the sentence can use the future perfect tense with the formula S + will + have + V3. So the answer is C.

    Problem 5

    Will my mom…?

    A. slept

    B. sleep

    C. have slept

    D. will sleep

    Discussion: The interrogative sentence of the future perfect tense is will + S + have + V3. So the answer is C .

    It should be underlined, the future perfect tense has little resemblance to the simple future tense. However, if the sentence whose context is the future perfect tense, then use a specific adverb of time.

  • Mass Communication: Definition, Functions, and Characteristics

    Mass Communication – Mass communication is communication addressed to a wide audience or the general public with heterogeneous nature of communication. Mass communication can occur by using a variety of mass media as a suggestion to support this communication.

    The mass media used in mass communication can also be in the form of audio, audio visual, print media or outdoor media. What is mass communication? The following is an explanation of the meaning, function and characteristics of mass communication. Check out this article to the end to find out more!

    Understanding Mass Communication According to Experts

    In order for Sinaumed’s to know and understand about mass communication, Sinaumed’s must first know the meaning of mass communication. The following is the definition of mass communication according to experts.

    1. John R Bittner
      Bittner revealed that mass communication is a message that can be communicated or conveyed through the mass media to a large number of people at once.
    2. Gerbner
      Mass communication according to Gerbner is the production and distribution that has a foundation on an institutional technology through the flow of messages that have a continuity or continuity. Gerbner also argued that mass communication can produce a product in the form of a communication message. The product of this mass communication will be disseminated to a wide audience continuously at regular intervals, for example, every week or every month.
    3. Maletzke
      Maletzke argues that mass communication is a form of communication that can convey statements openly through technical dissemination media, indirectly and has a one-way nature.
    4. Freidson
      Mass communication is defined by Freidson as communication aimed at a number of populations originating from various groups, mass communication according to Freidson does not only target one individual but several individuals at once.
      Friedson also argues that communication has the implicit assumption that there will be a special tool to be able to send messages so that they can arrive at the same time to everyone at once without having to represent only a few layers of society.
    5. Wright
      Mass communication according to Wright is a form of communication directed to a heterogeneous and anonymous wide audience. Messages conveyed through the mass media also have an open nature and the message is able to be received simultaneously to the general public.
    6. Pearce
      Pearce argues that mass communication is a process that occurs between an individual, a group of people or an organization that can create a message by transmitting it through several types of media to a large audience heterogeneously and anonymously.
    7. Jalaludin Rakhmat
      According to Jalaludin Rakhmat mass communication is one of the types of communication addressed to several audiences which is spread through print media, magazines, newspapers, electronics, television and radio. Because the message is conveyed through various media, the message can be received simultaneously and momentarily.
    8. Josep A Devito
      Mass communication is communication addressed to a large audience or large masses. According to Devito, mass communication can be carried out by several institutions through media such as television, radio, newspapers, films, books and magazines.
    9. Mass Communication According to Language
      In discussing, mass communication or mass communication is a process of delivering messages through mass media or communicating with the media. The term mass communication is an abbreviation derived from mass media communication. Mass media also stands for mass communication media.
      When viewed in more detail, the meaning of mass communication according to language is, message delivery communication, the media is the channel or means of conveying messages and the masses are the crowds or the public.
      From the notion of mass communication according to that language, Littlejohn argues that communication cannot be separated by any one person from the communication media and the process of mass communication, because according to Littlejohn only communication media is capable of connecting sources with audiences, both as individuals and as institutions in society. .

    According to the understanding of mass communication from several experts and according to the language, the notion of mass communication can be concluded, mass communication is a type of communication delivered to the general public using various mass media and carried out heterogeneously and anonymously.

     

     

    Characteristics of Mass Communication

    Hafied Cangara argues that mass communication is one type of communication that has a significant difference from other forms of communication. Mass communication has messages that are open to a wide variety of audiences, such as differences in terms of age, ethnicity, religion, occupation and needs.

    Having a significant difference with other types of communication, here are the characteristics of mass communication to distinguish it from other types of communication.

    1. Institutional communicators

    Mass communication has the characteristic of being a communicator in mass communication who can move in a complex organization but has an institutional nature. The mass communication message delivery agency conveys its message through various mass media, such as newspapers, the internet, radio, television, books, magazines and so on.

    2. The message conveyed has a general nature

    In contrast to the types of interpersonal or personal communication, messages conveyed through mass communication have a general nature. Thus, the message is not only addressed to one individual or several individuals and is not personal.

    Mass communication conveys a general message and is addressed to a broad general audience. Therefore, the process of mass communication is running openly. This can happen, because the communicants of mass communication are spread in various places, besides that the messages conveyed also contain news and have elements of facts that are important and interesting to all levels of society from various walks of life.

    3. The communicants of mass communication are heterogeneous and anonymous

    From the understanding of mass communication according to experts, it can be seen that some experts argue that mass communication has one of the same characteristics, namely its communication is heterogeneous and anonymous. Communicators or recipients of information in mass communication are heterogeneous and anonymous.

    This is because, mass communication conveys messages from the communicator in a general way to the whole community or the general public, with varied community conditions and not knowing each other. Regardless of gender, age, customs, culture, race, social strata and others, mass communication messages are conveyed to the general public and openly.

    4. Has a unison nature

    According to Effendy, mass communication has the same characteristics. Mass communication is delivered to many people, the general public with a very large number of individuals and communicants over long distances. Messages conveyed using mass media simultaneously and quickly.

    5. The message conveyed is one-way

    The fifth characteristic of mass communication is that it is one-way. That is, mass communication occurs directly between the communicant and the communicator, but the communicator and communicant do not meet each other and cannot respond directly to the message conveyed. Is one-way, the communicator in mass communication who has control of the communication.

    6. Delayed feedback occurs or the feedback given is delayed

    This sixth characteristic of mass communication is related to the fifth characteristic. Because the communicant and communicator do not communicate directly and communication is one-way, the feedback will be delayed.

    Communicators and communicators in mass communication do not know the reaction of the general public when the message is conveyed. So there is feedback delayed in mass communication.

    In general, those are the six characteristics of mass communication. However, several experts also expressed opinions regarding the characteristics of mass communication. The following are the characteristics of mass communication according to experts.

     

     

    Characteristics of Mass Communication According to Experts

    According to experts such as William R. Rivers, McQuail and others, here are some of the characteristics of mass communication that distinguish mass communication from other types of communication.

    1. William R Rivers, et al

    The characteristics of mass communication according to RIvers et al are as follows:

    • Walk one way.
    • There is a process between media selection to select audiences as communicants.
    • Can reach a wide audience from various walks of life.
    • Aiming or targeting certain communicants with the segmentation desired by the communicator.
    • Carried out by a social institution such as the press and the media as well as the public influence each other and interact from mass communication.

    2. McCail

    According to McQuail, mass communication has five characteristics that distinguish it from other types of communication.

    • The source of communication is not only one person, but also involves a formal organization, the sender or sender of the message is often a professional communicator who is an expert in his field.
    • Messages conveyed through mass communication can be varied, easily predictable, can be processed, through standardization, reproduced and become commodity products that have valuable exchange values.
    • Recipients of mass communication messages are part of the wider audience.
    • Mass communication includes simultaneous contact between one sender and many message recipients.

    3. Michael W Gamble and Teri Kwal Gamble

    In 1986, both of them stated that mass communication has the following characteristics.

    • In mass communication, communicators can rely on modern equipment to be able to spread or transmit messages quickly to the general public and disseminated through the mass media.
    • Communicators in mass communication can spread messages with the intention of trying to get variety, understanding or attention from millions of people who do not know each other.
    • Messages conveyed through mass communication belong to the public. This means that the message is easy to obtain and can be received by anyone.
    • Communicators in mass communication are generally formal organizations such as organizations, certain group networks, associations and so on. The communicator also does not come from a person or individual, but from something that has a larger nature, such as an institution.
    • Mass communication is controlled by a number of people or referred to as gatekeepers to control a message before the message is disseminated to the general public. Gatekeepers can be someone who works as an editor or editor.
    • In mass communication, feedback has a delayed nature. The delayed feedback is caused because mass communication is conveyed through different mass media than other types of communication. Because, mass communication is not done directly.

    4. Elizabeth Noelle Neuman

    According to Neuman in 1983 in one of his books, there are four main characteristics of mass communication, along with their characteristics.

    • Mass communication has an indirect nature when the message is conveyed to the communicant.
    • Mass communication has one-way characteristics.
    • Mass communication has the characteristics of being open and the messages conveyed are not closed.
    • Mass communication has the characteristic of publics that are geographically dispersed anywhere.

    Mass Communication Function

    Mass communication does not exist only to achieve one goal, especially with the various evolutions that have occurred, mass communication has become an increasing role in social life. According to Wright, there are seven functions of mass communication, one of which is to offer insight into the role of humans or society in life. The following is the function of communication and its explanation.

    1. Supervision, mass communication has a supervisory function that becomes the eyes and ears of people who are looking for information about something. An example is the internet and newspapers which are now a means for every individual to seek important information, ranging from information about the weather, current issues and even gossip. Now, people rely more on mass communication to access information easily and quickly.
    2. Correlation, the function of correlation in mass communication means that the media presents facts that are used by society to move around the world. Information disseminated through mass communication is not objective and without bias.
    3. Sensationalization, according to the function of sensationalization in mass communication, means that the media prioritizes the most sensational messages to achieve passion from consumers.
    4. Entertainment, mass communication also has a function as entertainment, for example, mass communication that is spread through magazines, television, online news and others that provide various information or entertaining messages for the general public. The fourth function of mass communication is more pronounced than the other functions of mass communication. Especially when the internet began to develop and many communicants spread entertaining messages through various mass media that are easily accessible to the general public.
    5. Transmission or dissemination, mass communication using mass media has the function of being a ‘vehicle’ or means of transmission that helps convey cultural norms, rules, values ​​and customs. The mass media has an important role in the process of socialization and dissemination of information.
    6. Mobilization, the sixth function of mass communication is to mobilize people who have been in a period of crisis. An example is when an event occurs that befalls a city in a country. In this case, the mass media has a role to mobilize the general public to share in the experience or event so as to create a feeling that the event also happened to him because it happened in the country he lives in.
    7. Validation, the final function of mass communication is validation of the status and norms of certain individuals, organizations, movements and products. The validation of certain people and groups has a function to be able to uphold social norms. The mass media in mass communication can validate certain cultural norms while eliminating differences and variations from existing norms.

    The seven functions of mass communication make Mc Luhan and Fiore argue that mass communication needs to be reflected in the life of every society. Especially when the mass communication media is now growing.

    That is an explanation of what is mass communication? Starting from the understanding according to language and experts, the characteristics and functions of mass communication. Sinaumed’s can find out more about mass communication by reading books.

  • Masochist Is: Definition Along with Perspectives on Human Rights and Legislation in Indonesia

    Masochist Is – Today, many people don’t understand the definition of the term masochist, but often use it to make it look cool. But the truth is that this masochist is a form of sexual deviance, you know… and can even risk the death of his partner. Indirectly, the laws in our country have regulated that this masochist action is strictly prohibited because it violates the rules. So, what is a masochist? What is the perspective of human rights and law in Indonesia in viewing this masochist action? So, so that You understands these things, let’s look at the following review!

    What is a Masochist?

    The term “masochist” originally came from the name of an Austrian writer in the 19th century, namely Leopold von Sacher-Masoch. In the novels he wrote, it is quite common to mention characters who have an obsession with the combination of sex and pain. That is what underlies the definition of a masochist, namely a person’s disorder where a person will feel passionate if he is hurt or even humiliated (verbally) by his partner. In a broader sense, this masochist refers to an experience of receiving pleasure or satisfaction from painful suffering.

    Not many people know that this masochist belongs to the paraphilia section, which is a disorder related to impulses, behavior, and the desire to generate strong sexual arousal through deviant sexual behavior. Often, this sexual disorder is associated with sadistic behavior, because the perpetrator will indeed do sadistic things during sexual intercourse to get sexual satisfaction, on a reciprocal basis. In a sense, the perpetrators of sadism will get sexual arousal satisfaction through efforts to hurt their partners, while their partners will also feel satisfied after they have been hurt or humiliated (verbally).

    It should be noted that this masochistic activity can lead to death. Of all the activities of masochism, the most dangerous is hypoxyphilia. In this hypoxophilic activity, the patient will be sexually aroused by the lack of oxygen consumption. Starting with using plastic bags, rope snares, to chemicals that can suppress the chest so that breathing will be disturbed and cause death.

    Since this masochistic actor likes painful things to gain sexual satisfaction, he will also do things that most people rarely do. For example by tying or hurting himself when he was having sex fantasies or masturbating. Meanwhile, if the masochist is going to have sex, he will ask his partner to tie him up, close his eyes, and whip him to make him more aroused. This masochist is referred to as a sexual disorder that turns out to occur from childhood to adolescence and is usually experienced by women.

    The hallmark of a masochist is to hurt himself. Related to this, masochism is divided into 2 things, namely moral masochists and eros masochists. This moral masochist refers to someone who has an unconscious pleasure when someone hurts his feelings. When her feelings are hurt, of course she will cry and look sad, but that sadness actually makes her feel “happy”. Meanwhile, masochist eros deals with things that are physical in nature and not only in sexual activity.

    Masochist Becomes a Life-Threatening Sexual Disorder

    For You , who is old enough and has seen the film Fifty Shades of Gray , he must be aware that the film shows a sexual disorder in the form of masochism. Since this sexual disorder is often used as a theme in a film, surely many will consider it understandable. When in fact, when viewed from a psychological perspective, this sexual disorder can be very dangerous and can even be life threatening, both for himself and his sexual partner.

    This masochistic behavior often manifests his sexual fantasies by injuring himself. So that not infrequently, he will cut his skin or burn himself in order to get sexual satisfaction. Indeed, often perpetrators realize that their sexual fantasies only apply in an effort to “play a role” when they are having sexual intercourse. However, it is not uncommon for the hardness to level up to the stage of autocortic asphyxiation.

    Just a little trivia , this autoorotic asphyxiation is a subtype of sexual masochism, in which the culprit deliberately suffocates or suffocates himself. Usually, masochists at this level of asphyxia will wrap their heads in plastic until they run out of oxygen. Then, there were also those who wrapped ropes around their necks so that they suffocated. This of course can cause a lack or depletion of the supply of oxygen from within the body so that it becomes difficult to breathe and dies.

    Masochist in the Perspective of Human Rights and Criminal Law in Indonesia

    According to a research article written by Inna Fauziatal Ngazizah and Maria Ulfa Fatmawati with the title Sadomasochism in Indonesia Perspective on Human Rights and Criminal Law, it states that in fact masochist actions which are included in the form of sadomasochism have included actions that are prohibited by criminal law as well as violating human rights. This research was conducted using the field observation method, then analyzed using the description-analysis method.

    Does You know what sadomasochism is? This sadomasochism is cruel, vicious, or violent behavior that actually gives sexual satisfaction to the perpetrator. So, it can be said that sexual satisfaction will be obtained by hurting or being hurt by the person he loves, both physically and spiritually. This action actually becomes a form of mental disorder , you know… which makes the sufferer will get satisfaction when hurting or being hurt by other parties. If based on the term, this sadomasochism comes from two meanings namely “sadism” and “masochism”. Sadism itself is a form of sexual deviation by obtaining satisfaction, through the torture givento partner. Meanwhile, masochism is a form of sexual satisfaction he receives from his partner.

    In Islam, scholars have agreed to prohibit marital relations with all forms of violence. The thing that is needed is how to create a relationship that upholds equality based on respect and affection. Well, the opinion of these scholars is also almost in line with Law Number 23 of 2004 Article 5 which states that “Everyone is prohibited from committing domestic violence against people within the scope of his household in four ways. The first is physical violence in the form of beatings, pinching, grabbing, collisions and so on. The second is psychological violence, such as body shaming, insults, reproaches, harsh words. The third is sexual violence. Fourth is home abandonment, such as leaving home without information on the causes and reasons.”

    In this study, sources were taken from research that had previously been conducted with the title “Sexual Deviations in Husband and Wife Relationships Perspective of Islamic Law and Law Number 23 of 2004 Concerning Domestic Violence (KDRT)”by Mawardi. In the previous journal, it also discussed sexual deviations in husband and wife relations from the perspective of Islamic law and Law no. 23 of 2004, here only explains that the form of sexual deviation in a husband and wife relationship is in the form of sexual sadism and sexual intercourse in the wife’s rectum which is usually carried out by homosexual couples. This is in Article 8 Letter A of Law no. 23 of 2004 including acts of domestic violence (KDRT) and in Islam it is not allowed because this causes harm, persecution, and is not in accordance with Islamic religious teachings and is contrary to the goals of Islam, namely Rahmatan lil alamin which means to bring mercy to the universe .

    Yep, the existence of this sadism and masochist is a form of sexual fantasy that involves torture in sexual intercourse. For sufferers of this masochist, they will be satisfied with their partner’s torture, from being whipped to dripping with hot wax. Therefore, the couple of a sadistic and masochist must in practice give and receive pain to each other to stimulate their sexual libido. In fact, not infrequently, this couple will exchange roles between sadistic and masochist when having sex.

    The masochist action that deserves attention from HAM is hypoxophilia. Hypoxyphilia is sexual arousal by experiencing limited oxygen with the media of ropes, plastic bags, chest compressions which can reduce oxygen levels for some time (Noermala Sari, 2006: 625). Masochism traits have the same form as sadistic traits.

    Factors that cause masochist behavior are parental behavior, guilt and a deep sense of love for their partners. Parental behavior arises during childhood when their parents hit them in the erogenous area and get satisfaction because of that treatment. Thus causing the incident to occur repeatedly. A person’s guilt towards his partner will make him try hard to get his partner’s forgiveness even though he gets a sense of suffering. A deep sense of love is the beginning of masochist behavior to get pleasure in sexual activity.

    This act of sadomasochism becomes a form of violence in a relationship between two people in their relationship. It was recorded that there had been a lot of violence in the household until 2018, namely around 1046 cases of complaints. This number increases every year and around 22 cases are sexual violence, with the following description:

    • The victim was forced to carry out sexual activities using an intermediary tool. Threats are made by the partner if they don’t follow their wishes.
    • The victim experienced bleeding from her genitals because her partner used objects or accessories on her genitals.
    • The victim was forced to have sexual intercourse with a partner who had a venereal disease.
    • The victim was forced to have an unusual relationship. The unusual relationship meant that one of the partners had a tendency to sexual deviation before having intercourse, such as being beaten first.
    • The victim experienced torture in sexual intercourse.

    The cases of violence described above are of concern from the aspect of protection which is still lacking because almost every day cases of domestic violence still occur. Even though Article 28 G paragraph (1) of the second amendment of the 1945 Constitution states that: “Everyone has the right to protection of himself/herself, family, honor, dignity and property under his control, and has the right to feel safe and protected from threats of fear to do or not doing something that is a human right”

    The Criminal Code outlines that abuse and violence perpetrated by men against women in a relationship has an element of greater sanction when compared to the usual criminal acts of abuse that have no legal relationship, as described in articles 351 to 355 of the Criminal Code. The forms of violence referred to in the law are:

    1. Physical violence, directly in the form of beatings, scrapes to destruction, sexual violence and direct physical violence.
    2. Psychological violence, acts that result in fear, a feeling of helplessness and self-doubt.
    3. Sexual violence, acts in the form of coercion of sexual intercourse, coercion of unnatural relations.

    The form above becomes part of the character of sadomasochism. Violence committed or received by one of the spouses can basically be criminalized if the act is unwanted or disliked by society. The benchmark is an act committed to bring victims or aggrieved parties. Physical violence becomes more problematic if the victim of violence cannot show physical evidence of the violence committed by their partner.

  • Masochism Is: Definition, Symptoms, Causes, and Treatment

    Masochist Is – Today, the term masochist is often used in various discussions both orally and in writing. Not infrequently, this term is heralded as something great, but in fact it is not like that. There are also many people who don’t understand the definition of the term masochist, so they often use it to make it look cool. But the truth is that this masochist is a form of sexual deviance, you know… and can even risk the death of his partner. So what is a masochist then? What are the symptoms and causes of masochism in a person? How do you overcome a masochist in someone? So, so that You understands these things, let’s look at the following review!

    What is a Masochist?

    The term “masochist” originally came from the name of an Austrian writer in the 19th century, namely Leopold von Sacher-Masoch. In the novels he wrote, it is quite common to mention characters who have an obsession with the combination of sex and pain. That is what underlies the definition of a masochist, namely a person’s disorder where a person will feel passionate if he is hurt or even humiliated (verbally) by his partner. In a broader sense, this masochist refers to an experience of receiving pleasure or satisfaction from painful suffering.

    Not many people know that this masochist belongs to the paraphilia section, which is a disorder related to impulses, behavior, and the desire to generate strong sexual arousal through deviant sexual behavior. Often, this sexual disorder is associated with sadistic behavior, because the perpetrator will indeed do sadistic things during sexual intercourse to get sexual satisfaction, on a reciprocal basis. In a sense, the perpetrators of sadism will get sexual arousal satisfaction through efforts to hurt their partners, while their partners will also feel satisfied after they have been hurt or humiliated (verbally).

    It should be noted that this masochistic activity can lead to death. Of all the activities of masochism, the most dangerous is hypoxyphilia. In this hypoxophilic activity, the patient will be sexually aroused by the lack of oxygen consumption. Starting with using plastic bags, rope snares, to chemicals that can suppress the chest so that breathing will be disturbed and cause death.

    Since this masochistic actor likes painful things to gain sexual satisfaction, he will also do things that most people rarely do. For example by tying or hurting himself when he was having sex fantasies or masturbating. Meanwhile, if the masochist is going to have sex, he will ask his partner to tie him up, close his eyes, and whip him to make him more aroused. This masochist is referred to as a sexual disorder that turns out to occur from childhood to adolescence and is usually experienced by women.

    The hallmark of a masochist is to hurt himself. Related to this, masochism is divided into 2 things, namely moral masochists and eros masochists. This moral masochist refers to someone who has an unconscious pleasure when someone hurts his feelings. When her feelings are hurt, of course she will cry and look sad, but that sadness actually makes her feel “happy”. Meanwhile, masochist eros deals with things that are physical in nature and not only in sexual activity.

    Symptoms of a Masochist

    Reporting from Doktersehat.com , someone who has this masochist causes symptoms in the form of:

    • Having intense and recurring sexual fantasies, usually 6 months old. Starting from the act of being beaten, tied up, humiliated (orally), or made to suffer as much as possible.
    • Having significant sexual disorders can actually cause problems in various areas of life, both social and work.

    Things That Lead to Masochists

    Actually, there is no underlying theory about what causes a masochist in a person. However, there are several theories that “try” to explain that masochistic activity is included in sexual paraphilia in general.

    1. Trauma

    Trauma that is felt by someone, especially during childhood, will really make an impression until he becomes an adult. Based on psychoanalysis, trauma experienced in childhood, especially due to sexual abuse, will greatly trigger this masochist when he grows up later. Now, over time, this painful experience tends to make it a sexual deviation, so that he will really enjoy the pain from the trauma he experienced.

    2. Environmental Factors

    Sexual disorders are also strongly influenced by environmental factors, you know! Yep, how the condition of the surrounding environment will greatly affect how one’s mindset, behavior, lifestyle, to sexual tendencies from within a person. The closest environmental factor is the family, especially those who often commit violence, which can make them a masochist.

    3. Sexual Violence

    Previously, it has been explained at a glance that an environment that often commits violence against it, can make it a masochistic sufferer. This violence does not only have to be about sexual violence, but also physical violence. Although in fact, this cannot be confirmed clearly, bad experiences or trauma caused by sexual violence can make him a masochistic person.

    4. Runaway

    Reporting fromdoksehat.com , there is a theory that suggests that sadomasochistic behavior, aka sexual activity that enjoys torturing their partner, is a form of escape. Through his sexual fantasies, the masochist will experience new things that are different from before.

    5. Sexual Fantasy

    This masochistic behavior initially occurred because he had forbidden sexual fantasies, so his passion would be stronger when “suppressed”. Therefore, when he is having sex, he will become more aroused in a state of stress.

    Treatment for Masochist Actors

    Unfortunately, someone who has masochistic behavior in him, rarely seeks professional help. In fact, this sexual disorder can be treated with psychotherapy and drugs, especially to reduce sexual arousal.

    Psychotherapy

    The first way to treat people with masochism is with psychotherapy, which can aim to reveal and overcome what are the causes of this behavior. Usually, the form is in the form of cognitive therapy which includes correcting disturbed thought patterns to practicing empathy.

    In cognitive therapy, which is in the form of correcting this disturbed mindset, it is intended to improve the beliefs of the masochist about anything that can trigger these actions. While in cognitive therapy in the form of empathy training, it is intended to help masochistic actors take the point of view of their victims. This is so that he can also understand the potential dangers that can occur later.

    Drugs

    Usually, the drugs used are testosterone-lowering drugs which are very useful in terms of reducing the frequency of erections. Then there are also antidepressant drugs that are useful to reduce sexual desire. However, please note that these drugs can only be obtained through a doctor’s prescription.

    Masochist Becomes a Life-Threatening Sexual Disorder

    For You , who is old enough and has seen the film Fifty Shades of Gray , he must be aware that the film shows a sexual disorder in the form of masochism. Since this sexual disorder is often used as a theme in a film, surely many will consider it understandable. When in fact, when viewed from a psychological perspective, this sexual disorder can be very dangerous and can even be life threatening, both for himself and his sexual partner.

    This masochistic behavior often manifests his sexual fantasies by injuring himself. So that not infrequently, he will cut his skin or burn himself in order to get sexual satisfaction. Indeed, often perpetrators realize that their sexual fantasies only apply in an effort to “play a role” when they are having sexual intercourse. However, it is not uncommon for the hardness to level up to the stage of autocortic asphyxiation.

    Just a little trivia, this autoorotic asphyxiation is a subtype of sexual masochism, in which the culprit deliberately suffocates or suffocates himself. Usually, masochists at this level of asphyxia will wrap their heads in plastic until they run out of oxygen. Then, there were also those who wrapped ropes around their necks so that they suffocated. This of course can cause a lack or depletion of the supply of oxygen from within the body so that it becomes difficult to breathe and dies.

    So, that’s a review of what masochists are often talked about by adults today. This knowledge is included in sex education , but you have to be old enough to learn it…

  • Marketing Mix: Definition, Origins, Concepts, Purpose, Functions, and Benefits

    Lately the term marketing mix is ​​increasingly being heard in everyday life. You may have heard about it in seminars, television, or on social media. Marketing mix is ​​one of the terms familiar to business people.

    Marketing mix can be defined as a marketing strategy that combines several elements in an integrated manner to achieve a targeted market marketing objective. An expert named Buchari Alma interprets marketing mix as a form of strategy in combining various kinds of marketing activities to create a maximum combination, so that the most satisfying results will appear.

    Marketing mix or what is known in Indonesian as the marketing mix is ​​the foundation of the basic model of a business. This term was first introduced by a Harvard marketing professor named Neil Borden in 1948 who was inspired by the journal of his colleague, Prof. James Culliton.

    One of the most widely known developments in the marketing mix concept is the 7P marketing mix . This concept was introduced by Booms and Bitner which contains four 4P elements plus three new elements, namely physical evidence, people , and process . The marketing mix concept can not only be used to promote old businesses, but also to develop new businesses.

    The following is a summary of the history, understanding, concepts, goals, functions, and benefits obtained from the marketing mix , quoted from the Maxmanroe and Bachelor of Economics pages , Tuesday (14/6/2022).

    Definition of Marketing Mix

    The term marketing mix was first used by Neil Borden (1964) who was inspired by the ideas of James Cullington (1948). The idea is that a business executive acts as a mixer of ingredients . Borden (1964) compiled a list of marketing mix elements consisting of 12 aspects. The list was then simplified and popularized by Jerome McCarthy (1968) into four main aspects, namely product, price, place and promotion, which became known as the 4Ps.

    Criticism of the 4Ps has prompted a number of marketing experts to propose a new marketing mix model, including the 7P Service Marketing Mix model (Booms and Bitner, 1981) and the holistic marketing mix model (Kotler and Keller, 2006).

    Until now, the 4P model is still the most popular and a key element in most of the marketing literature. The marketing manager will take an approach depending on the industry and target marketing plan.

    Marketing mix or what is known in Indonesian as the marketing mix is ​​the foundation of the basic model of a business. Marketing mix can be defined as a marketing strategy that combines several elements in an integrated manner to achieve a targeted market marketing objective.

    The Origins of the Marketing Mix

    In 1948, Professor James Culliton of Harvard Business School wrote an article entitled The Management of Marketing Costs. Cullington asserts that a business executive is:

    Decider,” an “artist”—a “mixer of ingredients,” who sometimes follows a recipe prepared by others, sometimes prepares his own recipe as he goes along, sometimes adapts a recipe to the ingredients immediately available, and sometimes experiments with or incest ingredients no one else has tried” (Cullington, 1948).

    A business executive is said to be a mixer of ingredients , who sometimes follows other people’s recipes, sometimes prepares his own recipe, sometimes adapts the recipe to the ingredients available, and sometimes experiments with or finds ingredients that have never been tried.

    Neil Borden was captivated by this idea and then adapted it in the context of a marketing executive as a mixer of ingredients who must always be creative in managing a mix of marketing procedures and policies in order to generate profits for the company.

    In his article entitled The Concept of the Marketing Mix , published in 1964, Borden compiled a list of the elements of the marketing mix consisting of 12 aspects, namely:

    • Product Planning.
    • Pricing.
    • Branding.
    • Channels of Distribution.
    • Personal Selling.
    • Advertising.
    • Promotions.
    • Packaging.
    • Displays.
    • servicing.
    • Physical Handling.
    • Fact Finding and Analysis.

    Marketing Mix concept

    1. Marketing Mix 4P

    The 4P model was popularized by Jerome McCarthy (1968) who put forward four elements of the marketing mix including product, price, promotion, and place ( distribution ).

    a. Place

    Place in the marketing mix is ​​basically a form of distribution channel that refers to the location of a product available and can be sold and purchased. Distribution channels in the marketing mix include product completeness, location, inventory, storage facilities, distribution and transportation.

    This concept focuses on the place or location of your company. The more strategic your business location, the greater the profit the company will get. With a strategic location, consumers or potential customers can more easily find and reach your business, so that sales transactions occur more easily.

    How to determine the exact location? What you can do is find and determine sales locations that suit your target market, whether it’s for the bottom, middle, or up .

    b. Product

    A product is something that has functional value and can be used by the customer to achieve something. Products in the marketing mix include variety, quality, design, features, brand name, packaging, size, service, warranty, and returns.

    In theory, products are all forms of business results offered to the market for use or consumption, so that they can meet the needs and desires of society. If you want to be successful in carrying out a marketing mix strategy , you must be able to create and produce a product or service with its own quality and uniqueness.

    That way, your product or service can automatically increase your competitiveness in the market. Products have two elements that need attention, namely quality and visuals. You have to ensure the quality of your product properly. Apart from that, consumers must also feel the need to buy your product or service, not just being interested.

    An easy way that you can do is to determine your target market through a small, structured research. Research conducted on the marketing mix strategy can include information on market response, consumer desires, and so on. Through the information we get from research, we can compare your product/service with competitors, find out the advantages and disadvantages of your product.

    After that, you can carry out evaluations to improve the quality of your products and services, match products with the wants and needs of consumers, and provide an overview of product prospects in the future.

    c. Promotions

    Promotion in the marketing mix is ​​a strategy implemented by marketers to make customers aware of the existence of their product or brand. Sales promotion includes advertising, personal selling, public relations, and direct marketing.

    This marketing mix strategy focuses on business promotion issues, such as how to market products, what media to use, and so on. Promotion is a marketing strategy that has objectives, including:

    • Identify and attract new consumers.
    • Communicate new products.
    • Increase the number of consumers for products that are widely known.
    • Inform consumers about product quality improvement.
    • Invite consumers to come to the place where the product is sold.
    • Motivate consumers to choose or buy a product.

    Basically, promotion is an information dissemination activity that is to persuade, influence and remind the market that your product is ready to be sold and bought by them. One of the things you can do is to advertise.

    Advertising can be done through media such as newspapers, electronics, brochures, banners, and social media. In the digital age like now, marketing strategies with promotions are very easy because there are lots of social media that will really help you.

    d. Price

    Price is one of the most important elements in the marketing mix . Price is the value that will be obtained in exchange for the product. Prices in the marketing mix include catalogs, discounts, special discounts, payment periods and credit terms.

    The price in question is the amount of money that must be paid by your user or client to get the product you are offering. In other words, someone will use the service or buy the product you offer, if the sacrifice incurred (ie money and time) is in accordance with the benefits he wants to get from the product or service offered by the company.

    Regarding this point, your focus is on how to make potential customers or potential buyers feel that their expenses are in accordance with what they get. That way, the marketing mix strategy will be more optimal.

    In determining the price of a product, you have to calculate it based on production costs, capital, and add a few percent profit. The selling price must be in accordance with market prices, not too high, and not too low.

    This is to prevent bankruptcy of course. If you want to sell at a higher price, provide a striking difference compared to your competitors, such as quality and variants, so that consumers feel ” worth it ” at the price of the product.

    2. Service Marketing Mix

    In the context of service marketing, Booms and Bitner (1981) added three elements of the marketing mix besides the 4Ps, so they are also known as the 7Ps.

    a. Participants (People Involved)

    The aspect of people in question is not only consumers. However, all human resources (HR) are involved, including workers to the business team. Especially for this aspect is very important to note. HR is an important component in the marketing mix strategy . The HR factor really determines the progress or failure of a company.

    We cannot deny that this factor plays an important role in making a progress or even a setback of a company. This is why various companies are competing to find the best job candidates, they are even willing to pay more to hire independent job seekers who are experts in finding job candidates for companies.

    Related questions, whether the employee has high performance or vice versa, whether the employee is loyal or vice versa, whether the employee is able to serve consumers well or vice versa will help the success of a service company in the market.

    Another important factor in HR is the attitude and motivation of employees in the service industry. Attitude can be applied in various forms, such as employee appearance, voice in speech, body language , facial expressions, and speech. The motivation will determine the extent to which employees want or like the work to be done.

    b. Process

    The process aspect is a combination of all activities. All of these activities are related to the products produced and delivered to consumers. The process here includes how the company serves the demands of each customer, starting from the customer ordering ( order ) until they finally get what they want.

    Certain companies usually have a unique or special way of serving their customers. Just like in a restaurant, there are several restaurants that provide ” open kitchen ” facilities, where consumers can see each process of making the food they order. This service method is an example of implementing a marketing mix strategy in a culinary business.

    c. Physical Evidence (Physical Appearance)

    Physical appearance is all the devices used to support the running of a business. The physical appearance of the place of business will explain how the company’s building is arranged. Does the company use unique interiors, attractive lightning systems , eye-catching room designs, and so on.

    Companies will certainly realize that the arrangement of buildings in a company will certainly affect the mood of visitors. An interior design that seems messy will certainly make consumers feel a little uncomfortable with the situation at the company.

    Buildings must be able to create a pleasant atmosphere, so as to provide an experience to visitors and can provide added value. The visual component is very important in the marketing mix strategy .

    3. Marketing Mix in Holistic Marketing

    Phillip Kotler and Kevin Lane Keller (2006) modified the 4P marketing mix elements and called them the evolution of marketing management which includes:

    • People .
    • Processes .
    • Programs (including Product, Price, Place and Promotion ).
    • Performance .

    Marketing Mix Goals

    Some of the objectives of the marketing mix include the following:

    1. Direct Marketing

    Direct marketing is a form of interactive marketing system in which one or more advertising media can be used to generate a measurable response or transaction at a location.

    2. Advertising (Advertising)

    Advertising is one of the most important forms of activity in the marketing mix . The main purpose of this advertising is to provide information about goods and services to target consumers in order to be able to increase sales.

    3. Sales Promotion

    Sales promotion is a collection of various intensive tools designed to encourage the purchase of a good or service.

    Marketing Mix function

    Some of the functions that can be obtained from the marketing mix include the following:

    1. Physical Distribution Function

    The physical distribution of a product can be done by transporting and storing the product.

    2. Exchange Function

    Consumers can buy products from manufacturers, either by exchanging money for products or by exchanging products for products for their own use or for resale.

    3. Intermediary Function

    Marketing mix is ​​an intermediary medium for delivering products from producers to consumers that connects exchange activities with physical distribution.

    Marketing Mix Benefits

    Some of the benefits that can be obtained from the marketing mix include the following:

    1. Able to Analyze Finance

    Business people must know how the flow of costs and income according to the situation that occurs.

    2. Wise Allocation of Resources

    Resources are usually limited so they must be used as effectively as possible.

    3. Facilitate the Communication Process

    Able to allocate in the form of responsibility for each part of the division with the respective tasks that have been determined.

    4. Simplify

    This concept can simplify and unify various forms of marketing activities into one so that the marketing department is easier to carry out and manage.

    5. Allocation of Responsibilities

    Businesses need a solid team, but businesses need to allocate responsibilities to each person according to their duties and abilities.

    Book Recommendations & Related Articles

     

    Reference

    • Baker, M., Graham, D., and Harker, M. (1998). Marketing: Managerial Foundations . South Yarra: Macmillan Education Australia Pty Ltd.
    • Cullington, JW (1948). The Management of Marketing Costs . Boston: Division of Research, Graduate School of Business Administration, Harvard University.
    • Kotler, P. and Keller, KL (2006). Marketing Management. Upper Saddle River: Prentice Hall.
    • McCarthy, JE (1968). Basic Marketing: A Managerial Approach . Homewood: Irwin.

     

  • Marketing Management: Definition, Functions, Objectives, Duties, and Concepts

    Marketing management or what is often called marketing management is a type of management needed for all businesses. This marketing management concerns products or services to be better known by consumers. Therefore, the company must understand the complete discourse regarding marketing management.

    Marketing management must be considered by an organization or company because it contributes many things to the smooth process of product marketing.

    Marketing management is also tasked with measuring and analyzing the strategic marketing process of a company or organization. Marketing management has a very important role in a company or organization because with marketing management the company can reach the desired target market and get more consumers.

    1. Definition of Marketing Management

    Marketing management (marketing management) is the analysis of planning, implementation, and control of programs designed to create, build and maintain profitable exchanges with target buyers to achieve organizational goals or company goals.

    According to Kottler and Keller (2012) states that marketing management as the art and science of choosing target markets and getting, keeping, and growing customers through creating, delivering, and communicating superior customer value.

    Marketing management (marketing management) comes from two words, namely management and marketing. Marketing is the analysis, planning, implementation and control of programs designed to create, build and maintain profitable exchanges with target buyers to achieve company goals.

    While management is the process of planning (planning) , organizing (organizing) , actuating (actuating) , directing (directing) , and monitoring (controlling).

    Marketing management is an attempt to plan, implement which consists of organizing, directing and supervising or controlling marketing activities within a company in order to achieve company goals efficiently and effectively.

    According to Sofyan Assauri (2013) marketing management is an activity of analyzing, planning, implementing, and controlling programs designed to establish, build, and maintain profits from exchanges through target markets in order to achieve company goals in the long term.

    Philip (2005) also explains that marketing management is the process of planning and executing, thinking, pricing promotions, and distributing goods and services to create exchanges that meet individual goals within the organization.

    Marketing management involves setting marketing goals and objectives, developing marketing plans, managing marketing functions, putting marketing plans into action, and controlling marketing programs.

    The existence of marketing management itself is because marketing a brand is an important matter for the company. Therefore, all decisions taken must be planned. You can learn about this in the Marketing Management book below.

    2. Marketing Management Function

    The function of marketing management includes analyzing activities, namely analysis carried out to find out the market and its marketing environment so that it can be obtained how big the opportunities are to seize the market and how big the threats must be.

    Explanation of integrated and mutually supporting marketing functions, among others:

    a. Market analysis

    Not all companies have a formal marketing and sales department, but every company must have and carry out various important elements contained in marketing and sales activities with the main aim of making new and old customers interested in returning to use the products and facilities offered continuously. continuously.

    To find out opportunities and threats as well as consumer needs and desires, there are several things that must be considered in the process of market analysis activities, namely: analysis of opportunities and threats, as well as analysis of consumer behavior.

    b. Market segmentation

    Market segmentation is the activity of dividing a market into different groups, where each group has almost the same characteristics.

    By conducting market segmentation, marketing activities can be carried out in a more targeted manner and resources in the field of marketing can be used more effectively and efficiently.

    Market segmentation must meet the requirements including: measurable both the size and breadth as well as the purchasing power of the market segment, accessible so that it can be served effectively, substantial so that it can be profitable if served, and actionable and all programs that has been designed to attract and serve market segmentation can be effective and efficient.

    c. Define target market

    Setting a target market means assigning an active value to each section and then selecting one or more market segments to serve.

    The activity of determining the target market includes: evaluation of market share (section size and growth such as data on customer age, income, gender of each segment), attractive structure in terms of profitability, and objectives and available resources.

    d. Market placement

    The new company must be able to identify the position of existing competitors before determining its own placement. Kotler (1992) explains there are two options, namely:

    1) Put yourself next to one of the existing competitors and fight for market share. Leaders can do this if they feel the company can make superior products, has a large market, and has more resources.

    2) Develop a product that has never been offered on the market today. Before making this decision management must be sure that technically a product can be made quickly, economically a superior product can be made at the planned price level, as well as an adequate number of consumers who like the product.

    e. Marketing planning

    Marketing activities carried out by a company are important to be coordinated and directed to achieve company goals in general and marketing objectives in particular.

    The marketing coordination and direction tool is a marketing plan. Regardless of what type of management style is adopted by a company in planning it must carry out the following four stages:
    1) Define the company’s mission
    2) Identify the company’s strategic business units, analyze and evaluate existing business portfolios
    3) Identify new business arenas that will be entered.

    Thus it can be concluded that marketing planning aims to provide a systematic and neat approach for companies by:
    1) Balancing and aligning marketing activities that ensure the achievement of goals and objectives.
    2) Using ways of doing business in the field of marketing in an incentive and optimal manner.
    3) Quick, precise, and regular control over records, ideas or thoughts as well as marketing efforts or activities within the company.

    Philip Kotler as one of the figures in marketing management released the book Marketing Management Edition 13 Volume 1 which you can get only at sinaumedia.

    3. Purpose of Marketing Management

    a. Creating demand or requests

    One of the goals of marketing management is to create demand in various ways. Making related ways to find out consumer tastes and consumer preferences for goods or services produced to meet consumer needs.

    b. Increase profits

    The marketing team is the only team that generates revenue for the company. Sufficient profit must be obtained as a result of the sale of goods or services wished to satisfy. If the company does not generate profits, then the company will not be able to survive. In addition, profit is also necessary for the growth and diversification of the company.

    c. Create new customers

    Companies are established to sell products or services to customers. Therefore, consumers are the basis of a company’s business. It is consumers who provide income to the company and determine what the company will sell.

    Creating new consumers means exploring and identifying customer needs more broadly. If a company wants to advance and stay in business, creating new customers is crucial. So it is necessary to analyze and understand consumer desires.

    d. Satisfying customers

    Creating new consumers is not enough. Companies must develop and distribute products (goods or services) that meet customer expectations to provide satisfaction. If consumers are not satisfied, then the business will not be able to generate revenue to meet costs and to get a reasonable return on investment.

    Satisfied consumers or customers do not mean only buying goods or services according to consumer needs. They will also make recommendations to those closest to them and can make the goods or services being marketed more widely known.

    e. Image a good product in the eyes of the public

    Building a good product image in society is another marketing management goal. If the marketing team provides quality goods and services to consumers at reasonable prices, it will certainly create a good image for consumers.

    In its application, Sinaumed’s can read the book Application of Marketing Management Tools in the Product Development Process (BP) which can help you better understand the relationship between product image and marketing management.

    4. Main Duties of Marketing Management

    The main task of marketing management is to market the company’s products so as to achieve a long-term profit level for the company, to ensure the survival and development of the company. Marketing management tasks are also inseparable from demand. So, the task of marketing management (marketing management) is not only to seek and develop demand for the company’s products but also includes setting the amount, timing and nature of requests in accordance with company goals.

    In general, the number of requests for goods or services can be greater or less or equal to the number of requests expected by a company. There are eight characteristics of demand that give rise to different marketing tasks. The eight requests include:

    a. Negative demand

    Negative demand is when all or part of an important segment of the potential market does not want the good or service and in fact it is conceivable that people will avoid paying the price.

    b. No demand (no demand)

    No demand means a condition in which all or some important segments of the potential market are not or are less interested in certain goods or services.

    c. Latent demand (hidden demand)

    Latent demand means where many people feel a great need for goods or services that have not been produced until now.

    d. Faltering demand

    Faltering demand is a situation in which the demand for certain goods or services tends to decrease if not followed by improvement efforts.

    e. Irregular demand

    Irregular demand is a condition where there is a time pattern of demand marked by seasonal fluctuations.

    f. Full demand

    Full demand is a situation where the amount and time of request is in accordance with the amount planned by the company. So, all requests can be fulfilled and there are no requests that cannot be fulfilled or there are no offers that are not solicited.

    g. Overfull demand (excessive demand)

    Overfull demand is a situation where the existing demand for certain goods or services exceeds the level of the company’s willingness to fulfill them.

    h. Unwholesome demand

    Unwholesome demand is an atmosphere in which a request is felt to be a violation or outside the limits of legislation and is not desirable to be offered or contains elements that are less desirable.

    Private Basu also provides a view that the main tasks of marketing management include:

    • Developing concepts aimed at satisfying and serving unfulfilled consumers.
    • Study the needs and wants of consumers.
    • Create a product design.
    • Conduct testing of the validity of the product concept.
    • Develop packaging and branding.
    • Set a price to get a decent return on investment.
    • Manage the course of distribution.
    • Creating effective marketing communications with various media.
    • Pay attention to consumer satisfaction.
    • Evaluate and continuously develop a marketing plan based on results.

    The concept of Marketing Management is also developing, where at first it was often used to monopolize the marketing department, now it has become an activity of all departments in a company. You can understand this better in the Marketing Management book by Prof. Dr. Thamrin Abdullah, Dr. Francis Tantri.

    5. Marketing Management Concept

    a. Production concept

    The production concept is the concept that consumers or customers will favor products that are available and affordable and management must strive to improve production and distribution efficiency. This concept is the oldest philosophy used in sales.

    This concept still applies to situations where the demand for the product is greater than the supply, and when the cost of the product is higher and productivity improvements are required to reduce it.

    b. Product concept

    The concept that consumers will favor the best quality products and the most innovative traits means that companies must devote energy to continuous product improvement.

    c. Sales concept

    The concept that consumers will not buy enough of a company’s products unless the company undertakes a large-scale sales and promotion effort.

    This concept is usually applied to goods that consumers may not think of buying, for example: insurance. This industry must be adept at tracking potential customers and selling product benefits to consumers with the aim of selling the goods or services the company makes, not what products consumers need.

    d. Marketing concept

    This marketing concept believes that achieving organizational goals depends on determining the needs and wants of target markets and delivering the desired satisfactions more effectively and efficiently than competitors.
    The marketing concept came into effect because sales began to fall, product growth slowed, purchasing patterns changed, competition increased, and selling costs increased.

    e. Social marketing concept

    The societal marketing concept means the concept that companies must determine market needs, wants and interests and deliver the desired satisfactions more effectively and efficiently than competitors in a way that maintains or improves the welfare of consumers and society.

    This concept invites marketers to build social and ethical considerations in their marketing practices. This is to balance and harmonize the three main factors that are important, namely company profits, satisfying consumer desires and public interest.

    To better understand the concepts contained in it, Sinaumed’s can study them through the book Basic Marketing Management Concepts of Strategy to develop their insights and knowledge.

    6. Marketing Management books

    Bibliography :

    • Kotler and Keller. 2009. Marketing Management. Volume I. 13th Edition. Jakarta:
      Erlangga
    • Kotler, Pllip. 2000. Marketing Management. Millennium Edition. Jakarta : PT.
      sinaumedia Group Index.
    • Kotler, Philip. 2005. Marketing Principles Volume I. Jakarta: Erlangga.
    • Kotler, Philip. 2005. Marketing Principles Volume I. Jakarta: Erlangga.
  • Market Share: Definition, Functions, Types, Up to How to Increase It

    Definition of market share – The business world will always intersect with market competition, so for business people to dominate the market is one of the main goals. Usually, business people will calculate how many sales have been made in a certain period to find out their company’s dominance in the market.

    In the business world, this achievement is often referred to as market share or market share. Market share itself is very important to know because it will be a benchmark for the company’s strength when compared to its competitors.

    So, in this article we will discuss the meaning of market share, what are its functions and types, how to calculate it, and tips for increasing market share. If you plan to start a business in the near future, pay close attention.

    Definition of Market Share

    Kotler and Armstrong (2013) define market share as the total sales of a company compared to the total sales in the market. This sales figure can be calculated rationally and used for several purposes, such as:

    • Determine the company’s position in the market
    • Formulate and select a strategy to be used to maintain or expand market share

    To make it easier, try to imagine that right now you are selling macaroni in a housing complex because this food is currently viral and much sought after. But you also have a lot of rivals.

    Let’s say that within one month there are 1000 people who buy macaroni, 300 of them buy from your place, the remaining 700 buy from competitors. This means you have a 30% market share.

    Usually, market share can change at any time depending on changes in consumer tastes or consumers moving their interests to other products. In addition, the more business actors in these commodities, the fiercer the market share competition will be.

    Marketshare function

    Market share has various functions for a company, including:

    1. Improve reputation

    In the eyes of consumers, market share is often used as an indicator of evaluating a company’s reputation. If the product you have manages to dominate the market and can maintain it for several periods, consumers will automatically have more confidence in the business you are running.

    In fact, there may be consumers who promote your products and business to other people without you asking at all. That way your business reputation will increase.

    2. Signs of potential new consumers

    Market share can also help you to know that there are potential new consumers in the industrial sector you choose. When the market share is still low, it means you have a great opportunity to reach these new consumers.

    3. Measuring business competitiveness

    The percentage of market share of the business you run can be an indicator to measure your company’s competitiveness. For example, if your market share is below that of your competitors, it means you have to find out what your competitors are doing to be in their position. The rest is all you have to do is develop an ATM strategy (Observe, Imitate, Modify) to increase market share.

    4. Measuring the amount of sales

    You can also use market share to measure sales volume. If the market share is high, it means that your product sales are good. Vice versa, if the market share is low, it means that your product sales are not good and you need to do an evaluation.

    The purpose of this evaluation is so that you can find out what are the factors that affect the decrease in the number of sales and then find a solution. For example, from the evaluation results you know that sales on social media such as Whatsapp and Facebook are not optimal, meaning you must immediately prepare a new digital sales strategy.

    Types of Market Share

    1. Value market share

    In value market share, the percentage calculation is based on the total sales segment. This means that the company calculates the percentage based on the achieved price.

    You need to know, the value market share figures are not always directly proportional to the volume market share. So, even though the value market share of your business is high, the volume market share is not necessarily high.

    2. Volume market share

    Volume market share refers to calculating the total number of products sold in the market. Interestingly, often the volume market share is lower than the value market share.

    3. Revenue market share

    Revenue market share is a type of market share whose calculation is based on revenue compared to competitors. In other words, revenue market share is more focused on the total money generated from product sales. This revenue market share figure can be a percentage of your product’s individual market share.

    4. Customer market share

    Customer market share is the ratio of the number of customers compared to the total number of customers in your business sector. This type is more widely used in the work sector where the number of consumers and subscribers is really concerned.

    Advantages And Disadvantages Of Market Share

    When you run a business or business and get a sizable market share, you will get the opportunity to attract potential investors to provide additional funds or capital.

    The reason is, businesses or businesses that have a fairly large market share and manage to maintain it tend to experience an increase in turnover. From this increase in turnover, the business expansion process becomes easier to do.

    But of course, a businessman cannot be satisfied quickly and must always try to increase his market share. There are lots of ways you can do this to make it happen, from lowering prices, taking advantage of digital advertising, product innovation, and many more. More details will be discussed in the next section.

    Apart from these advantages, market share also has its own drawbacks. This is because market share is basically a tool that can provide an initial picture that can be used by business people or companies.

    For example, if a company has a larger market share than its competitors but produces less profit, then the company’s market share is less effective as a measure of the company’s success.

    In addition, when there is one or several groups of companies that control the majority of market share, it will make it difficult for other companies to compete. Monopolies that are already very strong will certainly be difficult to tear down, especially for small companies. This situation seems to emphasize that small companies can only get a small profit.

    How to Calculate Market Share

    Calculating market share is important to do to find out a company’s competitiveness or how much “power” a company’s product has in the market. To calculate it, you can use the formula:

    Market share = (company revenue/total industry revenue) x 100%

    For example like this:

    During 2021 yesterday, the macaroni business that you ran managed to collect revenue of IDR 30 million while the total revenue for the macaroni industry in 2021 was IDR 130 million, so the market share for your macaroni business will be:

    Market share: (Rp 30,000,000/Rp 130,000,000) x 100% = 23.07%

    So, the macaroni business that you are running has managed to control 23.07% market share in the macaroni sales industry.

    You need to know, before calculating market share you must determine the target consumers of the business you are running. This target consumer must be specific. For example, you set your target consumers to be school students and university students. So, school and college students need to be even more specific.

    For example students and college students whose allowance is more than 30 thousand per day or 900 thousand per month. From here you can know that the target consumers of your business are students who come from lower middle class families.

    Factors That Can Hamper Companies To Reach Market Share

    In practice, there are external and internal factors that can hinder or become obstacles for companies to reach their market share. These factors must be evaluated in depth so that the company can determine how to overcome them. These factors are:

    1. The target market does not match the product

    Sometimes there are business people who are mistaken in determining the target market so that it does not match the product offered. For example, you sell premium macaroni at a price of IDR 50,000 per kilo, but you offer it to students or students whose allowance is IDR 30,000 per day. This strategy is clearly not going to work because the price of the product being offered is too expensive.

    There are also some business people who directly target the middle to upper market when they are just starting operations or are still in the pioneering phase and the brand is not very well known. Indeed there is nothing wrong with this strategy, it’s just that the chance of loss is quite large.

    2. More and more competitors

    The next factor is the number of competitors in the same industry is increasing. With so many product providers, consumers can choose goods that really suit their needs. If you play in an industry like this, you must be smart in finding the Unique Selling Point (USP) of your product so that it has more value in the eyes of consumers.

    3. The company’s competitiveness is declining

    Decreasing company competitiveness can also be a factor that makes it difficult for a business to reach the targeted market share. For example, the product that you have has no appeal or advantages that differentiate it from products from other competitors.

    4. Misdirected marketing

    Currently, all businesses can use technology to create advertisements on all channels, from social media, websites, to digital media. This method is effective for targeting customers who have specific interests or are relevant to the business.

    However, this method also requires the right marketing strategy and cannot be done haphazardly. At the very least, you have to make the right targeting so that the ads actually reach the right people.

    Ways To Increase Market Share

    1. Do the Observe, Imitate, Modify (ATM) method

    In the business world, there is a method called Observe, Imitate, Modify or often abbreviated as ATM. With this method, business people can seek inspiration from competitors and then modify it to suit the conditions they face.

    Often times, novice business people consider this method to be 100% plagiarism. In fact, ATM and plagiarism are different. Because ATM only takes inspiration, not using the same idea or strategy 100%.

    Therefore, to implement this ATM method there are several things that must be considered from competitors, including:

    • What are the advantages and disadvantages of competitors’ products?
    • How do they serve their customers?
    • What are the marketing strategies used by competitors?

    After getting all the answers, you can think of a strategy that suits your business conditions.

    2. Set your product’s Unique Selling Point

    To win the competition, the products you offer must be superior to competitors. How to? Yes, by setting the Unique Selling Point (USP) of your product.

    USP itself is something that differentiates your product from competitors’ products so that consumers are interested in buying your product rather than competitors’. Some ways that can be done to determine the USP are:

    • First understand what consumers want. The method is to conduct a survey directly to consumers using a digital form. Here you can ask what consumers like and don’t like about your product.
    • After that, you can ask for feedback about service, prices, and other things related to your business
    • Then evaluate the product marketing strategy so that it can match the wishes of consumers
    • You can also find out the shortcomings of competitors’ products and make it the USP of your product. Here there are lots of aspects that you can see, starting from product quality, price, how to serve consumers, language style, even to social media feeds.

    3. Create a business-specific website

    In this digital era, businesses can create special websites for various purposes. For example increasing customer trust or selling products directly. In addition, the website can also be used to develop a business by:

    • Implement a digital marketing strategy
    • Implementing SEO so that the website is on the first page of search engines
    • Search Engine Marketing (SEM)
    • And others

    4. Take advantage of effective marketing strategies

    Utilizing an effective strategy can make it easier for businesses to reach consumers, therefore a businessman must be good at developing marketing strategies. For example using artists to become brand ambassadors, or using celebrity services to promote products on Instagram, and others.

    5. Maintain relationships with consumers

    Reaching new consumers is important, but ensuring that consumers become customers must also be considered. To make it happen you have to maintain relationships with consumers.

    Remember, loyal customers can be an opportunity to increase market share because they will promote your products to friends, family, neighbors, co-workers, even on social media.

    After that, make sure you keep loyal customers from running away to competitors. You can do this by:

    • Always presenting innovative products that can meet consumer needs
    • Continue to maintain product quality
    • Using Cross Selling or Up Selling
    • Provide the best service to every customer
    • Organizing customer loyalty programs

    6. Lower product prices

    In any part of the world, consumers always prefer lower prices and you can make this habit a strategy to increase market share. With a note, you have to do the calculations carefully and think about all the possibilities well.

    7. Lyrics of new demographic groups

    The more your business audience, the greater the sales opportunities. Therefore, if you feel you can and need it, you should try new demographic group lyrics.

    This demographic can be age, economic status, income, interests, or something else. In other words, you create new target markets and marketing strategies based on different demographics.

    8. Routinely evaluate

    The last way to increase market share is to routinely evaluate. You can make evaluations to assess business development every week, month, semester, to yearly. If needed, you can adapt the strategy to the conditions at hand.

    Although the last method is important, not a few business people forget it. Usually after the business is running, the businessman only focuses on income, marketing, and expenses. Though evaluation is also important in business development.

    Thus the discussion about the meaning of market share and how to increase it. Hopefully all the discussion above is useful as well as add to your insight.

    If you want to find various kinds of books about consumers, then you can get them at sinaumedia.com . To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

    Author: Gilang Oktaviana Putra

  • Manufacturing Agent: Definition, Types, Strengths, and Weaknesses

    Manufacturing agents – In marketing a product, a manufacturer may use agents and intermediaries who do not have the rights to the goods. Typically, these agencies will only do a small amount of marketing flow. Meanwhile, its main function is to facilitate buying and selling: that is, bringing sellers and buyers together and negotiating between the two.

    Agents that are commonly found in the real estate industry, insurance, to food, can represent sellers or buyers and then are paid by the party that employs them. Often times, an agent may represent several non-competitive product manufacturers on a commission basis.

    One of the agents that cannot be dismissed from the industry is a manufacturing agent . Then, what exactly is meant by a manufacturing agent? Check out the full explanation in this article, Sinaumed’s

    Plastic And Composite Manufacturing Processes – Revised Edition

     

     

    Definition of Manufacturing Agent

    Manufacturing agents are agents who work directly with factories, to carry out marketing to some or all of the goods produced by these factories. There can be more than one factory whose products are sold by a manufacturing agent, and usually the products sold are products that do not compete in the same industry.

    Among companies that don’t have enough capital to independently recruit a sales team, the existence of this one agent is very popular, Sinaumed’s.

    In the United States, most manufacturing companies, both small and medium-sized, rely on independent agents to sell their products. The independent agency form of representation is also transitioning for a number of large companies as it has proven to be a cost-effective selling tool.

    Wholesalers, retailers, government agencies, equipment manufacturers, hospitals, and schools are places where agents can sell products. As mentioned, a manufacturing agent may also represent several manufacturers who produce compatible, but non-competitive, lines.

    For example, one agent could represent a company that produces shoes and bags.

    Manufacturing Agent Duties

    Today, manufacturing agents are considered to be highly skilled marketing professionals, which is also where companies introduce these agents to the products they will represent. With these companies, agents are in regular contact, demonstrating special product features, giving demonstrations, and advising on technical features that will be useful.

    Extensive knowledge about the company represented and the product to be marketed must be owned by a manufacturing agent. In fact, agents must also quote credit terms, prices, delivery dates and methods, to costs.

    In addition, these agents may also handle one-off sales, introduce new products, keep track of orders for certain items coming into the factory, and ensure their customers receive excellent service.

    Advantages and Disadvantages of Manufacturing Agents

    As we have seen, having a manufacturing agency is very popular among certain companies that are short on capital. So, what are the advantages and disadvantages of using the services of a manufacturing agent? Here’s the review.

    Excess

    • More efficient marketing and sales budgets for newly established pilot factories.
    • Manufacturers gain insight into market trends, customer demographics, and industries from other regions.
    • Manufacturing agents can help sales by selling compatible products into a single market, for industries where the market is narrow.

    Lack

    • Because they feel they have good sales performance, manufacturing agents have the potential to act autonomously even though they are not employees of the company.
    • Often times, manufacturing agents fail to handle sales because they don’t focus on just one product.

    Types of Manufacturing Agents

    Sinaumed’s, next, we will describe the types of manufacturing agents that you need to know. Let’s see together!

    1. Technical Product Selling

    Usually, a manufacturing agent whose type is technical product selling sells merchandise that is used by the industry in its own business. Perhaps, this process involves the raw materials and parts that the company needs to produce the finished product that it sells. It can also be machinery or electronic equipment designed to make a company operate more efficiently.

    Companies that produce transportation equipment, fabricated metal products, electronics, and heavy machinery are the largest employers who can use manufacturing agents. Often, a single sale represents hundreds of thousands of dollars worth of machines. However, it may take that one sale months to years to complete.

    2. Non-Technical Product Selling

    Generally, manufacturing agents representing non-technical products sell their wares to wholesalers or large retail stores for resale to the general public. The type of goods sold also determines how they approach customers.

    A lot of time that this type of manufacturing agent spends taking orders from customers through existing channels. However, efforts are made to increase the size of these orders by helping wholesalers to sell their existing stock properly.

    3. Sales Promotion Activities

    Another place for manufacturing agents to profit is in sales promotion jobs. This type of agency promotes sales by providing merchandising services and advice instead of selling physical products.

    They also help retailers and build intent, both to increase sales. The reason is, they provide advice on store design, publicity opportunities, exhibitions, special events, to other advertising media.

    Solidworks For Manufacturing Design

     

     

    Manufacturing and Small Business Agents

    Approximately, how are manufacturing agents and small businesses related? What are the advantages and disadvantages like? Come on, see below!

    1. Profit

    Manufacturing agents also provide information to relocation companies or new companies regarding demographics and market trends directly, aka being at the forefront, in addition to providing financial benefits. Companies can gain instant access to industry knowledge or expertise in a given region or country by contracting with a manufacturing agency.

    In addition, there are other advantages such as offering one of the best ways of market access for manufacturers with narrow product lines. Manufacturing agency companies generally have good relations with the manufacturer’s main target market because they usually sell compatible products to a single market.

    This allows manufacturers to enter markets that may be difficult to reach with a direct sales force. Not only that, new businesses can get ideas from manufacturing agents regarding where to advertise, estimates of the potential for certain areas, to comments on competitor strategies!

    2. Lack

    The drawback is that, despite using manufacturing bros, business owners and consultants note that it makes perfect sense for small companies that have to allocate their financial resources very vigilantly and learn quickly about the market, running into certain drawbacks.

    For example, the most frequent complaint of business owners when discussing manufacturing agency companies is the lack of control over agents. This is because company ownership cannot determine how to run a business because manufacturing agents are not company employees.

    Indeed, small business owners can negotiate certain matters with agents, just as clients do with vendors. However, some critics in the final analysis also claimed that manufacturing agents were not always able to devote the necessary time to a single product line because they were doing business on behalf of more than one manufacturer.

    Often, the initial assistance and follow-up services that are included in the basic elements of customer service must be supplied by the manufacturer even if the goods are sold out of the hands of a manufacturing agent.

    Another concern with manufacturing agents is that they increase sales costs by acting as intermediaries in the process.

    However, as Bob Trinkle mentions at Agency Sales Magazine , while manufacturing agencies are an alternative or substitute for direct selling so they should be viewed as a form of outsourcing of the sales function, the need to maintain an internal sales staff for a specific region or product line should be eliminated when hiring agents. manufacture.

    Actually, agents in this way can help small businesses in reducing administrative costs.

    Choosing a Manufacturing Agent

    Manufacturers have many factors to consider when they go through the process of selecting a manufacturing agent. Small business owners should look for someone who demonstrates the ability and willingness to be knowledgeable about their product and application, as well as someone who will respond quickly and present the product in terms of meeting customer needs.

    A good agent will also represent the various product lines he or she markets in a fair way, giving each line the attention it deserves, regardless of how much revenue is factored in (this last concern is especially important for small and new businesses).

    The best rule of thumb for manufacturers is to be patient and do lots of preliminary research. After all, the choice will be the main link between the company and its target audience. Bad choices can ruin a company; conversely, good choices can help launch new producers toward long-term financial stability.

    Given the stakes involved in this choice, MANA recommends in its Directory of Manufacturer Sales Agencies that business owners consider doing the following when weighing their options:

    1. Create an Ideal Agency Profile

    Make the profile clear, but also flexible and realistic. The perfect agency doesn’t exist, but there are many who would do a great job given the chance.

    2. Create a Manufacturing Company Profile

    Manufacturers are encouraged to compile profiles of their target customers, an overview of business needs, and a summary of the philosophy that governs the business. Many agencies can be selective about who to add to their client list, so it makes sense to let them know about the business and its goals and prospects.

    The profile should also be honest and touch on growth plans, the real advantages of the products it manufactures, and past history.

    3. Securing Referrals from Other Agencies

    In the United States, manufacturing agents are closely related and many can name several suitable agencies for the line.

    4. Get References from Other Manufacturers

    Companies in the same area that sell similar products but are not competitive can be a good source of information in finding potential agents. Some may even recommend their own agent, although others may be reluctant to have their agent take on additional product lines and responsibilities.

    5. Be patient

    While manufacturers don’t have the luxury of waiting forever when filling agent vacancies, doing an early re-search is usually a good idea. Many manufacturers later admit that they did not spend enough time exploring their options and learning about their chosen agent. It’s better to take the time it takes to pick the right prospects than to rush into a bad situation and have to fix it later.

    6. Be Flexible in Setting Up Territories

    Agents should have exclusive rights within a territory, but rather than assigning an arbitrary region based on geography, it’s often better to choose the agent best suited to our line and let their scope define the region.

    “Manufacturers should always recognize that independent agents choose independence because they want to do what they want to do, not what any producer wants them to do,” writes Harold J. Novick in Agency Sales Magazine .

    “Therefore, the key to success with an independent agency is finding that one high-performing agency that comes closest to doing what you want it to do in the market today. Hiring an agent with even one key characteristic missing can substantially reduce your possible market share in that regard. Finding the right representatives creates a high probability for a true win-win situation, as both ‘partners’ have the same goal,” he continued.

    7. Liaising with Agents

    Manufacturers should remember that their manufacturing agents are independent sales agents who are not employees of any of their principals, but are business partners with each principal. Thus, manufacturers cannot have the same type of direct control that they exercise over their own personnel.

    From a legal standpoint, it’s important to remember that the manufacturer pays nothing to the agent until the sale is made. They also don’t pay withholding taxes or Social Security.

    Using a manufacturing agent also means that some of the manufacturer’s bookkeeping needs will be taken care of by non-employees. This is an important distinction for the Internal Revenue Service (IRS), which strongly dislikes arrangements in which companies disguise employees under the guise of an independent agent or contractor.

    When assessing this, the IRS usually uses it as one of its tests of the amount of direct control it exercises over the sales force. If regular reports are requested from an independent agent, the IRS can declare the agent an employee and request various applicable withholding taxes.

    Communication remains an integral part of the relationship between agents and their clients. Both sides need to continue to judge the other about their operations. Agents must tell their principals what they are doing for them in the field, regardless of sales levels at the time, while agents need up-to-date information on things like product specifications and prices.

    In the end, both parties just need to recognize that a cohesive working relationship is in their mutual best interest. In dealing with representatives, manufacturers expect: loyalty; knowledge of the region and/or industry; knowledge of the product line after reasonable exposure; quick response to suggestions; regular follow-up; and their fair share of time agents. Agent.

    Meanwhile, both parties have the right to expect a number of things, including:

    • Fair contracts that recognize performance and reward success and longevity.
    • Access to customer service, training and technical support.
    • Quality product.
    • Timely delivery.
    • A true commitment to building a business in their area.

    Manufacturing Product Design & Development

     

     

    Closing

    Sinaumed’s, that’s an explanation regarding manufacturing agents and their relationship with various products and even producers. It is also important to know the practice abroad as a reference. That way, our insights about manufacturing agents are increasing. After knowing various things about manufacturing agents, are you interested in getting into the world of manufacturing?

    If Sinaumed’s is interested in reading books related to manufacturing, then you can get them on the sinaumedia.com website. To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information .

    Author: Sevilla Nouval Evanda